795537
347
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/351
Next page
Introduction .................................... 2
In brief ............................................ 6
Keys, doors and windows ............ 19
Seats, restraints ........................... 44
Storage ........................................ 71
Instruments and controls ............. 82
Lighting ...................................... 108
Infotainment system ................... 116
Climate control ........................... 205
Driving and operating ................. 221
Vehicle care ............................... 265
Service and maintenance .......... 309
Technical data ........................... 312
Customer information ................ 316
Body conversions ...................... 324
Index .......................................... 340
Contents
Emergency numbers
For emergency service call the Vauxhall
Incident Manager
0800 55 33 88 (Free
Linkline)*
Vauxhall Assistance General Enquiries 0845 7565 565
You will need to
provide:
Vehicle registration
number
Contact telephone
number
Model and colour of
your Vauxhall
Details of your precise
location
* Calls may be chargeable from mobile phones
2 Introduction
Introduction
Introduction 3
Vehicle specific data
Please enter your vehicle's data on
the previous page to keep it easily
accessible.
Refer to the sections "Service and
maintenance", "Technical data", the
vehicle's identification plate and
national registration documents.
Introduction
Your vehicle is a designed
combination of advanced technology,
safety, environmental friendliness
and economy.
This Owner's Manual provides you
with all the necessary information to
enable you to drive your vehicle
safely and efficiently.
Make sure your passengers are
aware of the possible risk of accident
and injury which may result from
improper use of the vehicle.
You must always comply with the
specific laws and regulations of the
country that you are in. These laws
may differ from the information in this
Owner's Manual.
Disregarding the description given in
this manual may affect your warranty.
When this Owner's Manual refers to a
workshop visit, we recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers
provide first-class service at
reasonable prices. Experienced
mechanics trained by Vauxhall work
according to specific Vauxhall
instructions.
The customer literature pack should
always be kept ready to hand in the
vehicle.
Using this manual
This manual describes all options
and features available for this
model. Certain descriptions,
including those for display and
menu functions, may not apply to
your vehicle due to model
variant, country specifications,
special equipment or
accessories.
The "In brief" section will give you
an initial overview.
The table of contents at the
beginning of this manual and
within each section shows where
the information is located.
The index will enable you to
search for specific information.
This Owner's Manual depicts left-
hand drive vehicles. Operation is
similar for right-hand drive
vehicles.
The Owner's Manual uses the
factory engine designations. The
corresponding sales
designations can be found in the
section "Technical data".
Directional data, e.g. left or right,
or front or back, always relate to
the direction of travel.
The vehicle display screens may
not support your specific
language.
Display messages and interior
labelling are written in bold
letters.
4 Introduction
Danger, Warnings and
Cautions
9Danger
Text marked 9 Danger provides
information on risk of fatal injury.
Disregarding this information may
endanger life.
9Warning
Text marked 9 Warning provides
information on risk of accident or
injury. Disregarding this
information may lead to injury.
Caution
Text marked Caution provides
information on possible damage to
the vehicle. Disregarding this
information may lead to vehicle
damage.
Symbols
Page references are indicated with 3.
3 means "see page".
Page references and index entries
refer to the indented headings given
in the section table of content.
Thank you for choosing a Vauxhall.
We wish you many hours of
pleasurable driving.
Your Vauxhall Team
Introduction 5
6 In brief
In brief
Initial drive information
Vehicle unlocking
Unlocking with key
Turn the key in the driver's door lock.
Open the doors by pulling the
handles.
Unlocking with remote control
Depending on vehicle configuration:
Press c to unlock the front doors.
Press again to unlock entire vehicle.
Open the doors by pulling the
handles.
With 3-button remote control, press
G. Only the load compartment is
unlocked.
Radio remote control 3 20.
Central locking system 3 23.
Anti-theft alarm system 3 35.
In brief 7
Unlocking with electronic key
Press the button on any exterior door
handle when the electronic key is
within range of the detection zone
(approx. 1 m of the front doors or load
compartment) and pull the handle to
open.
Electronic key system 3 21.
Seat adjustment
Longitudinal adjustment
Pull handle, slide seat, release
handle.
Try to move the seat back and forth to
ensure that the seat is locked in place.
Seat position 3 45.
Seat adjustment 3 46.
Backrests inclination
Pull lever, adjust inclination and
release lever. Allow the seat to
engage audibly.
Seat position 3 45.
Seat adjustment 3 46.
8 In brief
Seat height
Lever motion
up : seat higher
down : seat lower
Seat position 3 45.
Seat adjustment 3 46.
Head restraint adjustment
Press release button, adjust height,
engage.
Head restraints 3 44.
Seat belt
Pull out the seat belt and fasten in belt
buckle. The seat belt must not be
twisted and must fit close against the
body. The backrest must not be tilted
back too far (maximum approx. 25°).
To unfasten belt, press red button on
belt buckle.
Seat position 3 45.
Seat belts 3 54.
Airbag system 3 58.
In brief 9
Mirror adjustment
Interior mirror
To adjust the mirror, move the mirror
housing in the desired direction.
Interior mirror, wide view mirror
3 39.
Rear view display 3 40.
Exterior mirrors
Manual adjustment
Swivel mirror in required direction.
Exterior mirrors 3 38.
Electric adjustment
Select the relevant exterior mirror and
adjust it by swivelling the control.
Convex exterior mirrors 3 38.
Electric adjustment 3 38.
Folding exterior mirrors 3 38.
Heated exterior mirrors 3 39.
10 In brief
Steering wheel adjustment
Unlock lever, adjust steering wheel,
then engage lever and ensure it is
fully locked.
Do not adjust steering wheel unless
vehicle is stationary and steering
wheel lock has been released.
Airbag system 3 58.
Ignition positions 3 223.
In brief 11
Instrument panel overview
12 In brief
1Side air vents ...................... 218
2Light switch ........................ 108
Turn lights ........................... 111
Front / rear fog lights .......... 111
Headlight flash .................... 110
High beam ........................... 109
High beam assist ............... 109
Exit lighting ......................... 114
3Horn ..................................... 83
Driver airbag ......................... 61
4Instruments .......................... 89
Driver Information Centre .... 103
5Windscreen wiper and
washer, rear wiper and
washer ................................. 84
Buttons for Driver
Information Centre .............. 103
6Air vents ............................. 218
7Info Display ........................ 103
8USB socket, AUX socket,
SD card slot .......................... 86
9Storage ................................. 71
10 Cupholder ............................. 72
11 Tray ....................................... 71
12 Glovebox .............................. 72
13 Parking assist ...................... 252
Lane departure warning ...... 258
Electronic Stability Control
and Traction Control ........... 244
Hazard warning flashers .... 111
Central locking system .......... 23
Stop-start system ................ 225
Side blind spot alert ............ 254
ECO mode .......................... 222
14 Inductive charging ................. 88
15 Climate control system ........ 205
16 Power outlet .......................... 86
17 Cruise control ..................... 246
Speed limiter ....................... 248
18 Manual transmission .......... 238
Manual transmission
automated .......................... 238
19 Ignition switch ..................... 223
20 Infotainment controls
21 Steering wheel adjustment ..83
22 Bonnet release lever .......... 267
23 Fuse box ............................ 284
24 Headlight range
adjustment ......................... 110
25 Power take-off ..................... 263
Idle speed control ............... 225
Laden mode kg ................... 240
In brief 13
Exterior lighting
Turn outer light switch:
7: off
0: sidelights
9 P: headlights
AUTO : automatic light control:
headlights are switched on
and off automatically.
Lighting 3 108.
Automatic light control 3 108.
Headlight warning device 3 105.
Front fog lights 3 111.
Rear fog light 3 112.
Headlight flash, high beam and
low beam
Pull lever.
High beam 3 109.
Headlight flash 3 110.
Turn lights
up : right turn light
down : left turn light
Turn lights 3 111.
14 In brief
Hazard warning flashers
Operated by pressing ¨.
Hazard warning flashers 3 111.
Horn
Press j.
Horn 3 83.
Washer and wiper systems
Windscreen wiper
0: off
P/AUTO : timed interval wiping or
automatic wiping with
rain sensor
1: slow
2: fast
Windscreen wiper 3 84.
Wiper blade replacement 3 274.
In brief 15
Windscreen washer
Pull lever.
short
pull : wiper swipes once and
washer fluid is sprayed onto
the windscreen
long
pull : wiper swipes for a few
strokes and washer fluid is
sprayed onto the
windscreen
Windscreen washer 3 84.
Washer fluid 3 270.
Climate control
Heated rear window
Heating is operated by pressing Ü.
Heated rear window 3 42.
Heated exterior mirrors
Pressing Ü also activates the heated
exterior mirrors.
Heated exterior mirrors 3 39.
Demisting and defrosting the
windows
Climate control system
Switch cooling A/C on if
available.
Set temperature control to
warmest level.
Set fan speed to highest level.
Set air distribution control to V.
Switch on heated rear window Ü.
Open side air vents as required
and direct them towards door
windows.
Climate control system 3 205.
16 In brief
Electronic climate control system
Press V.
Temperature and air distribution are
set automatically and the fan runs at
a high speed.
Electronic climate control system
3 207.
Transmission
Manual transmission
Reverse: with the vehicle stationary,
depress clutch pedal and then pull up
the collar on the selector lever and
engage the gear.
If the gear does not engage, set the
lever to neutral, release the clutch
pedal and depress again; then repeat
gear selection.
Manual transmission 3 238.
Manual transmission automated
N: neutral
o: drive position
+: higher gear
-: lower gear
D/M : switch between automatic and
manual mode
R: reverse gear. Engage only
when vehicle is stationary.
Manual transmission automated
3 238.
In brief 17
Starting off
Check before starting off
Tyre pressure 3 289 and
condition 3 314.
Engine oil level and fluid levels
3 268.
All windows, mirrors, exterior
lighting and number plates are
free from dirt, snow and ice and
are operational.
Proper position of mirrors 3 38,
seats 3 45 and seat belts
3 55.
Brake function at low speed,
particularly if the brakes are wet.
Starting the engine
Turn key to position 1.
Move the steering wheel slightly
to release the steering wheel
lock.
Operate clutch and brake.
Do not operate accelerator pedal.
Turn the key to position 2 for
preheating and wait until control
indicator ! extinguishes.
Turn key to position 3 and
release.
Starting the engine 3 224.
Stop-start system
An Autostop is indicated when control
indicator Ï illuminates in the Driver
Information Centre.
Manual transmission
If the vehicle is at low speed or in
standstill and certain conditions are
fulfilled, activate an Autostop as
follows:
depress the clutch pedal
move the selector lever to neutral
release the clutch pedal
To restart the engine, with the
selector lever in neutral, depress the
clutch pedal.
Manual transmission automated
If the vehicle is at a standstill and
certain conditions are fulfilled,
activate an Autostop as follows:
selector lever in position N (or
D/M)
depress brake pedal firmly
do not accelerate
18 In brief
To restart the engine, with the
selector lever in position N (or D/M)
and the parking brake released,
release the brake pedal.
Stop-start system 3 225.
Parking
9Warning
Do not park the vehicle on an
easily ignitable surface. The
high temperature of the
exhaust system could ignite the
surface.
Always apply parking brake
without pressing release
button. Apply as firmly as
possible on a downhill slope or
uphill slope. Depress brake
pedal at the same time to
reduce operating force.
Switch off the engine.
If the vehicle is on a level
surface or uphill slope, engage
first gear. On an uphill slope,
turn the front wheels away from
the kerb.
If the vehicle is on a downhill
slope, engage reverse gear.
Turn the front wheels towards
the kerb.
Close the windows.
Remove the ignition key from
the ignition switch. Turn the
steering wheel until the
steering wheel lock is felt to
engage.
Lock the vehicle by pressing e on
the remote control 3 23.
Activate the anti-theft alarm
system 3 35.
The engine cooling fans may run
after the engine has been
switched off 3 267.
Caution
After running at high engine
speeds or with high engine loads,
operate the engine briefly at a low
load or run in neutral for approx.
30 seconds before switching off, in
order to protect the turbocharger.
Keys, locks 3 19.
Laying the vehicle up for a long period
of time 3 266.
Keys, doors and windows 19
Keys, doors and
windows
Keys, locks ................................... 19
Keys .......................................... 19
Car Pass .................................... 20
Radio remote control ................. 20
Electronic key system ................ 21
Door locks ................................. 22
Manual door locks ..................... 23
Central locking system .............. 23
Power door locks ....................... 28
Automatic locking ...................... 28
Child locks ................................. 29
Doors ........................................... 29
Sliding door ............................... 29
Rear doors ................................. 33
Vehicle security ............................ 34
Anti-theft locking system ........... 34
Anti-theft alarm system .............. 35
Immobiliser ................................ 37
Exterior mirrors ............................ 38
Convex shape ........................... 38
Manual adjustment .................... 38
Electric adjustment .................... 38
Folding mirrors .......................... 38
Heated mirrors ........................... 39
Interior mirrors ............................. 39
Manual anti-dazzle .................... 39
Rear view display ...................... 40
Windows ...................................... 40
Windscreen ............................... 40
Manual windows ........................ 41
Power windows ......................... 41
Rear windows ............................ 41
Heated rear window .................. 42
Sun visors .................................. 43
Roof ............................................. 43
Glass panel ............................... 43
Keys, locks
Keys
Caution
Do not attach heavy or bulky items
to the ignition key.
Replacement keys
The key number is specified in the
Car Pass or on a detachable tag.
The key number must be quoted
when ordering replacement keys as it
is a component of the immobiliser
system.
If the electronic key needs to be
replaced, the vehicle must be taken to
a workshop.
Locks 3 305.
Radio remote control 3 20.
Electronic key system 3 21.
Central locking system 3 23.
Starting the engine 3 224.
20 Keys, doors and windows
Lock cylinders
Designed to free-wheel if they are
forcefully rotated without the correct
key or if the correct key is not fully
inserted. To reset, turn cylinder with
the correct key until its slot is vertical,
remove key and then re-insert it. If the
cylinder still free-wheels, turn the key
through 180° and repeat operation.
Car Pass
The Car Pass contains security
related vehicle data and should
therefore be kept in a safe place.
When the vehicle is taken to a
workshop, this vehicle data is needed
in order to perform certain operations.
Radio remote control
Used to operate:
central locking system
anti-theft locking system
anti-theft alarm system
Depending on model, the vehicle may
use a 2-button or 3-button remote
control.
The remote control has a range of
approx. 5 m. It can be affected by
external influences. The hazard
warning flashers confirm operation.
Handle with care, protect it from
moisture and high temperatures and
avoid unnecessary operation.
Fault
If the central locking system cannot
be operated with the remote control,
it may be due to the following:
The range is exceeded.
The battery voltage is too low.
Frequent, repeated operation of
the remote control while not in
range, which will require
reprogramming by a workshop.
Overload of the central locking
system by operating at frequent
intervals; the power supply is
interrupted for a short time.
Interference from higher-power
radio waves from other sources.
Unlocking 3 23.
Remote control battery
replacement
Replace the battery as soon as the
range reduces.
Keys, doors and windows 21
Batteries do not belong in household
waste. They must be disposed of at
an appropriate recycling collection
point.
Remove screw and open battery
compartment by inserting a coin into
the slot and twisting.
Replace the battery (battery type
CR2016), paying attention to the
installation position.
Reattach both halves of cover
ensuring it engages correctly.
Replace screw and tighten.
Electronic key system
Enables a hands-free operation of the
central locking system 3 23.
The electronic key simply needs to be
on the driver's person.
Notice
Always take the electronic key with
you when exiting the vehicle.
For hands-free operation, the
electronic key must be outside the
vehicle, within a range of approx.
1 m of the front doors or load
compartment.
Hands-free operation is automatically
disabled when the central locking
switch e 3 23 is pressed. To re-
enable hands-free operation, restart
the engine.
22 Keys, doors and windows
Electronic key battery
replacement
Replace the battery as soon as the
system no longer operates properly
or the range is reduced.
Batteries do not belong in household
waste. They must be disposed of at
an appropriate recycling collection
point.
Open battery compartment by
inserting a coin into the slot and
twisting.
Replace the battery (battery type
CR2016), paying attention to the
installation position.
Notice
Do not touch the electronic circuit in
the cover when replacing the
battery.
Reattach both halves of cover
ensuring it engages correctly.
Fault
If the central locking system cannot
be operated or the engine cannot be
started, the cause may be one of the
following:
fault in electronic key
electronic key out of reception
range
battery voltage too low
overload of the central locking
system by operating at frequent
intervals, the power supply is
interrupted for a short time
interference from higher-power
radio waves from other sources
Door locks
Anti-theft security lock
To prevent the front doors from being
opened from the outside, open the
door and engage the anti-theft
security lock.
Keys, doors and windows 23
Using a suitable tool, turn the lock
switch on the door to the horizontal
locked position. The door cannot be
opened from outside and can only be
opened from inside the vehicle or by
using the manual key.
To disengage, turn the switch to the
unlocked position.
Manual door locks
To unlock the front doors manually,
turn the key in the driver's door lock.
Open the front doors by pulling the
handles.
Sliding side door(s) 3 29.
To unlock the rear doors manually,
turn the key in the right-hand rear
door lock. Open the door by pulling
the handle.
The left-hand rear door is then
released using the lever on the inside
edge of the door.
Always close the left-hand door
before the right-hand door.
Rear doors 3 33.
Central locking system
Unlocks and locks the front doors,
sliding side doors and load
compartment.
With the 3-button remote control, the
front doors and load compartment
(and, depending on vehicle
configuration, the sliding side doors)
can be unlocked and locked
separately.
Notice
A short time after unlocking with the
remote control the doors are locked
automatically if no door has been
opened.
24 Keys, doors and windows
Unlocking the vehicle
Operation of central locking system
with the remote control is confirmed
by the hazard warning flashers. The
hazard warning flashers flash once to
indicate the vehicle is unlocked, and
twice to indicate the vehicle is locked.
Unlocking with 2-button remote
control
Press c to unlock the front doors.
Press again to unlock entire vehicle.
Unlocking with 3-button remote
control
Depending on vehicle configuration:
Press c: Front doors and sliding
side doors are unlocked.
Press c again: Load
compartment is also unlocked.
Press c: Front doors are
unlocked.
Press c again: Sliding side doors
and the load compartment are
also unlocked.
Press c: All doors and the load
compartment are unlocked.
Locking the vehicle
Close all doors and load
compartment.
When locking, if a door is open or
incorrectly closed, the central locking
system will lock and unlock in quick
succession without flashing the
hazard warning flashers.
Locking with 2-button remote control
Press e: All doors and the load
compartment are locked.
Keys, doors and windows 25
Locking with 3-button remote control
Press e: All doors and the load
compartment are locked.
Notice
Where fitted, alarm monitoring of the
passenger compartment 3 35 is
switched off by pressing and holding
e (which is confirmed by an audible
signal).
If this was done unintentionally,
unlock the doors again and press e
briefly to lock the vehicle.
Load compartment
Locking and unlocking load
compartment with 2-button remote
control
After unlocking the front doors with c,
press c again: Load compartment is
unlocked.
Press e once: Load compartment is
locked.
Locking and unlocking load
compartment with 3-button remote
control
Depending on vehicle configuration:
Press G: Load compartment is
locked or unlocked.
Press G: Load compartment
and sliding side doors are locked
or unlocked.
26 Keys, doors and windows
Electronic key system operation
For hands-free operation, the
electronic key must be outside the
vehicle, within a range of approx.
1 m of the front doors or load
compartment.
Notice
There is no button for hands-free
operation in the exterior door handle
of the sliding side door.
There must be no electronic key left
inside the vehicle and no additional
electronic key in the detection zones,
or hands-free operation of the central
locking system will not work.
Operation of central locking system
with the electronic key is confirmed by
the hazard warning flashers. The
hazard warning flashers flash once to
indicate the vehicle is unlocked, and
once for 4 seconds to indicate the
vehicle is locked.
When locking, if a door is open or
incorrectly closed, the central locking
system will lock and unlock in quick
succession without flashing the
hazard warning flashers.
Unlocking with electronic key - hands-
free operation
Press the button on either front door
exterior handle to unlock, and pull the
handle to open.
For the rear doors, press the button
on the exterior handle to unlock, and
pull the handle to open.
The vehicle only unlocks when at
least 3 seconds have passed since
locking using hands-free operation.
Locking with electronic key - hands-
free operation
Press the button on any exterior door
handle. All doors and the load
compartment are locked.
The vehicle only locks when at least
3 seconds have passed since
unlocking using hands-free
operation.
Load compartment locking and
unlocking with electronic key - hands-
free operation
Press the button on the exterior door
handle to lock or unlock the rear doors
(and sliding side doors) when the
electronic key is within range of the
detection zone (approx. 1 m).
Keys, doors and windows 27
The rear doors (and sliding side
doors) only lock / unlock when at least
3 seconds have passed since the
button was last pressed.
Central locking switch
Locks or unlocks the doors and load
compartment from inside the
passenger compartment.
Press e to lock or unlock.
LED in switch illuminates when the
vehicle is locked.
Depending on version, if the vehicle
is driven with an open load
compartment, the front doors (and
sliding side doors) can still be locked.
With the ignition switched on, press
and hold e for more than 5 seconds.
When closing the rear doors, they are
locked automatically.
Automatic locking when exiting the
vehicle
Depending on version, the e switch
can also be used to lock all doors and
the load compartment automatically
when closing the front door and
exiting the vehicle:
Remove key from ignition switch then
press and hold the e switch for more
than 5 seconds. The vehicle is locked
when the front door is closed.
Automatic locking after driving off
3 28.
Fault in remote control system
Unlocking
Manually unlock the front door by
turning the key in the lock.
Switch on the ignition and press the
central locking switch e to open all
doors and the load compartment.
Locking
Manually lock the front door by
turning the key in the lock.
Fault in central locking system
Unlocking
Manually unlock the front door by
turning the key in the lock. The other
doors can be opened by pulling the
interior handles.
Locking
Using a key or suitable screwdriver,
turn switch. The door can only be
opened from inside or the front door
by turning the key in the lock.
28 Keys, doors and windows
Power door locks
Combi, Bus
For safety, it is possible for the driver
to operate the passenger door locks
remotely.
All doors must be fully closed and
automatic locking deactivated 3 28.
To lock, turn the switch to b. The
warning light alongside the switch will
flash once and an audible warning will
sound.
Warning lights in the appropriate
doors extinguish.
To unlock, turn the switch to a.
Warning lights in the appropriate
doors illuminate continuously.
Fault
In the event of a fault in the system,
the warning light alongside the switch
illuminates continuously and an
audible warning will sound.
Unlock manually the sliding door and
the rear doors with interior lock
switches.
If necessary, have the cause of the
fault remedied by a workshop.
Automatic locking
Automatic locking after driving off
Depending on version, this security
feature can be configured to
automatically lock all doors and the
load compartment as soon as the
vehicle is driven.
Activation
With the ignition switched on, press
and hold the central locking switch e
for approx. 5 seconds. An audible
signal confirms activation.
LED in switch illuminates when the
vehicle is locked.
Keys, doors and windows 29
Deactivation
With the ignition switched on, press
and hold e for approx. 5 seconds. An
audible signal confirms deactivation.
Child locks
9Warning
Use the child locks whenever
children are occupying the rear
seats.
Press down the child lock, door
cannot be opened from the inside.
Raise to deactivate.
Doors
Sliding door
Unlock the sliding side door with the
remote control or key (if equipped).
Open the door by pulling the handle
and sliding the door towards the rear.
Open and close the sliding side door
only when the vehicle is at a standstill
with the parking brake applied (on
certain models, a warning chime will
sound when the sliding side door is
open and the parking brake is
released).
The sliding side door can be locked
from inside the vehicle with the
interior lock switch.
Ensure the side door is fully closed
and secure before driving the vehicle.
9Warning
Take care when operating the
sliding side door. Risk of injury.
Ensure that nothing becomes
trapped during operation and no-
one is standing within the moving
area.
If the vehicle is parked on a slope,
open sliding doors may move
accidentally on account of their
weight.
Close the sliding doors before
driving off.
9Danger
Do not drive with the sliding side
door open or ajar, e.g. when
transporting bulky objects, since
toxic exhaust gases, which cannot
30 Keys, doors and windows
be seen or smelled, could enter
the vehicle. This can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
Central locking system 3 23.
Power sliding door
Opening
With vehicle at a standstill and the
parking brake applied, press switch
on instrument panel to open the
power sliding door automatically. The
LED in the switch flashes during
operation.
The engine is restarted automatically
when operating the power sliding
door switch during an Autostop.
Stop-start system 3 225.
Notice
If the parking brake is not applied
when the switch is pressed, a
warning chime will sound and the
power sliding door will not open.
To stop movement at any time, press
the switch again. Press once more to
continue power sliding door
movement.
Notice
If the power sliding door is locked
from the inside with the child lock
active, a warning chime will sound.
Unlock the door manually from the
inside.
Closing
Press switch again; the LED flashes
and a chime sounds during operation.
In the event of opening or closing
difficulties, e.g. due to frost, press and
hold the switch to increase power to
the sliding door.
9Warning
Take care when operating the
power sliding door. Risk of injury,
particularly to children.
Take particular care when the
vehicle is parked on a slope: open
or close the door fully until it
latches into its locking position.
Keep a close watch on the moving
door when operating. Ensure that
nothing becomes trapped during
operation and no-one is standing
within the moving area.
Notice
Do not operate power sliding door
too often without engine running as
this will discharge the vehicle
battery.
Keys, doors and windows 31
Emergency exit
In an emergency, the sliding side door
can be opened manually after
releasing the interior handle.
Alternatively, if the vehicle is
unlocked, open the door using the
exterior handle (depending on model
variant). Lift the handle (3) to the
second notch position, then slide the
door backwards using the handle (2)
near the front edge of the door.
Reset
If the door has been opened
manually, the power sliding door
system must be reset.
Open the sliding side door halfway
and move the relevant handle to the
first notch position. The warning light
illuminates in the instrument panel.
Then press the button (1) on the
relevant handle.
Move the handle back and forth to
ensure the door actuator motor
operates, then press and hold the
switch on the instrument panel to fully
close the door. The warning light
extinguishes when the system is
reset correctly.
Maintenance
The counter is incremented at each
opening and closing to determine the
replacement of the drive belt. Seek
the assistance of a workshop.
32 Keys, doors and windows
If the drive belt should fail, the door
may still be opened and closed
manually.
Fault
If a system fault is detected when
unlocking the doors, an audible
warning will sound and the LED in the
switch illuminates. Check position of
exterior handle. Reset handle if in the
open position and use key to operate
door locks.
Seek the assistance of a workshop if
the fault remains.
Power side step
9Warning
Take care when using the power
side step, particularly in wet and
cold weather conditions.
The power side step operates
automatically when the sliding door is
opened or closed.
9Warning
Ensure there is adequate
clearance to allow the power side
step to fully extend and retract
without obstruction.
The indicator illuminates during
operation of the power side step. If it
remains illuminated with the door
closed, the step has not retracted, or
the door has not fully latched into its
locking position.
In the event of a failure, manually
retract the power side step by
unscrewing the orange handwheel
located at the rear of the step,
ensuring that there are no obstacles
preventing closure. When the step is
retracted, screw in the orange
handwheel. Seek the assistance of a
workshop.
Keys, doors and windows 33
Rear doors
Lock and unlock the rear doors with
the remote control or key (if
equipped).
Central locking system 3 23.
Manual door locks 3 23.
To open the right-hand rear door, pull
the exterior handle.
The right-hand door can also be
opened from inside the vehicle by
pulling the interior handle.
The left-hand rear door is then
released using the lever.
9Warning
The rear lights may be obscured if
the rear doors are open and the
vehicle is parked on the roadside.
Make other road users aware of
the vehicle, by using a warning
triangle or other equipment
specified in the road traffic
regulations.
The doors are retained in the 90º
position by locking stays.
To open the doors to 180º or further
(depending on model) release locking
stays from the catches on the door
frames and lock in place. Swing doors
open to the desired position.
34 Keys, doors and windows
When opening the doors to 270º, the
doors are retained in the fully open
position by magnets on the body side.
9Warning
Ensure extended opening doors
are secured when fully opened.
Opened doors may slam due to
the force of the wind!
When closing the doors, secure each
locking stay to the catch on the door
frame.
The rear doors can be locked from
inside the vehicle with the interior lock
switch on the inside of the right-hand
door.
Always close the left-hand door
before the right-hand door.
Combi, Bus
In left-hand drive vehicles, the rear
doors are opened from inside the
vehicle by pulling the interior handle.
In right-hand drive vehicles, from
inside the vehicle pull the interior
handle on the right-hand door and
open, then release the left-hand door
by lowering the lever and open.
Always close the left-hand door
before the right-hand door.
9Danger
Do not drive with the rear doors
open or ajar, e.g. when
transporting bulky objects, since
toxic exhaust gases, which cannot
be seen or smelled, could enter
the vehicle. This can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
Vehicle security
Anti-theft locking system
9Warning
Do not use the system if there are
people in the vehicle! The doors
cannot be unlocked from the
inside.
The system deadlocks the doors. All
doors must be closed or the system
cannot be activated.
Notice
The anti-theft locking system cannot
be activated when the hazard
warning lights or sidelights are
switched on.
Activation and deactivation are not
possible with the central locking
switch.
Keys, doors and windows 35
2-button and 3-button remote
control operation
Activation
Press e twice within 3 seconds.
Hazard warning lights flash
five times as confirmation.
Deactivation
Unlock the doors by pressing c on the
remote control.
Electronic key system operation
Operation is confirmed by the hazard
warning flashers.
Activation
For hands-free operation, the
electronic key must be outside the
vehicle, within a range of approx.
1 m of the front doors or load
compartment.
Press the button twice on any exterior
door handle.
Deactivation
Unlock the doors by pressing the
button on any exterior door handle.
Hands-free operation is automatically
disabled when the central locking
switch e is pressed. To re-enable
hands-free operation, restart the
engine.
Central locking system 3 23.
Electronic key system 3 21.
Anti-theft alarm system
The anti-theft alarm system is
operated in conjunction with the
central locking system.
It monitors:
doors, bonnet
passenger compartment
load compartment
ignition
interruption of alarm siren power
supply
Activation
All doors and the bonnet must be
closed.
36 Keys, doors and windows
Press e to activate anti-theft alarm
system. Hazard warning lights flash
twice to confirm activation.
If the hazard warning lights do not
flash upon activation, a door or the
bonnet is not fully closed.
Notice
Changes to the vehicle interior, e.g.
the use of seat covers, and open
windows, could impair the function
of passenger compartment
monitoring.
Electronic key
For hands-free operation, the
electronic key must be outside the
vehicle, within a range of approx.
1 m of the front doors or load
compartment.
Press the button on any exterior door
handle.
Electronic key system 3 21.
Deactivation
Unlocking the vehicle or switching on
the ignition deactivates the anti-theft
alarm system. Hazard warning lights
flash once to confirm deactivation.
Notice
If the alarm has been triggered,
unlocking the vehicle with the key
will not stop the alarm siren. To stop
the siren, switch on the ignition. The
hazard warning lights will not flash
upon deactivation if the alarm has
been triggered.
Activation without monitoring of
passenger compartment
Switch off monitoring of the
passenger compartment when
people or animals are being left in the
vehicle, or if the auxiliary heater
3 213 is set for a timed or remote
controlled start.
Keys, doors and windows 37
Depending on vehicle configuration:
press and hold e, or
switch ignition on and off twice
quickly, then close doors and
activate the anti-theft alarm
system
An audible signal will sound as
confirmation.
The status will remain until the doors
are unlocked.
Alarm
When triggered, the alarm sounds via
a separate battery-backed power
sounder, and the hazard warning
lights flash simultaneously. The
number and duration of alarm signals
are stipulated by legislation.
If the vehicle battery is disconnected
or its power supply is interrupted, the
alarm siren will be triggered. First
deactivate the anti-theft alarm system
if the vehicle battery must be
disconnected.
To silence the alarm siren (if
triggered) and therefore deactivate
the anti-theft alarm system, reconnect
vehicle battery and unlock vehicle
with remote control button c (or
switch on the ignition).
Immobiliser
The system is part of the ignition
switch and checks whether the
vehicle is allowed to be started with
the key being used.
The immobiliser is activated
automatically after the key has been
removed from the ignition switch and
also if the key is left in the ignition
switch when the engine is turned off.
If the engine cannot be started, switch
off the ignition and remove key, wait
approx. 2 seconds and then repeat
the start attempt. If start attempt is
unsuccessful, attempt to start the
engine using the spare key and seek
the assistance of a workshop.
Notice
Radio Frequency Identification
(RFID) tags may cause interference
with the key. Do not have it placed
near the key when starting the
vehicle.
Notice
The immobiliser does not lock the
doors. Always lock the vehicle after
leaving it 3 23 and switch on the anti-
theft alarm system 3 35.
38 Keys, doors and windows
Exterior mirrors
Convex shape
The convex exterior mirror contains
an aspherical area and reduces blind
spots. The shape of the mirror makes
objects appear smaller, which will
affect the ability to estimate
distances.
Manual adjustment
Adjust mirrors by swivelling in
required direction.
The lower mirrors are not adjustable.
Electric adjustment
Switch on ignition to operate electric
exterior mirrors.
Select the relevant exterior mirror and
swivel the control to adjust the mirror.
No mirror is selected when the control
is in the centre position.
The lower mirrors are not adjustable.
Folding mirrors
For pedestrian safety, the exterior
mirrors will swing out of their normal
mounting position if they are struck
with sufficient force. Reposition the
mirror by applying slight pressure to
the mirror housing.
Parking position
The exterior mirrors can be folded in
by pressing gently on the outer edge
of the housing, e.g. when in a
confined parking situation.
Keys, doors and windows 39
Heated mirrors
Operated by pressing Ü on either
system. LED illuminates in button
during operation.
Heating works with the engine
running and is switched off
automatically after a short time.
Climate control system 3 205.
Electronic climate control system
3 207.
Interior mirrors
Manual anti-dazzle
To reduce dazzle, adjust the lever on
the underside of the mirror housing.
Wide view mirror
Depending on vehicle, a large convex
mirror is located in the front
passenger sun visor which helps to
increase visibility and reduce blind
spots.
40 Keys, doors and windows
Rear view display
The rear view display shows the
standard rear view provided by a
camera mounted on top of the rear
end.
The mounting position and view angle
of the camera cause a blind spot area
behind the vehicle. While reverse
gear is engaged, the rear view display
is switched off.
Adjustment
Press / to adjust:
brightness by using (
contrast by using + or -
colour by using + or -
reset to restore the factory
settings
Fault
The rear view display may not
operate properly when:
the surrounding is dark
the sun or the beam of headlights
is shining directly into the camera
lens
ice, snow, mud, or anything else
covers the camera lens. Clean
the lens, rinse it with water, and
wipe it with a soft cloth
there are extreme temperature
changes
Rear view camera 3 256.
Windows
Windscreen
Windscreen stickers
Do not attach stickers, e.g. toll road
stickers or similar, on the windscreen
in the area of the interior mirror.
Otherwise the detection zone of the
sensor in the mirror housing could be
restricted.
Windscreen replacement
Caution
If the vehicle has a front-looking
camera sensor for the driver
assistance systems, it is very
important that any windscreen
replacement is performed
accurately according to Vauxhall
specifications. Otherwise, these
systems may not work properly
and there is a risk of unexpected
behaviour and / or messages from
these systems.
Keys, doors and windows 41
Manual windows
The door windows can be opened or
closed with the window cranks.
Power windows
9Warning
Take care when operating the
power windows. Risk of injury,
particularly to children.
Keep a close watch on the
windows when closing them.
Ensure that nothing becomes
trapped in them as they move.
Switch on ignition to operate power
windows.
Operate the switch for the respective
window by pushing to open or pulling
to close.
For vehicles with automatic opening
feature for the driver's door window:
When opening, operate the switch
again to stop window movement.
In the event of closing difficulties due
to frost or the like, operate the switch
several times to close the window in
stages.
Overload
If the windows are repeatedly
operated within short intervals, the
window operation is disabled for
some time.
Rear windows
Sliding side windows
Press catch and slide window to
open. Ensure catch engages when
closing.
42 Keys, doors and windows
Press catch and slide window to
open. Ensure catch engages when
closing.
Opening side windows
Pull handle to open window.
Notice
Depending on vehicle, some
windows may not open fully.
Emergency exit
To provide an emergency exit from
the vehicle, use hammer 1 to strike
glass 2.
Depending on version, emergency
exit may be via the roof glass panel
3 43.
Rear reversing lens
A rear reversing lens may be fitted to
the rear window.
The rear reversing lens assists the
driver when reversing by reducing
blind spots.
Heated rear window
Keys, doors and windows 43
Operated by pressing Ü on either
system. LED illuminates in button
during operation.
Heating works with the engine
running and is switched off
automatically after a short time.
Climate control system 3 205.
Electronic climate control system
3 207.
Sun visors
The sun visors can be folded down or
swivelled to the side to prevent
dazzling.
If the sun visors have integral mirrors,
the mirror covers should be closed
when driving.
Sun visors may also feature a holder
for parking tickets etc.
Wide view mirror 3 39.
Roof
Glass panel
Depending on model variant, the load
compartment may incorporate a
single or a double glass roof panel.
Emergency exit
In an emergency, the glass can be
broken. Use the hammer provided to
strike the glass panel.
Depending on version, emergency
exit may alternatively be via the side
windows 3 41.
44 Seats, restraints
Seats, restraints
Head restraints ............................ 44
Front seats ................................... 45
Seat position .............................. 45
Seat adjustment ........................ 46
Armrest ...................................... 50
Heating ...................................... 51
Rear seats ................................... 51
Seat belts ..................................... 54
Three-point seat belt ................. 55
Airbag system .............................. 58
Front airbag system ................... 61
Side airbag system .................... 62
Airbag deactivation .................... 62
Child restraints ............................. 63
Child restraint systems .............. 63
Child restraint installation
locations ................................... 66
Head restraints
Position
9Warning
Only drive with the head restraint
set to the proper position.
The upper edge of the head restraint
should be at upper head level. If this
is not possible for extremely tall
people, set to highest position, and
set to lowest position for small people.
Adjustment
Pull up to raise or press button and
lower head restraint. Ensure the head
restraint engages.
Seats, restraints 45
Depending on version, head
restraints can also be tilted forwards
or backwards. Push or pull the lower
part of the head restraint to adjust.
Notice
Approved accessories may only be
attached to the front passenger seat
head restraint if the seat is not in use.
Removal
E.g. when using a child restraint
system 3 63.
First tilt the backrest forwards, then
pull up head restraint to uppermost
position. Press both release buttons
and pull the head restraint upwards to
remove.
Stow head restraints securely in load
compartment.
Do not drive with head restraints
removed if the seat is occupied.
Installation
First tilt the backrest forwards, then
insert the rods of the head restraint
into their holes.
Lower head restraint as far as
possible, then raise head restraint
(press both release buttons first, if
necessary) until it engages securely
in desired position.
Front seats
Seat position
9Warning
Only drive with the seat correctly
adjusted.
9Danger
Do not sit closer than 25 cm to the
steering wheel, to permit safe
airbag deployment.
9Warning
Never adjust seats while driving as
they could move uncontrollably.
9Warning
Never store any loose objects
under the seats.
Underseat storage, storage box
3 73.
46 Seats, restraints
Sit with buttocks as far back
against the backrest as possible.
Adjust the distance between the
seat and the pedals so that legs
are slightly angled when pressing
the pedals. Slide the front
passenger seat as far back as
possible.
Set seat height high enough to
have a clear field of vision on all
sides and of all display
instruments. There should be at
least one hand of clearance
between head and the roof
frame. Thighs should rest lightly
on the seat without pressing into
it.
Sit with shoulders as far back
against the backrest as possible.
Set the backrest rake so that it is
possible to reach the steering
wheel with arms slightly bent.
Maintain contact between
shoulders and the backrest when
turning the steering wheel. Do
not angle the backrest too far
back. We recommend a
maximum rake of approx. 25°.
Adjust seat and steering wheel in
a way that the wrist rests on top
of the steering wheel while the
arm is fully extended and
shoulders on the backrest.
Adjust the steering wheel 3 83.
Adjust the head restraint 3 44.
Adjust the height of the seat belt
3 55.
Adjust the lumbar support so that
it supports the natural shape of
the spine 3 46.
Seat adjustment
Drive only with engaged seats and
backrests.
Longitudinal adjustment
Pull handle, slide seat, release
handle.
Try to move the seat back and forth to
ensure that the seat is locked in place.
Seats, restraints 47
Suspension seat longitudinal
adjustment
Pull handle, slide seat, release
handle.
Try to move the seat back and forth to
ensure that the seat is locked in place.
Backrest inclination
Pull lever, adjust inclination and
release lever. Allow the seat to
engage audibly.
Suspension seat backrest inclination
Pull lever, adjust inclination and
release lever. Allow the seat to
engage audibly.
48 Seats, restraints
Seat height
Lever pumping motion
up : seat higher
down : seat lower
Suspension seat height
Pull up front release lever up to adjust
height of front part of seat.
Pull up rear release lever to adjust
height of rear part of seat.
Lumbar support
Adjust lumbar support to suit personal
requirements.
Increasing and decreasing support:
turn the handwheel while relieving the
load on the backrest.
Seats, restraints 49
Suspension seat lumbar support
Adjust lumbar support to suit personal
requirements.
Operate hand pump repeatedly
(located on underside of unit) to
increase firmness.
Press release button (located at front
of unit) to decrease firmness.
Suspension seat sensitivity
Rotate knob to adjust the sensitivity of
the suspension seat.
turn right : more stiff
turn left : less stiff
Swivel seat adjustment
Seat positioning
Move handle 2, slide seat, release
handle.
Try to move the seat back and forth to
ensure that the seat is locked in place.
Seat backrests
Pull lever 1, adjust inclination and
release lever. Allow the seat to
engage audibly.
Seat base angle
Move handle 3 to adjust angle of seat
base.
50 Seats, restraints
Lumbar support
Adjust lumbar support to suit personal
requirements.
Operate hand pump 8 repeatedly
(located on underside of unit) to
increase firmness.
Press release button 7 to decrease
firmness.
Seat base positioning
Lift handle 5, move seat base
backwards or forwards, release
handle.
Armrests
To adjust the height of the armrests,
turn control knob 4 or 9.
Swivelling the seat
The driver's seat can be swivelled up
to 180° from the forward-facing
position, e.g. for easier access to the
load compartment area when the
vehicle is stationary and the engine is
switched off.
Before swivelling the seat, make the
following preparations:
Unfasten seat belt.
Fold up the armrests.
Slide seat as far back as
possible.
Set seat base angle to its lowest
position.
Adjust backrest inclination to
vertical position.
Open the driver's door.
Lift handle 6, swivel seat from the
forward-facing position, release
handle.
Always return the seat to the forward-
facing position before driving and
ensure the seat is locked in place
before starting off.
Armrest
Armrests can be folded up when not
required.
Seats, restraints 51
Heating
Press ß for the respective seat; LED
in switch illuminates. Press other end
of rocker switch to turn seat heating
off.
Vehicles with suspension seat: switch
ß is located below the backrest
release lever on the outboard side of
the seat.
Seat heating is thermostatically
controlled and switches off
automatically when seat temperature
is sufficient. LED also illuminates
when the system is on, not just when
heating is active.
Prolonged use for people with
sensitive skin is not recommended.
Seat heating is operational when the
engine is running.
Rear seats
Rear seat access
To facilitate access to the 3rd row
seats (where fitted), open sliding side
door and pull release lever on folding
access seat in the 2nd row and fold
the seat backrest forwards. If
necessary, unfasten seat belts from
their buckles.
52 Seats, restraints
9Warning
Ensure that the backrest returns to
its correct position and the seat
belt buckles are fastened
securely.
Fastening and unfastening seat belt
3 55.
Sliding door 3 29.
Removable rear seats
9Warning
When rear seats are being
removed, keep hands and feet
away from the moving area.
Never remove seats while driving
as they could move uncontrollably.
Ensure that the rear seats and
backrests are fully engaged before
occupying the rear seats.
Removal
On some variants, the load
compartment area can be increased
by removing the rear seats.
9Warning
Removable rear seats are heavy!
Do not attempt to remove without
assistance.
Pull up lever 1 on both sides of
the seat. The pins 2 visibly
protrude to indicate that the seat
is unlocked.
Move the seat towards the rear to
release from the floor anchor
points.
Lift seat to remove.
Installation
When re-installing seats, always
ensure that the row with the folding
access seat B is positioned correctly
in front of the fixed seat row A.
Caution
The 2nd and 3rd row seats are not
interchangeable and must be fitted
back into their original position.
Seats, restraints 53
Notice
Make sure that the anchor points are
clean before installing the seat. They
should be free from grit or any other
item which may prevent the seat
from locking securely.
Position the seat guides immediately
behind the front floor anchor points,
and slide forwards to engage.
The seat locks automatically and the
pins 3 will no longer be visible, to
indicate that the seat is locked.
Caution
When installing the rear seats,
ensure they are properly located
on the floor anchor points and that
the locking catches are fully
engaged.
Consult a workshop if the seats
cannot be locked securely in position.
Bus
Removal
9Warning
Removable rear seats are heavy!
Do not attempt to remove without
assistance.
Using the tool from the tool kit located
in the glovebox, turn levers to unlock
the seat:
1. Release the outboard fixing.
2. Release the inboard fixing
(located at the base of the seat).
54 Seats, restraints
3. Lift the seat from the rear.
4. Pull the seat towards the centre of
the vehicle to release the seat
completely from its anchor points.
Installation
Notice
Make sure that the anchor points are
clean before installing the seat. They
should be free from grit or any other
item which may prevent the seat
from locking securely.
1. Position the seat over the anchor
points.
2. Lower the seat until it audibly
engages in the anchor points.
3. Ensure the seat is locked securely
in position by trying to move the
seat back and forth and from left
to right.
Repeat installation procedure if
necessary.
Consult a workshop if the seat cannot
be locked securely in position.
Seat belts
The seat belts are locked during
heavy acceleration or deceleration of
the vehicle, holding the occupants in
the sitting position. Therefore, the risk
of injury is considerably reduced.
9Warning
Fasten seat belt before each trip.
In the event of an accident, people
not wearing seat belts endanger
their fellow occupants and
themselves.
Seat belts are designed to be used by
only one person at a time.
Child restraint system 3 63.
Periodically check all parts of the belt
system for damage and proper
functionality.
Have damaged components
replaced. After an accident, have the
belts and triggered belt pretensioners
replaced by a workshop.
Notice
Make sure that the belts are not
damaged by shoes or sharp-edged
objects or are trapped. Prevent dirt
from getting into the belt retractors.
Seat belt reminder
Depending on version, both front
seats may be equipped with a seat
belt reminder, indicated by control
indicator X 3 93, 3 96.
Belt force limiters
On the front seats, stress on the body
is reduced by the gradual release of
the belt during a collision.
Seats, restraints 55
Belt pretensioners
In the event of a head-on or rear-end
collision of a certain severity, the front
seat belts are tightened.
9Warning
Incorrect handling (e.g. removal or
fitting of belts) can trigger the belt
pretensioners.
Deployment of the belt pretensioners
is indicated by continuous illumination
of control indicator v 3 96.
Triggered belt pretensioners must be
replaced by a workshop. Belt
pretensioners can only be triggered
once.
Notice
Do not affix or install accessories or
other objects that may interfere with
the operation of the belt
pretensioners. Do not make any
modifications to belt pretensioner
components as this will invalidate
the vehicle operating permit.
Three-point seat belt
Loose or bulky clothing prevents the
belt from fitting snugly. Do not place
objects such as handbags or mobile
phones between the belt and your
body.
9Warning
The belt must not rest against hard
or fragile objects in the pockets of
your clothing.
Seat belts on the front seats
Fasten
Withdraw the belt from the retractor,
guide it untwisted across the body
and insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
Make sure the belt fits tightly to the
body while driving.
Seat belt reminder X 3 96.
56 Seats, restraints
Height adjustment
1. Pull belt out slightly.
2. Shift the height adjustment
upwards or press button to
disengage and push the height
adjustment downwards.
Adjust the height so that the belt lies
across the shoulder. It must not lie
across the throat or upper arm.
9Warning
Do not adjust while driving.
Unfasten
To unfasten belt, press red button on
belt buckle. The seat belt retracts
automatically.
Seats, restraints 57
Seat belts on the rear seats
Withdraw belt 1 from the retractor,
guide it untwisted across the body
and ensure that latch plate 2 is fully
engaged in its buckle 3 by pulling on
the latch plate 2.
The lap belt 5 must be worn closely
over the thighs and against the pelvis.
To tighten, pull on free section 6 of the
belt. To loosen, turn adjusting buckle
4 until it is at 90° to the belt and press
the adjusting buckle 4 while pulling
lap belt 5.
To unfasten, press red button on belt
buckle 3 to release the latch plate 2.
Guide the seat belt 1 as it retracts
automatically.
9Warning
Ensure that the rear seats and
backrests are fully engaged before
occupying the rear seats.
Rear seats 3 51.
Caution
To avoid damage to the vehicle,
always fasten the rear seat belts
even if the seats are not occupied.
Using the seat belt while pregnant
9Warning
The lap belt must be positioned as
low as possible across the pelvis
to prevent pressure on the
abdomen.
58 Seats, restraints
Airbag system
The airbag system consists of a
number of individual systems
depending on the scope of
equipment.
When triggered the airbags inflate
within milliseconds. They also deflate
so quickly that it is often unnoticeable
during the collision.
9Warning
As the airbag system deploys in an
explosive manner, repairs must be
performed by skilled personnel
only.
9Warning
Adding accessories that change
the vehicle's frame, bumper
system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, may keep the airbag
system from working properly. The
operation of the airbag system can
also be affected by changing any
parts of the front seats, seat belts,
airbag sensing and diagnostic
module, steering wheel,
instrument panel, inner door seals
including the speakers, any of the
airbag modules, ceiling or pillar
trim, front sensors, side impact
sensors or airbag wiring.
Notice
The airbag systems and belt
pretensioner control electronics are
located in the centre console area.
Do not put any magnetic objects in
this area.
Do not affix any objects onto the
airbag covers and do not cover them
with other materials. Have damaged
covers replaced by a workshop.
Each airbag is triggered only once.
Have deployed airbags replaced by
a workshop. Furthermore, it may be
necessary to have the steering
wheel, the instrument panel, parts of
the panelling, the door seals,
handles and the seats replaced.
Do not make any modifications to
the airbag system as this will
invalidate the vehicle operating
permit.
Control indicator v for airbag systems
3 96.
Child restraint systems on front
passenger seat with airbag
systems
Warning according to ECE R94.02:
EN: NEVER use a rear-facing child
restraint system on a seat protected
by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it,
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur.
DE: Nach hinten gerichtete
Kindersitze NIEMALS auf einem Sitz
verwenden, der durch einen davor
befindlichen AKTIVEN AIRBAG
Seats, restraints 59
geschützt ist, da dies den TOD oder
SCHWERE VERLETZUNGEN DES
KINDES zur Folge haben kann.
FR: NE JAMAIS utiliser un siège
d'enfant orienté vers l'arrière sur un
siège protégé par un COUSSIN
GONFLABLE ACTIF placé devant lui,
sous peine d'infliger des
BLESSURES GRAVES, voire
MORTELLES à l'ENFANT.
ES: NUNCA utilice un sistema de
retención infantil orientado hacia
atrás en un asiento protegido por un
AIRBAG FRONTAL ACTIVO. Peligro
de MUERTE o LESIONES GRAVES
para el NIÑO.
RU: ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ
устанавливать детское
удерживающее устройство лицом
назад на сиденье автомобиля,
оборудованном фронтальной
подушкой безопасности, если
ПОДУШКА НЕ ОТКЛЮЧЕНА! Это
может привести к СМЕРТИ или
СЕРЬЕЗНЫМ ТРАВМАМ
РЕБЕНКА.
NL: Gebruik NOOIT een achterwaarts
gericht kinderzitje op een stoel met
een ACTIEVE AIRBAG ervoor, om
DODELIJK of ERNSTIG LETSEL van
het KIND te voorkomen.
DA: Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt
autostol på et forsæde med AKTIV
AIRBAG, BARNET kan komme I
LIVSFARE eller komme ALVORLIGT
TIL SKADE.
SV: Använd ALDRIG en bakåtvänd
barnstol ett säte som skyddas med
en framförvarande AKTIV AIRBAG.
DÖDSFALL eller ALLVARLIGA
SKADOR kan drabba BARNET.
FI: ÄLÄ KOSKAAN sijoita taaksepäin
suunnattua lasten turvaistuinta
istuimelle, jonka edessä on
AKTIIVINEN TURVATYYNY, LAPSI
VOI KUOLLA tai VAMMAUTUA
VAKAVASTI.
NO: Bakovervendt
barnesikringsutstyr ALDRI brukes
på et sete med AKTIV
KOLLISJONSPUTE foran, da det kan
føre til at BARNET utsettes for
LIVSFARE og fare for ALVORLIGE
SKADER.
PT: NUNCA use um sistema de
retenção para crianças voltado para
trás num banco protegido com um
AIRBAG ACTIVO na frente do
mesmo, poderá ocorrer a PERDA DE
VIDA ou FERIMENTOS GRAVES na
CRIANÇA.
IT: Non usare mai un sistema di
sicurezza per bambini rivolto
all'indietro su un sedile protetto da
AIRBAG ATTIVO di fronte ad esso:
pericolo di MORTE o LESIONI
GRAVI per il BAMBINO!
EL: ΠΟΤΕ μη χρησιμοποιείτε παιδικό
κάθισμα ασφαλείας με φορά προς τα
πίσω σε κάθισμα που προστατεύεται
από μετωπικό ΕΝΕΡΓΟ ΑΕΡΟΣΑΚΟ,
διότι το παιδί μπορεί να υποστεί
ΘΑΝΑΣΙΜΟ ή ΣΟΒΑΡΟ
ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ.
PL: NIE WOLNO montować fotelika
dziecięcego zwróconego tyłem do
kierunku jazdy na fotelu, przed
którym znajduje się WŁĄCZONA
PODUSZKA POWIETRZNA.
Niezastosowanie się do tego
zalecenia może być przyczyną
ŚMIERCI lub POWAŻNYCH
OBRAŻEŃ u DZIECKA.
60 Seats, restraints
TR: Arkaya bakan bir çocuk emniyet
sistemini KESİNLİKLE önünde bir
AKTİF HAVA YASTIĞI ile
korunmakta olan bir koltukta
kullanmayınız. ÇOCUK ÖLEBİLİR
veya AĞIR ŞEKİLDE
YARALANABİLİR.
UK: НІКОЛИ не використовуйте
систему безпеки для дітей, що
встановлюється обличчям назад,
на сидінні з УВІМКНЕНОЮ
ПОДУШКОЮ БЕЗПЕКИ, інакше це
може призвести до СМЕРТІ чи
СЕРЙОЗНОГО ТРАВМУВАННЯ
ДИТИНИ.
HU: SOHA ne használjon hátrafelé
néző biztonsági gyerekülést előlről
AKTÍV LÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen,
mert a GYERMEK HALÁLÁT vagy
KOMOLY SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.
HR: NIKADA nemojte koristiti sustav
zadržavanja za djecu okrenut prema
natrag na sjedalu s AKTIVNIM
ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega,
to bi moglo dovesti do SMRTI ili
OZBILJNJIH OZLJEDA za DIJETE.
SL: NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega
varnostnega sedeža, obrnjenega v
nasprotni smeri vožnje, na sedež z
AKTIVNO ČELNO ZRAČNO
BLAZINO, saj pri tem obstaja
nevarnost RESNIH ali SMRTNIH
POŠKODB za OTROKA.
SR: NIKADA ne koristiti bezbednosni
sistem za decu u kome su deca
okrenuta unazad na sedištu sa
AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM
JASTUKOM ispred sedišta zato što
DETE može da NASTRADA ili da se
TEŠKO POVREDI.
MK: НИКОГАШ не користете детско
седиште свртено наназад на
седиште заштитено со АКТИВНО
ВОЗДУШНО ПЕРНИЧЕ пред него,
затоа што детето може ДА ЗАГИНЕ
или да биде ТЕШКО ПОВРЕДЕНО.
BG: НИКОГА не използвайте
детска седалка, гледаща назад,
върху седалка, която е защитена
чрез АКТИВНА ВЪЗДУШНА
ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА пред нея - може да
се стигне до СМЪРТ или
СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на
ДЕТЕТО.
RO: Nu utilizaţi NICIODATĂ un scaun
pentru copil îndreptat spre partea din
spate a maşinii pe un scaun protejat
de un AIRBAG ACTIV în faţa sa;
acest lucru poate duce la DECESUL
sau VĂTĂMAREA GRAVĂ a
COPILULUI.
CS: NIKDY nepoužívejte dětský
zádržný systém instalovaný proti
směru jízdy na sedadle, které je
chráněno před sedadlem AKTIVNÍM
AIRBAGEM. Mohlo by dojít k
VÁŽNÉMU PORANĚNÍ nebo ÚMRTÍ
DÍTĚTE.
SK: NIKDY nepoužívajte detskú
sedačku otočenú vzad na sedadle
chránenom AKTÍVNYM AIRBAGOM,
pretože môže dôjsť k SMRTI alebo
VÁŽNYM ZRANENIAM DIEŤAŤA.
LT: JOKIU BŪDU nemontuokite atgal
atgręžtos vaiko tvirtinimo sistemos
sėdynėje, prieš kurią įrengta AKTYVI
ORO PAGALVĖ, nes VAIKAS GALI
ŽŪTI arba RIMTAI SUSIŽALOTI.
LV: NEKĀDĀ GADĪJUMĀ
neizmantojiet uz aizmuguri vērstu
bērnu sēdeklīti sēdvietā, kas tiek
aizsargāta ar tās priekšā uzstādītu
AKTĪVU DROŠĪBAS SPILVENU, jo
pretējā gadījumā BĒRNS var gūt
SMAGAS TRAUMAS vai IET BOJĀ.
Seats, restraints 61
ET: ÄRGE kasutage tahapoole
suunatud lapseturvaistet istmel, mille
ees on AKTIIVSE TURVAPADJAGA
kaitstud iste, sest see võib
põhjustada LAPSE SURMA või
TÕSISE VIGASTUSE.
MT: QATT tuża trażżin għat-tfal li
jħares lejn in-naħa ta’ wara fuq sit
protett b’AIRBAG ATTIV quddiemu;
dan jista’ jikkawża l-MEWT jew
ĠRIEĦI SERJI lit-TFAL.
GA: Ná húsáid srian sábháilteachta
linbh cúil RIAMH ar shuíochán a
bhfuil mála aeir ag feidhmiú os a
chomhair. Tá baol BÁIS nó GORTÚ
DONA don PHÁISTE ag baint leis.
Beyond the warning required by
ECE R94.02, for safety reasons a
forward-facing child restraint system
must only be used subject to the
instructions and restrictions in the
table 3 66.
The airbag label may be located on
both sides of the front passenger sun
visor.
9Danger
Do not use a child restraint system
on the passenger seat with active
front airbag.
Airbag deactivation 3 62.
Front airbag system
The front airbag system consists of
one airbag in the steering wheel and
one in the instrument panel on the
front passenger side. These can be
identified by the word AIRBAG.
Additionally there is a warning label
on the side of the instrument panel,
visible when the front passenger door
is open.
The front airbag system is triggered in
the event of an accident of a certain
severity. The ignition must be
switched on.
The inflated airbags cushion the
impact, thereby reducing the risk of
injury to the upper body and head of
the front seat occupants
considerably.
9Warning
Optimum protection is only
provided when the seat is in the
proper position.
Seat position 3 45.
Keep the area in which the airbag
inflates clear of obstructions.
Fasten the seat belt correctly and
engage securely. Only then is the
airbag able to protect.
62 Seats, restraints
Side airbag system
The side airbag system consists of
airbags in the outer front seat
backrests. This can be identified by
the word AIRBAG.
The side airbag system is triggered in
the event of an accident of a certain
severity. The ignition must be
switched on.
The inflated airbags cushion the
impact, thereby reducing the risk of
injury to the upper body and pelvis in
the event of a side-on collision
considerably.
9Warning
Keep the area in which the airbag
inflates clear of obstructions.
Notice
Only use protective seat covers that
have been approved for the vehicle.
Be careful not to cover the airbags.
Airbag deactivation
Front airbag and side airbag systems
for the front passenger seat must be
deactivated if a child restraint system
is to be fitted on this seat, in
accordance with the instructions in
the child restraint installation location
tables 3 66.
The belt pretensioners and all driver
airbag systems will remain active.
The front passenger airbag system
can be deactivated via a switch on the
side of the instrument panel.
With the ignition off, open the front
door, push switch in and rotate
anticlockwise to the OFF position.
Seats, restraints 63
Front passenger seat airbags are
deactivated and will not inflate in the
event of a collision. Control indicator
W illuminates continuously and a
corresponding message appears in
the Driver Information Centre 3 103.
A child restraint system can be
installed in accordance with the
installation locations chart 3 66. An
adult must not occupy the front
passenger seat.
9Danger
Deactivate passenger airbag only
in combination with the use of a
child restraint system, subject to
the instructions and restrictions in
the table 3 66.
Otherwise, there is a risk of fatal
injury for a person occupying a
seat with a deactivated front
passenger airbag.
As long as control indicator Ó is
illuminated, the airbag systems for
the front passenger seat will inflate in
the event of a collision.
If control indicator j remains
illuminated together with v, this
indicates a fault within the system.
The switch position may have been
changed inadvertently with the
ignition on. Turn ignition off and on
again and reset the switch position. If
j and v still remain illuminated,
seek the assistance of a workshop.
Change status only when the vehicle
is stopped with the ignition off. Status
remains until the next change.
Control indicator W for airbag
deactivation 3 97.
Child restraints
Child restraint systems
9Warning
When using a child restraint
system on the front passenger
seat, the airbag systems for the
front passenger seat must be
deactivated; if not, the triggering of
the airbags poses a risk of fatal
injury to the child.
This is especially the case if rear-
facing child restraint systems are
used on the front passenger seat.
Airbag deactivation 3 62.
Airbag label 3 58.
We recommend a child restraint
system which is tailored specifically to
the vehicle. For further information,
contact your workshop.
When a child restraint system is being
used, pay attention to the following
usage and installation instructions
and also those supplied with the child
restraint system.
64 Seats, restraints
Always comply with local or national
regulations. In some countries, the
use of child restraint systems is
forbidden on certain seats.
Child restraint systems can be
fastened with:
Three-point seat belt
ISOFIX brackets
Top-Tether
Three-point seat belt
Child restraint systems can be
fastened by using a three-point seat
belt 3 55.
Depending on the size of the used
child restraint systems and the model
variant, child restraint systems can be
attached to certain 2nd row and 3rd
row rear seats. After fastening the
child restraint system the seat belt
has to be tightened 3 66.
ISOFIX child restraint systems
Fasten vehicle-approved ISOFIX
child restraint systems to the ISOFIX
mounting brackets.
When using ISOFIX mounting
brackets for seat mounting,
universally approved child restraint
systems for ISOFIX may be used.
A Top-Tether strap must be used in
addition to the ISOFIX mounting
brackets.
Permissible mounting location
positions for ISOFIX child restraint
systems are marked in the tables by
<, IL and IUF.
Top-Tether anchors
Top-Tether anchors are located on
the back of the seat.
In addition to the ISOFIX mounting,
fasten the Top-Tether strap to the
Top-Tether anchors.
ISOFIX child restraint systems of
universal category positions are
marked in the table by IUF 3 66.
Selecting the right system
The rear seats are the most
convenient location to fasten a child
restraint system.
Seats, restraints 65
Children should travel facing
rearwards in the vehicle as long as
possible. This makes sure that the
child's backbone, which is still very
weak, is under less strain in the event
of an accident.
Suitable are restraint systems that
comply with valid UN ECE
regulations. Check local laws and
regulations for mandatory use of child
restraint systems.
Ensure that the child restraint system
to be installed is compatible with the
vehicle type.
Ensure that the mounting location of
the child restraint system within the
vehicle is correct, see following
tables.
Allow children to enter and exit the
vehicle only on the side facing away
from the traffic.
When the child restraint system is not
in use, secure the seat with a seat belt
or remove it from the vehicle.
Notice
Do not affix anything on the child
restraint systems and do not cover
them with any other materials.
A child restraint system which has
been subjected to stress in an
accident must be replaced.
Child locks 3 29.
66 Seats, restraints
Child restraint installation locations
Permissible options for fitting a child restraint system
Front seats - All variants
Weight and age class Single seat - front passenger side1) Bench seat - front passenger side
without airbag with airbag without airbag with airbag
centre outer centre outer
Group 0: up to 10 kg
Group 0+: up to 13 kg UU2) X X X X
Group I: 9 to 18 kg UU2) X X X X
Group II: 15 to 25 kg
Group III: 22 to 36 kg UU2) X X X X
1) If adjustable, ensure seat is in its rearmost position. Make sure vehicle seat belt is as straight as possible between shoulder and
upper anchorage point.
2) Ensure the front passenger airbag system is deactivated when installing a child restraint in this position.
Seats, restraints 67
Crew van - rear seats
Weight and age class 2nd row seats
Outer Centre
Group 0: up to 10 kg
Group 0+: up to 13 kg U X
Group I: 9 to 18 kg U X
Group II: 15 to 25 kg
Group III: 22 to 36 kg U X
Bus, Combi - rear seats
Weight and age class Rear seats
Group 0: up to 10 kg
Group 0+: up to 13 kg X
Group I: 9 to 18 kg X
Group II: 15 to 25 kg
Group III: 22 to 36 kg X
68 Seats, restraints
Crew cab - rear seats
Weight and age class 2nd row seats
Outer Centre
Group 0: up to 10 kg
Group 0+: up to 13 kg U X
Group I: 9 to 18 kg U X
Group II: 15 to 25 kg
Group III: 22 to 36 kg U X
U : suitable for universal category restraint systems for use in this weight and age class, in conjunction with three-point
seat belt.
UF : suitable for universal category forward-facing restraint systems for use in this weight and age class, in conjunction
with three-point seat belt.
<: suitable for ISOFIX child restraint system with mounting brackets and anchorage points, where fitted. When mounting
an ISOFIX child restraint system, only systems that have been approved for the vehicle may be used. Refer to
"Permissible options for fitting an ISOFIX child restraint system".
X : seat position not suitable for children in this weight and age class.
Seats, restraints 69
Permissible options for fitting an ISOFIX child restraint system
Combi
Weight class Size class Fixture Front seats 2nd row seats 3rd row seats
Driver side
outer seat Centre seat
Passenger side
outer seat
Group 0: up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X IL X X X
Group 0+: up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 X IL X X X
D ISO/R2 X IL X X X
C ISO/R3 X IL X X X
Group I: 9 to 18 kg D ISO/R2 X IL X X X
C ISO/R3 X IL X X X
B ISO/F2 X IL, IUF IL, IUF X X
B1 ISO/F2X X IL, IUF IL, IUF X X
A ISO/F3 X IL, IUF IL, IUF X X
IL : suitable for particular ISOFIX restraint systems of the "specific-vehicle", "restricted" or "semi-universal" categories.
The ISOFIX restraint system must be approved for the specific vehicle type.
IUF : suitable for ISOFIX forward-facing child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this weight class.
X : no ISOFIX child restraint system approved in this weight class.
70 Seats, restraints
ISOFIX size class and seat device
A - ISO/F3 : forward-facing child restraint system for children of maximum size in the weight class 9 to 18 kg.
B - ISO/F2 : forward-facing child restraint system for smaller children in the weight class 9 to 18 kg.
B1 - ISO/F2X : forward-facing child restraint system for smaller children in the weight class 9 to 18 kg.
C - ISO/R3 : rear-facing child restraint system for children of maximum size in the weight class up to 18 kg.
D - ISO/R2 : rear-facing child restraint system for smaller children in the weight class up to 18 kg.
E - ISO/R1 : rear-facing child restraint system for young children in the weight class up to 13 kg.
Storage 71
Storage
Storage compartments ................ 71
Instrument panel storage ........... 71
Glovebox ................................... 72
Cupholders ................................ 72
Front storage ............................. 72
Overhead console ..................... 73
Underseat storage ..................... 73
Overcab storage ........................ 74
Load compartment ....................... 74
Lashing eyes ............................. 75
Cargo management system ...... 76
Safety net .................................. 78
Load compartment grille ............ 78
Warning triangle ........................ 79
First aid kit ................................. 79
Fire extinguisher ........................ 79
Roof rack system ......................... 80
Roof rack ................................... 80
Loading information ..................... 80
Storage compartments
9Warning
Do not store heavy or sharp
objects in the storage
compartments. Otherwise vehicle
occupants could be injured by
objects being thrown around in the
event of hard braking, a sudden
change in direction or an accident.
Instrument panel storage
Storage compartments, pockets and
trays are located in the instrument
panel.
Storage compartments can be
located on top of the instrument
panel.
Document holder
Withdraw the document holder from
the instrument panel by pulling the
base to the rear and then swivelling it
downwards.
To fold away, raise the base until the
document holder is horizontal, then
push fully in.
72 Storage
Tray
Press at the front to open.
Do not place any hard or heavy
objects on the tray.
Glovebox
Depending on the version, pull the
handle or press the button to open the
glovebox.
The glovebox should be closed whilst
driving.
On some versions the glovebox is
ventilated.
Glovebox cooler 3 219.
Cupholders
Cupholders are located at either end
of the instrument panel and centrally
in the lower instrument panel.
Press at the front to open.
Additionally, cupholders may be
located in the rear side of the front
centre passenger seat.
Folding passenger seatback 3 72.
Depending on model, cupholders
may also be located in the lower front
part of the rear seats.
The cupholders can also be used to
hold the portable ashtray unit 3 89.
Front storage
Depending on model, coat hooks or
storage nets may be located on the
cabin bulkhead.
Storage 73
The front door pockets contain bottle
holders.
Folding front centre passenger
seatback
Pull backrest release lever on the
front centre passenger seat towards
front of vehicle before folding down
the backrest to the horizontal
position.
The rear side of the backrest features
storage compartments, cupholders
and a swivelling shelf, which can be
used for writing or documents.
Return the swivelling shelf to its
original position before pulling
backrest release lever and raising the
backrest.
Overhead console
The total weight in these
compartments must not exceed 5 kg.
Underseat storage
Using the two loops on the passenger
seat cushion, pull the cushion
forwards to gain access to the storage
under the seat.
74 Storage
Rear bench seat
Raise seat base at front and remove
to gain access to storage
compartment under the bench seat.
Depending on model, bench seats
may also contain storage
compartments at the lower front part
of the seat and a storage net on the
outboard side of the seat.
Overcab storage
The total weight in this compartment
must not exceed 35 kg.
Rear storage
Combi, Bus
Objects can be stored in the overhead
storage compartments above the rear
passenger seats.
The total weight must not exceed
20 kg evenly distributed.
Load compartment
9Warning
Always make sure that the load in
the vehicle is securely stowed.
Otherwise objects can be thrown
around inside the vehicle and
cause personal injury or damage
to the load or vehicle.
Use the grab handles, located beside
the rear and sliding side door(s), to
assist during entry and exit of the load
compartment.
Storage 75
Lashing eyes
Lashing eyes are mounted in the load
compartment to enable cargo to be
secured in position using lashing
straps or a luggage floor net.
Lashing eyes may be located on the
vehicle floor and / or in the sidewall.
The number and location of the
lashing eyes may vary depending on
the vehicle.
The maximum force applied to the
lashing eyes should not exceed
625 daN/6.25 kN/6250 N.
Depending on country, the maximum
force (e.g. 500 daN/5 kN/5000 N) may
be shown on a label.
Notice
Specifications on the label always
have priority over those given in this
manual.
Loading information 3 80.
Removable lashing eyes
76 Storage
The removable lashing eyes can be
secured to the side, floor or roof load
rails. Refer to "Cargo management
system" below for further information.
To reposition, press down on the
centre cap and slide to the desired
position. Ensure the lashing eyes
engage correctly in the recesses.
Loading information 3 80.
Cargo management system
Depending on vehicle, objects in the
load compartment can be secured
into position or prevented from sliding
excessively by attaching the
appropriate cargo management
feature to the side, floor or roof load
rails using removable lashing eyes (if
required).
Lower and also upper side load rails
may be present, depending on
version.
Moveable partition wall
The moveable partition wall can be
used between the floor and roof load
rails.
To move, pull down on the latch to
release and position the wall as
required. Ensure the latch engages
fully and the partition wall is upright.
Store the partition wall to one side of
the load compartment when not in
use.
Telescopic blocking bars
The telescopic blocking bars can be
used in a vertical position, secured to
the floor and roof load rails.
Storage 77
Or the telescopic blocking bars can
be used in a horizontal position,
secured to the side load rails.
Ensure the blocking bars are fully
engaged in the load rails before
loading the vehicle.
To release, press down on the lock
and slide the bar at the same time.
The maximum loading for the side
load rails is 100 daN/700 mm.
Blocking capacity: 300 kg.
Blocking bar with safety net
The blocking bar can be secured to
the upper side load rails; rotate
handle to fix blocking bar into
position. Ensure blocking bar
engages fully.
The integrated safety net can then be
attached to the removable lashing
eyes in the side and floor load rails
(see illustration).
Ratchet straps
Using the appropriate ratchet straps,
objects can be secured in position
using the removable lashing eyes in
the side or floor load rails.
The maximum loading for the floor
load rails is 500 daN/700 mm.
Lashing capacity: 800 daN in
strapping.
Steel fastener capacity: 170 daN in
direct tension.
78 Storage
The maximum loading for the side
load rails is 100 daN/700 mm.
Lashing capacity: 300 daN in
strapping.
Removable lashing eyes 3 75.
Loading information 3 80.
Safety net
Lower the safety net from the roof
area and attach to the lashing eyes in
the vehicle floor 3 75.
Adjust the tension on the straps to
ensure the load is secure.
When not in use the safety net should
be stored in the roof area.
Loading information 3 80.
Load compartment grille
Vehicles with a window in the cabin
bulkhead may include a metal grille
on the load compartment side.
The grille provides protection from
load compartment objects being
thrown around in the event of hard
braking, a sudden change in direction
or an accident.
Storage 79
Depending on version, the windows
in the rear door and sliding side
door(s) also contain window guards,
for additional protection and security.
Loading information 3 80.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle can be
accommodated in the space under
the front seats.
Underseat storage 3 73.
First aid kit
As a visible indication of the presence
of a first aid kit, a label may be located
on the overhead console 3 73.
The first aid kit can be accommodated
in the space under the front seats.
Using the two loops on the seat
cushion, pull the cushion forwards to
gain access.
Underseat storage 3 73.
Depending on version, the first aid kit
may alternatively be located in the
space between the front seats or in
the overhead console.
Fire extinguisher
As a visible indication of the presence
of a fire extinguisher, a label may be
located on the overhead console
3 73.
The fire extinguisher can be
accommodated in the space under
the front seats. Using the two loops on
the seat cushion, pull the cushion
forwards to gain access.
Underseat storage 3 73.
Depending on version, the fire
extinguisher may alternatively be
located in the space between the front
seats.
An additional fire extinguisher may be
located in the front door panel or in the
load compartment.
80 Storage
Roof rack system
Roof rack
For safety reasons and to avoid
damage to the roof, the vehicle
approved roof rack system is
recommended.
Follow the installation instructions
and remove the roof rack when not in
use.
Loading information
Heavy objects in the load
compartment should be evenly
distributed and placed as far
forward as possible. If objects
can be stacked, the heavier
objects should be placed at the
bottom.
Secure objects with lashing
straps attached to lashing eyes
3 75.
Secure objects into position or
prevent loads from sliding
excessively by attaching optional
cargo management features to
the load rails using removable
lashing eyes.
Cargo management system
3 76.
Secure loose objects in load
compartment to prevent them
from sliding.
The load must not obstruct the
operation of the pedals, parking
brake and gear selector lever, or
hinder the freedom of movement
of the driver. Do not place any
unsecured objects in the interior.
Do not drive with an open load
compartment. In addition, the
number plate is only
distinguishable and illuminated
correctly if the doors are closed.
9Warning
Always make sure that the load in
the vehicle is securely stowed.
Otherwise objects can be thrown
around inside the vehicle and
cause personal injury or damage
to the load or vehicle.
The payload is the difference
between the permitted gross
vehicle weight (see identification
plate 3 313) and the EC kerb
weight.
To calculate the payload, enter
the data for your vehicle in the
weights table at the front of this
manual.
The EC kerb weight includes
weights for the driver (68 kg),
Storage 81
luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel
tank 90% full).
Optional equipment and
accessories increase the kerb
weight.
Driving with a roof load increases
the sensitivity of the vehicle to
cross-winds and has a
detrimental effect on vehicle
handling due to the vehicle's
higher centre of gravity.
Distribute the load evenly and
secure it properly with retaining
straps. Adjust the tyre pressure
and vehicle speed according to
the load conditions. Check and
retighten the straps frequently.
Do not drive faster than 75 mph.
The permissible roof load (which
includes the weight of the roof
rack) is 200 kg for standard roof
variants. The roof load is the
combined weight of the roof rack
and the load.
82 Instruments and controls
Instruments and
controls
Controls ....................................... 83
Steering wheel adjustment ........ 83
Steering wheel controls ............. 83
Horn ........................................... 83
Steering column controls ........... 83
Windscreen wiper and washer ..84
Outside temperature .................. 85
Clock ......................................... 86
Power outlets ............................. 86
Inductive charging ..................... 88
Cigarette lighter ......................... 89
Ashtrays .................................... 89
Warning lights, gauges and indi‐
cators ........................................... 89
Instrument cluster ...................... 89
Speedometer ............................. 89
Odometer .................................. 90
Trip odometer ............................ 90
Tachometer ............................... 90
Fuel gauge ................................ 91
AdBlue gauge ............................ 91
Engine coolant temperature
gauge ....................................... 91
Service display .......................... 92
Transmission display ................. 92
Control indicators ...................... 93
Turn lights .................................. 95
Seat belt reminder ..................... 96
Airbag and belt tensioners ......... 96
Airbag deactivation .................... 97
Charging system ....................... 97
Malfunction indicator light .......... 97
Service vehicle soon ................. 98
Stop engine ............................... 98
Brake system ............................. 98
Parking brake ............................ 98
Antilock brake system (ABS) ..... 98
Gear shifting .............................. 98
Variable effort steering .............. 99
Lane departure warning ............ 99
Electronic Stability Control ........ 99
Engine coolant temperature ...... 99
Preheating ............................... 100
AdBlue ..................................... 100
Tyre pressure monitoring
system .................................... 100
Engine oil pressure .................. 100
Low fuel ................................... 101
Stop-start system .................... 101
Exterior light ............................ 101
Low beam ................................ 101
High beam ............................... 101
High beam assist ..................... 101
Front fog lights ......................... 101
Rear fog light ........................... 101
Cruise control .......................... 101
Active emergency braking ....... 102
Speed warning ........................ 102
Speed limiter ........................... 102
Tachograph ............................. 102
Door open ................................ 102
Displays ..................................... 103
Driver Information Centre ........ 103
Info Display .............................. 103
Vehicle messages ...................... 104
Warning chimes ....................... 105
Trip computer ............................. 106
Tachograph ................................ 107
Instruments and controls 83
Controls
Steering wheel adjustment
Unlock lever, adjust steering wheel,
then engage lever and ensure it is
fully locked.
Do not adjust steering wheel unless
vehicle is stationary and steering
wheel lock has been released.
Steering wheel controls
The cruise control and speed limiter
can be operated via the controls on
the steering wheel.
Cruise control 3 246.
Speed limiter 3 248.
Horn
Press j.
The horn will sound regardless of
ignition switch position.
Steering column controls
The Infotainment system can also be
operated via the controls on the
steering column.
Further information is available in the
Infotainment manual.
Instruments and controls 85
Turn the adjuster wheel to adjust the
sensitivity:
low sensitivity : turn adjuster
wheel downwards
high sensitivity : turn adjuster
wheel upwards
Keep the sensor free from dust, dirt
and ice.
Windscreen washer
Pull lever. Washer fluid is sprayed
onto the windscreen.
short pull : wiper swipes once
long pull : wiper swipes for a few
strokes
Outside temperature
The outside temperature is displayed
in the Driver Information Centre or in
the Info Display. A drop in
temperature is indicated immediately
and a rise in temperature after a time
delay.
If outside temperatures is -3 °C to
3 °C, the °C flashes in the display as
a warning for icy road conditions.
86 Instruments and controls
9Warning
The road surface may already be
icy even though the display
indicates a few degrees above 0
°C.
Clock
Depending on vehicle, the current
time and / or date may appear in the
Info Display 3 103 or the Driver
Information Centre 3 103.
Set time and date in information
display
Further information is available in the
Infotainment manual.
Set time in Driver Information
Centre
Display the clock function by pressing
button repeatedly on end of wiper
lever.
Press and hold one of the buttons
until hours flash.
Press or hold one of the buttons
to set the hour.
Wait until minutes flash.
Press or hold one of the buttons
to set the minute.
Wait before selecting another
function.
Power outlets
12 V power outlets are located on top
of the instrument panel, or beside the
gearshift lever.
Instruments and controls 87
Depending on vehicle, an additional
outlet may be located in the rear of the
vehicle.
Connecting electrical accessories
while the engine is off will discharge
the vehicle battery. Do not exceed the
maximum power consumption of
120 W.
9Danger
To avoid the risk of fire, if multiple
power outlets are used
simultaneously, the total power
consumption of connected
accessories must not exceed
180 W.
With ignition off the power outlet may
be deactivated.
Additionally, the power outlet may be
deactivated in case of low battery
voltage.
Electrical accessories that are
connected must comply with the
electromagnetic compatibility
requirements laid down in
DIN VDE 40 839.
Caution
Do not connect any current-
delivering accessories, e.g.
electrical charging devices or
batteries.
Do not damage the outlets by
using unsuitable plugs.
USB socket
In the Infotainment unit or on the
instrument panel there is a USB
socket M for the connection of external
audio sources and for charging
devices.
88 Instruments and controls
Notice
The sockets must always be kept
clean and dry.
AUX socket, SD card slot refer to the
Infotainment manual.
Inductive charging
9Warning
Inductive charging can affect the
operation of implanted
pacemakers or other medical
devices. If applicable, seek
medical advice before using the
inductive charging device.
9Warning
Remove any metal objects from
the charging device before
charging a mobile device, as these
objects could become very hot.
To charge a device, the ignition must
be switched on.
To charge a mobile device:
1. Remove all objects from the
charging device.
2. Place the mobile device with the
display facing upwards on the
charging device in the storage.
Charging status may be indicated in
the Info Display.
PMA or Qi compatible mobile devices
can be charged inductively.
On some mobile devices, a back
cover with an integrated coil or a
jacket may be required to use
inductive charging.
Protective cover for the mobile device
could have impact on the inductive
charging.
In the event that the mobile device is
not charging properly, rotate it 180°
and place it on the charging device
again.
Instruments and controls 89
Cigarette lighter
Press in cigarette lighter. It switches
off automatically once the element is
glowing. Pull out lighter.
Ashtrays
Caution
To be used only for ash and not for
combustible rubbish.
Portable ashtray
Ashtray container for mobile use in
the vehicle. To use, open cover.
Warning lights, gauges
and indicators
Instrument cluster
In some versions, the needles of the
instruments briefly rotate to the end
position when the ignition is switched
on.
Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
Speed warning 3 102.
Speed limiter 3 248.
Cruise control 3 246.
90 Instruments and controls
Odometer
Displays the recorded distance in
miles.
Notice
When a tachograph is fitted, the total
distance travelled may be shown
only on the tachograph.
Trip odometer
The trip odometer displays the
distance travelled since the last reset.
To reset, with the trip odometer
displayed, press and hold one of the
buttons on end of wiper lever until the
value resets to 0.
Trip computer 3 106.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed.
Drive in a low engine speed range for
each gear as much as possible.
Caution
If the needle is in the red warning
zone, the maximum permitted
engine speed is exceeded. Engine
at risk.
Instruments and controls 91
Fuel gauge
Displays fuel level in the tank.
Depending on vehicle content are
different designs used.
Control indicator Y illuminates and a
warning chime sounds if the level in
the tank is low. Refuel immediately
3 260.
Never run the tank dry.
Diesel fuel system bleeding 3 273.
Because of the fuel remaining in the
tank, the top-up quantity may be less
than the specified tank capacity.
AdBlue gauge
AdBlue gauge shows the current
AdBlue fluid level remaining in the
tank.
Control indicator ú 3 100 illuminates
and a warning chime sounds if the
level in the tank is low. Refill AdBlue
as soon as possible to avoid
prevention of engine starts.
AdBlue 3 231.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge
Displays the coolant temperature.
left area : engine operating
temperature not yet
reached
central
area : normal operating
temperature
right area : temperature too high
Control indicator W illuminates red if
the temperature is too high 3 99.
If W illuminates red in combination
with C, stop vehicle and switch off
engine as soon as possible 3 98.
92 Instruments and controls
Caution
If engine coolant temperature is
too high, stop vehicle, switch off
engine. Danger to engine. Check
coolant level.
For physical reasons, the coolant
temperature gauge shows the coolant
temperature only if the coolant level is
adequate.
Service display
Select the service page in the Driver
Information Centre, when the ignition
is switched on without running
engine. Press and hold one of the
buttons on end of wiper lever for
approx. 5 seconds 3 106. The
distance and time to the next service
are displayed. Pressing then lower
botton, shows the information for the
next engine oil change.
When the ignition is switched on, the
remaining distance or time before the
next service is due may be shown
briefly in the Driver Information
Centre. Based on driving conditions,
the interval at which a service will be
indicated can vary considerably.
When the remaining distance before
the next service is less than
930 miles or 1 month, a message
appears in the Driver Information
Centre.
When the distance reaches 0 miles or
the service date is due, control
indicator j illuminates and a
message appears in the Driver
Information Centre.
The vehicle needs a service. Seek the
assistance of a workshop.
Resetting the service display
After a service or an engine oil
change, the values must be reset:
select the relevant information in the
Driver Information Centre, then press
and hold one of the buttons on end of
wiper lever for approx. 10 seconds
until the distance is displayed
continuously.
Trip computer 3 106.
Driver Information Centre 3 103.
Service information 3 309.
Transmission display
The mode or selected gear of the
manual transmission automated is
shown in the transmission display.
R: reverse gear
N: neutral
D: automatic mode
kg : laden mode
T: apply footbrake
W: transmission electronics
Manual transmission automated
3 238.
Instruments and controls 93
Control indicators
The control indicators described are
not present in all vehicles. The
description applies to all instrument
versions. Depending on the
equipment, the position of the control
indicators may vary. When the
ignition is switched on, most control
indicators will illuminate briefly as a
functionality test.
The control indicator colours mean:
red : danger, important reminder
yellow : warning, information, fault
green : confirmation of activation
blue : confirmation of activation
white : confirmation of activation
94 Instruments and controls
Control indicators in the instrument cluster
Instruments and controls 95
Control indicators in the overhead
console
Overview
OTurn lights 3 95
XSeat belt reminder 3 96
vAirbag and belt tensioners
3 96
WAirbag deactivation 3 97
pCharging system 3 97
ZMalfunction indicator light
3 97
jService vehicle soon 3 98
STOP Stop engine 3 98
RBrake system 3 98
jParking brake 3 98
uAntilock brake system (ABS)
3 98
ba Gear shifting 3 98
§Variable effort steering
3 99
QLane departure warning
3 99
RElectronic Stability Control
3 99
WEngine coolant temperature
3 99
!Preheating 3 100
úAdBlue 3 100
wTyre pressure monitoring
system 3 100
IEngine oil pressure 3 100
YLow fuel 3 101
DAutostop (Stop-start system)
3 101
\Autostop inhibited (Stop-
start system) 3 101
FExterior light 3 101
9Low beam 3 101
CHigh beam 3 101
fHigh beam assist 3 101
>Front fog lights 3 101
øRear fog light 3 101
mCruise control 3 101
lActive emergency braking
3 102
$Speed warning 3 102
UCruise control 3 101, speed
limiter 3 102
&Tachograph 3 102
yDoor open 3 102
Turn lights
O flashes green.
96 Instruments and controls
Flashes if a turn light or the hazard
warning flashers are activated.
Rapid flashing: failure of a turn light or
associated fuse.
An audible warning can be heard
when the turn lights are on. When
towing a trailer, the pitch of the
audible warning changes.
Bulb replacement 3 274.
Fuses 3 282.
Turn lights 3 111.
Seat belt reminder
Front seats
X illuminates or flashes red in the
overhead console.
When the engine is started X
illuminates, if front seat belts are not
fastened.
If the seat belt is unfastened, control
indicator X will flash when vehicle
speed exceeds approx. 16 mph. A
warning chime also sounds for
approx. 120 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle, the control
indicator flashes if the front
passenger seat is occupied and seat
belt is not fastened.
If the seat belt is fastened, the
indicator light extinguishes.
Rear seats
The status of the seat belts of not
removable rear seats is given with
each:
starting the vehicle
opening a door
fastening or unfastening of a seat
belt
A warning chime also sounds for
approx. 60 seconds when
unfastening.
A filled circle indicates a fastened
seat belt.
Three-point seat belts 3 55.
Airbag and belt tensioners
v illuminates yellow.
When the ignition is switched on, the
control indicator illuminates briefly. If
it does not illuminate or illuminates
whilst driving, there is a fault in the
airbag system. Seek the assistance
of a workshop. The airbags and belt
pretensioners may fail to trigger in the
event of an accident.
Instruments and controls 97
Deployment of the belt pretensioners
or airbags is indicated by continuous
illumination of v.
9Warning
Have the cause of the fault
remedied immediately by a
workshop.
Belt pretensioners 3 54.
Airbag system 3 58.
Airbag deactivation
Ó illuminates yellow.
Illuminates for approx. 60 seconds
after the ignition is switched on. The
front passenger airbag is activated.
W illuminates yellow when the
ignition is switched on and remains
illuminated when the front passenger
airbag has been deactivated 3 62.
9Danger
Risk of fatal injury for a child using
a child restraint system together
with activated front passenger
airbag.
Risk of fatal injury for an adult
person with deactivated front
passenger airbag.
Airbag system 3 58.
Airbag deactivation 3 62.
Charging system
p illuminates red.
Illuminates when the ignition is
switched on and extinguishes shortly
after the engine starts.
Illuminates when the engine is
running
Stop, switch off engine. Vehicle
battery is not charging. Engine
cooling may be interrupted. The
brake servo unit may cease to be
effective. Seek the assistance of a
workshop.
Malfunction indicator light
Z illuminates or flashes yellow.
Illuminates briefly when the ignition is
switched on.
Illuminates when the engine is
running
Fault in the emission control system.
The permitted emission limits may be
exceeded. Seek the assistance of a
workshop immediately.
If Z illuminates in combination with
A, stop vehicle and switch off engine
as soon as possible.
9Warning
Have the cause of the fault
remedied immediately by a
workshop.
Flashes when the engine is
running
Fault that could lead to catalytic
converter damage. Ease up on the
accelerator until the flashing stops.
Seek the immediate assistance of a
workshop.
98 Instruments and controls
Service vehicle soon
j illuminates yellow.
Illuminates briefly when the ignition is
switched on.
The vehicle needs a service.
May illuminate in combination with
another control indicator or a
message in the Driver Information
Centre 3 103.
Illuminates if cleaning of the diesel
particle filter is required and
automatic cleaning does not occur
3 230.
9Warning
Have the cause of the fault
remedied immediately by a
workshop.
Stop engine
STOP illuminates red.
Illuminates briefly when the ignition is
switched on.
Stop vehicle and switch off engine as
soon as possible.
May illuminate in combination with
another control indicator or a
message in the Driver Information
Centre 3 103.
9Warning
Have the cause of the fault
remedied immediately by a
workshop.
Brake system
R illuminates red.
Illuminates briefly when the ignition is
switched on.
R illuminates (possibly in
combination with STOP) if the brake
fluid level is too low 3 271 or brake
system has a fault.
9Warning
Stop. Do not continue your
journey. Consult a workshop.
Brake system 3 241.
Parking brake
j illuminates red.
Control indicator j remains
illuminated when the parking brake is
applied and extinguishes when the
parking brake is released 3 242.
Antilock brake system
(ABS)
u illuminates yellow.
Illuminates briefly when the ignition is
switched on. The system is ready for
operation when u extinguishes.
Illuminates during driving when there
is a fault in the ABS. The brake
system remains operational but
without ABS regulation.
Antilock brake system 3 241.
Gear shifting
b or a illuminates in the Driver
Information Centre.
Illuminates when gearshifting is
recommended for fuel saving
reasons.
Instruments and controls 99
ECO mode 3 222.
Variable effort steering
§ illuminates red.
Illuminates briefly when the ignition is
switched on.
Illuminates during driving
The power steering system has a
fault.
May illuminate together with control
indicator C.
9Warning
Have the cause of the fault
remedied immediately by a
workshop.
Lane departure warning
Q illuminates yellow.
Illuminates briefly when the ignition is
switched on.
Illuminates permanently when the
system is switched off.
A warning chime sounds in
conjunction with Q when the system
recognises an unintended lane
change.
Q illuminates white in the Driver
Information Centre when the ignition
is switched on and the system is
ready to operate.
Lane departure warning 3 258.
Electronic Stability Control
b flashes or illuminates yellow.
Illuminates briefly when the ignition is
switched on.
Flashing during driving
The system is actively engaged.
Engine output may be reduced and
the vehicle may be braked
automatically to a small degree
3 245.
Illuminates during driving
The system is unavailable.
May illuminate together with control
indicator j 3 98. A corresponding
message also appears in the Driver
Information Centre 3 103.
ESC 3 245.
Traction Control system 3 244.
Engine coolant temperature
W illuminates blue or red.
Illuminates briefly blue when the
ignition is switched on or when engine
temperature is low.
Illuminates when the engine is
running
If W illuminates red (possibly in
combination with control indicator
C), stop vehicle and allow the engine
to idle for 2 minutes. W should
extinguish, if not then switch off
engine.
Caution
Coolant temperature too high.
Check coolant level 3 270.
100 Instruments and controls
If there is sufficient coolant, consult a
workshop.
Preheating
! illuminates yellow.
Preheating is activated.Only
activates when outside temperature
is low.
AdBlue
ú illuminates yellow.
AdBlue level is low. Refill AdBlue as
soon as possible, to avoid prevention
of engine starts.
Illuminates together with control
indicator j to indicate a system
failure or as a warning that engine
starting may not be possible after a
certain distance. Seek the assistance
of a workshop immediately.
A corresponding message may
appear in the Driver Information
Centre 3 103.
AdBlue 3 231.
Tyre pressure monitoring
system
w illuminates or flashes yellow.
Illuminates briefly when the ignition is
switched on.
Illuminates
Tyre pressure loss. Stop immediately
and check tyre pressure.
Control indicator w illuminates
together with C 3 98 and a
corresponding message appears in
the Driver Information Centre when a
puncture or severely under-inflated
tyre is detected.
Flashes
Fault in system. After a delay the
control indicator illuminates
continuously. Consult a workshop.
Control indicator w illuminates
together with j 3 98 and a
corresponding message appears in
the Driver Information Centre when a
tyre without a pressure sensor is
mounted (e.g. spare wheel).
Tyre pressure monitoring system
3 290.
Engine oil pressure
I illuminates red.
Illuminates briefly when the ignition is
switched on.
Illuminates when the engine is
running
Caution
Engine lubrication may be
interrupted. This may result in
damage to the engine and/or
locking of the drive wheels.
1. Depress clutch.
2. Select neutral gear, set selector
lever to N.
3. Move out of the flow of traffic as
quickly as possible without
impeding other vehicles.
4. Switch off ignition.
Instruments and controls 101
9Warning
When the engine is off,
considerably more force is needed
to brake and steer. During an
Autostop the brake servo unit will
still be operational.
Do not remove key until vehicle is
stationary, otherwise the steering
wheel lock could engage
unexpectedly.
Check engine oil level 3 268.
Keep engine turned off and let the
vehicle be towed to a workshop.
Low fuel
Y illuminates yellow.
Illuminates when the ignition is
switched on and extinguishes shortly
after the engine starts.
Illuminates when the engine is
running
Fuel level in the tank is too low. Refuel
immediately.
Never run the tank dry.
Refuelling 3 260.
Catalytic converter 3 231.
Bleeding the diesel fuel system
3 273.
Stop-start system
\ illuminates when an Autostop is
inhibited when certain conditions are
not fulfilled.
Ï illuminates during an Autostop.
Ï flashes if the clutch is not released
sufficiently.
Stop-start system 3 225.
Exterior light
F illuminates green.
Illuminated when the side lights are
on 3 108.
Low beam
9 illuminates or flashes green.
Illuminates
Illuminated when the headlights are
on 3 108.
Flashes
Fault in the lighting.
High beam
P illuminates blue.
Illuminated when high beam is on and
during headlight flash 3 109.
High beam assist
f illuminates when the high beam
assist is activated 3 109.
Front fog lights
> illuminates green.
Illuminated when the front fog lights
are on 3 111.
Rear fog light
ø illuminates yellow.
Illuminated when the rear fog light is
on 3 112.
Cruise control
U, m illuminate green.
102 Instruments and controls
U illuminates green when the system
is on.
m illuminates green when a certain
speed is stored.
Cruise control 3 246.
Active emergency braking
l illuminates or flashes red.
Illuminates
The system has been deactivated or
a fault has been detected.
Additionally, a warning message is
displayed in the Driver Information
Centre.
In case of a system fault, seek the
assistance of a workshop.
Flashes
The system is actively engaged.
Depending on the situation, the
vehicle may automatically brake
moderately or hard.
Active emergency braking 3 250.
Speed warning
Depending on vehicle and country,
$ is displayed as long as the speed
is over a set value.
Limited speed
Depending on version and country,
the maximum speed is set by default.
A warning chime will sound for
10 seconds if the vehicle briefly
exceeds the set limit.
Notice
Under certain conditions (e.g. steep
inclines) the vehicle speed may
exceed the set limit.
Speed limiter 3 248.
Speed limiter
U illuminates yellow.
Illuminates when the system is on.
Speed limiter 3 248.
Tachograph
& illuminates when there is a fault in
the system.
Tachograph 3 107.
Door open
y illuminates yellow.
Illuminates with the ignition switched
on when a door or the load
compartment is open.
Instruments and controls 103
Displays
Driver Information Centre
The Driver Information Centre is
located in the instrument cluster.
Depending on vehicle configuration,
the following items appear by
pressing one of the buttons
repeatedly on end of wiper lever:
outside temperature 3 85
clock 3 86
odometer, trip odometer 3 90
fuel gauge 3 91
AdBlue gauge 3 91
engine coolant temperature
gauge 3 91
service display 3 92
vehicle messages 3 104
trip computer 3 106
active emergency braking
3 250
Some of the displayed functions differ
when the vehicle is being driven or at
a standstill. Some functions are only
available when the vehicle is being
driven.
Info Display
The central display in the
Infotainment system displays the time
(and / or outside temperature,
depending on version) and
Infotainment system information.
Press X to switch the Infotainment
system on. Alternatively, it
automatically switches on when the
ignition is switched on.
Depending on system, the
Infotainment system is operated via
buttons and rotary knobs on the
Infotainment system fascia, the
steering column controls, the voice
recognition system (if available) or via
the touchscreen display.
104 Instruments and controls
Touchscreen operation
Make the appropriate selection from
the available menus and options by
touching the display screen with the
finger.
For further information, refer to the
Infotainment system manual.
Journey record
When the engine is switched off, a
record of the last journey may be
shown in the Info Display.
The following information is
displayed:
average fuel consumption
trip odometer
fuel saved in miles
If equipped, a rating of 0 to 100 is
shown in the Info Display, to help
evaluate fuel efficiency, based on
driving style. Higher ratings indicate
better fuel economy.
Tips to improve fuel economy are also
given in the display. Journeys can be
saved in the system memory,
enabling to compare performances.
Refer to Infotainment manual for
further information.
Vehicle messages
Messages are indicated in the Driver
Information Centre, in some cases
together with a warning chime. The
vehicle messages are displayed as
text. Follow the instructions given in
the messages.
Fault messages
Displayed in combination with control
indicator j. Drive with caution and
seek the assistance of a workshop.
To remove fault message, press a
button on end of wiper lever. After a
few seconds the message may
disappear automatically and j
remains illuminated. The fault will
then be stored in the on board
system.
Warning messages
These may appear with control
indicator C or in combination with
other warning messages, control
indicators or an audible warning. Stop
engine immediately and seek the
assistance of a workshop.
Instruments and controls 105
Warning chimes
If several warnings appear at the
same time, only one warning chime
will sound.
When starting the engine or whilst
driving
The warning chime regarding
unfastened seat belts has priority
over any other warning chime.
If seat belt is not fastened 3 55.
If a certain speed is exceeded
with the parking brake applied
3 242.
If the parking assist detects an
object or a fault is present
3 252.
If the vehicle has manual
transmission automated and the
clutch temperature is too high
3 238.
If the vehicle speed briefly
exceeds a set limit 3 89.
During closing of the power
sliding door 3 29.
If the sliding door is open and the
parking brake is released 3 29.
During activation and
deactivation of alarm monitoring
of vehicle inclination 3 35.
If the AdBlue level falls below a
certain amount or a fault is
present 3 231.
If the lane departure warning
system detects an unintended
lane change and when the
system is activated 3 258.
When the vehicle is parked and /
or the driver's door is opened
When the key is in the ignition
switch.
With exterior lights on 3 108.
There is a fault with the power
door lock system 3 28.
If the vehicle has manual
transmission automated 3 238,
the parking brake has not been
applied, neutral is not selected or
the brake pedal has not been
depressed. A corresponding
message may also appear in the
Driver Information Centre 3 103.
If the sliding side door exterior
handle is in the open position
when unlocking the vehicle 3 29.
If the parking brake is not applied
when the power sliding door
switch is pressed 3 29.
If the power sliding door is locked
from the inside with the child lock
active 3 29.
If the engine is in an Autostop but
not switched off. Stop-start
system 3 225.
106 Instruments and controls
Trip computer
The trip computer provides
information on driving data, which is
continually recorded and evaluated
electronically.
Depending on vehicle, the following
functions can be selected by pressing
one of the buttons repeatedly on end
of wiper lever 3 103:
odometer 3 90
trip odometer 3 90
average fuel consumption
instantaneous fuel consumption
fuel range
distance travelled
average speed
digital speed
engine coolent temperature
3 91
clock 3 86
distance before service 3 92
tyre pressure reset 3 290
settings
fault and information messages
3 104
AdBlue range
Average fuel consumption
The value is displayed after driving a
distance of 0.25 miles.
Average fuel consumption is
displayed, taking into consideration
the distance travelled and the fuel
used since the last reset.
Instantaneous fuel consumption
The value is displayed after reaching
a speed of 12 mph.
Fuel range
The value is displayed after driving a
distance of 0.25 miles.
The fuel range is calculated from the
current contents of the fuel tank and
the average fuel consumption since
the last reset.
The fuel range will not display if
control indicator Y is illuminated
3 101.
Distance travelled
Displays the distance driven since the
last reset.
Average speed
The value is displayed after driving a
distance of 0.25 miles.
The average speed since the last
reset is displayed.
Interruptions in the journey with the
ignition off are not included in the
calculations.
Reset trip computer information
To reset the trip computer, select one
of its functions then press and hold
one of the buttons on end of wiper
lever.
The following trip computer
information can be reset:
average fuel consumption
distance travelled
average speed
The trip computer will reset
automatically when the maximum
value of any of the parameters is
exceeded.
Instruments and controls 107
Digital speed
Digital display of the instantaneous
speed.
Settings
Press and hold one of the buttons on
end of wiper lever for approx.
5 seconds to select the display
language.
AdBlue range
The AdBlue range is calculated from
the current contents of the AdBlue
tank and the average AdBlue
consumption 3 231.
Interruption of power supply
If the power supply has been
interrupted or if the vehicle battery
voltage has dropped too low, the
values stored in the trip computer will
be lost.
Tachograph
The tachograph is operated as
described in the operating
instructions supplied. Observe
regulations regarding use.
108 Lighting
Lighting
Exterior lighting .......................... 108
Light switch .............................. 108
Automatic light control ............. 108
High beam ............................... 109
High beam assist ..................... 109
Headlight flash ......................... 110
Headlight range adjustment ....110
Headlights when driving
abroad .................................... 110
Daytime running lights ............. 111
Hazard warning flashers .......... 111
Turn lights ................................ 111
Front fog lights ......................... 111
Rear fog light ........................... 112
Reversing lights ....................... 112
Misted light covers ................... 112
Interior lighting ........................... 112
Interior lights ............................ 112
Load compartment lighting ...... 113
Reading lights .......................... 114
Lighting features ........................ 114
Exit lighting .............................. 114
Battery discharge protection .... 115
Exterior lighting
Light switch
Turn outer light switch:
7: off
0: sidelights
9 P: headlights
AUTO : automatic light control:
headlights are switched on
and off automatically.
Sidelights control indicator F
3 101.
Low beam control indicator 9 3 101.
High beam control indicator P
3 101.
Side position lights
Side position lights are illuminated
together with sidelights.
Automatic light control
When the automatic light control
function is switched on and the
engine is running, the system
switches between daytime running
lights (where fitted) and headlights,
depending on the lighting conditions.
For reasons of safety, the light switch
should always remain in the AUTO
position.
Daytime running lights 3 111.
Lighting 109
Automatic headlight activation
During poor lighting conditions the
headlights are switched on.
Additionally, headlights are switched
on if the windscreen wiper has been
activated for several wipes.
High beam
To change between low and high
beam, pull lever beyond the
resistance point.
High beam assist
This feature automatically activates
the high beam at night when vehicle
speed is faster than 28 mph.
It switches automatically back to low
beam when:
The camera in the windscreen
detects the lights of oncoming or
preceding vehicles.
It is foggy or snowy.
Driving in urban areas.
If there are no restrictions detected,
the system switches back to high
beam.
Activation
Turn the outer light switch to AUTO
then pull the lever to activate high
beam assist.
The control indicator f illuminates
continuously in the instrument cluster
when the assist is activated, while the
blue control indicator 7 3 101
illuminates when high beam is on.
Control indicator f 3 101.
Notice
Use of the system does not relieve
the driver from full responsibility for
vehicle operation.
Deactivation
Pull the lever again. Control indicator
f extinguishes.
High beam assist is also deactivated
when the outer light switch is moved
out of the AUTO position or the
ignition is switched off.
Notice
Depending on version, the system
can be also deactivated via the
Infotainment system. Refer to
Infotainment manual for further
information.
110 Lighting
General information
Performance of the system can be
affected due to the following:
Extreme weather conditions, e.g.
heavy rain, fog or snow.
The front camera or the
windscreen is obstructed, e.g. by
a portable navigation system.
Oncoming or preceding vehicle
lights are not detected.
Headlights are not adjusted
correctly.
Various reflective surfaces may
also cause the system to fail to
detect other vehicles.
Headlight flash
To activate the headlight flash, pull
the lever briefly without passing the
resistance point.
High beam 3 109.
Headlight range adjustment
Manual headlight range
adjustment
With low beam switched on, adapt the
headlight range to suit the vehicle
load to prevent dazzling of oncoming
traffic.
Turn knurled wheel to proposed
position:
0 : driver only
2 : front seats occupied and loaded
up to permissible maximum
weight
3 : driver only and loaded up to
permissible maximum weight
Headlights when driving
abroad
The asymmetrical headlight beam
extends visibility at the edge of the
road at the passenger side.
However, when driving in countries
where traffic drives on the opposite
side of the road, adjust the headlights
to prevent dazzling of oncoming
traffic.
Open the bonnet and adjust both
headlights with a screwdriver by
turning the screw a quarter turn in -
direction. Adjust to standard position
by turning the screw a quarter turn in
+ direction.
Lighting 111
Daytime running lights
Daytime running lights increase
visibility of the vehicle during daylight.
The lights operate automatically
when the ignition is switched on.
If the vehicle is equipped with the
automatic light control function, the
system switches between daytime
running lights and headlights
automatically depending on the
lighting conditions.
Automatic light control 3 108.
Hazard warning flashers
Operated by pressing ¨.
In the event of hard braking, the
hazard warning flashers may turn on
automatically. Switch off by pressing
¨.
Turn lights
up : right turn light
down : left turn light
A resistance point can be felt when
moving the lever.
Constant flashing is activated when
the lever is being moved beyond the
resistance point. It is deactivated
when the steering wheel is moved in
the opposite direction or lever is
manually moved back to its neutral
position.
Activate temporary flashing by
holding the lever just before the
resistance point. Turn lights will flash
until lever is being released.
To activate three flashes, tap the
lever briefly without passing the
resistance point.
Front fog lights
Turn inner switch to position > and
release.
112 Lighting
Front fog lights operate with engine
running and headlights switched on.
Rear fog light
Turn inner switch to position ø and
release.
Rear fog light operates with engine
running and headlights switched on.
Reversing lights
The reversing lights come on when
the ignition is on and reverse gear is
selected.
Misted light covers
The inside of the light covers may mist
up briefly in poor, wet and cold
weather conditions, in heavy rain or
after washing. The mist disappears
quickly by itself. To help, switch on the
headlights.
Interior lighting
Interior lights
Courtesy lights illuminate when the
vehicle is unlocked with the remote
control or the front doors are opened.
When the doors are closed, the
courtesy light extinguishes after a
delay or immediately after the ignition
is switched on.
Front courtesy light
central posi‐
tion : automatic switching
on and off
press c: on
press 0: off
Lighting 113
Rear courtesy lights
Combi, Bus
Low level and overhead courtesy
lights are located in the rear
passenger compartment.
Press the button to switch the lights
on or off.
Reading lights 3 114.
Load compartment lighting
Load compartment lighting can be set
to illuminate when the side and rear
doors are opened, or switched on
constantly.
With the switch in its central position,
the light functions as a courtesy light.
operated by pressing the left side
of the switch: on constantly
operated by pressing the right
side of the switch: off constantly
Operated by pressing the switch c:
on constantly
on when the doors are unlocked
and opened
off constantly
When the doors are closed, the
courtesy light extinguishes after a
delay or immediately after the ignition
is switched on.
114 Lighting
Reading lights
Front reading light
press l: on
press 0: off
Rear reading lights
Combi, Bus
Each reading light can be switched on
or off individually as required.
press I: on
press 0: off
Courtesy lights 3 112.
Lighting features
Exit lighting
Headlights come on for approx.
30 seconds after the vehicle is parked
and the system is activated.
Activating
1. Switch off ignition.
2. Light switch in position 7 or
AUTO.
3. Pull lever towards steering wheel.
This action can be repeated up to four
times.
Lighting 115
The headlights are turned off
immediately by turning the light switch
to any position and returning to 7 or
AUTO.
Battery discharge protection
To prevent discharge of the vehicle
battery when the ignition is switched
off, some interior lights may be
switched off automatically after some
time.
116 Infotainment system
Infotainment system
Introduction ................................ 116
General information ................. 116
Theft-deterrent feature ............ 118
Control elements overview ...... 120
Usage ...................................... 127
Touch operation overview ....... 134
Tone settings ........................... 134
Volume settings ....................... 136
System settings ....................... 136
Radio ......................................... 141
Usage ...................................... 141
Station search ......................... 143
Autostore lists .......................... 145
Radio data system (RDS) ........ 146
Digital audio broadcasting ....... 148
AUX input ................................... 149
General information ................. 149
Usage ...................................... 149
USB port .................................... 151
General information ................. 151
Playing saved audio files ......... 151
Bluetooth music ......................... 154
General information ................. 154
Operation ................................. 154
External devices ........................ 159
Displaying pictures .................. 159
Playing movies ........................ 159
Using smartphone
applications ............................ 160
Navigation .................................. 161
General information ................. 161
Usage ...................................... 164
Destination input ...................... 174
Guidance ................................. 179
Symbols overview ................... 186
Voice recognition ....................... 187
General information ................. 187
Navigation control .................... 188
Phone control .......................... 189
Phone ........................................ 190
General information ................. 190
Connection .............................. 192
Bluetooth connection ............... 194
Emergency call ........................ 197
Operation ................................. 197
Mobile phones and CB radio
equipment ............................... 203
Introduction
General information
The Infotainment system provides
state-of-the-art in-car information and
entertainment.
The radio is equipped with assignable
channel presets for FM, AM and also
DAB wavebands (depending on
version).
External data storage devices, e.g.
iPod, MP3 player or USB stick, or a
portable player can be connected to
the Infotainment system. External
audio sources can also be connected
via Bluetooth.
The digital sound processor provides
several preset equalizer modes for
sound optimisation.
The navigation system's dynamic
route planning will reliably guide to
the chosen destination and can help
avoid traffic jams and other traffic
problems.
Optionally, the Infotainment system
can be operated using controls on the
steering column or via the voice
recognition system.
Infotainment system 117
In addition, the Infotainment system
can be equipped with a handsfree
phone system.
The well-thought-out design of the
controls and the clear displays enable
to control the system easily and
intuitively.
Notice
This manual describes all options
and features available for the
various Infotainment systems.
Certain descriptions, including those
for display and menu functions, may
not apply to your vehicle due to
model variant, country
specifications, special equipment or
accessories.
Important information on
operation and traffic safety
9Warning
Drive safely at all times when
using the Infotainment system.
If in doubt, stop the vehicle before
operating the Infotainment
system.
Radio reception
Radio reception may be disrupted by
static, noise, distortion or loss of
reception due to:
changes in distance from the
transmitter
multi-path reception due to
reflection
shadowing
In case of poor radio reception the
volume will automatically drop as to
minimize the disturbance effect.
Using this manual
This manual describes features
that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle, either because
they are optional or due to
changes subsequent to the
printing of this manual. Please
refer to the purchase
documentation to confirm each of
the features found on the vehicle.
Certain controls and
descriptions, including symbols,
displays and menu functions may
not apply to your vehicle due to
model variant, country
specifications, special equipment
or accessories.
The table of contents at the
beginning of this manual and
within each section shows where
the information is located.
The index will enable to search
for specific information.
The vehicle display screens may
not support your specific
language.
Display messages and interior
labelling are written in bold
letters.
The operations given within this
manual refer to Infotainment
system controls. For equivalent
steering column controls, refer to
the control elements overview
3 120.
118 Infotainment system
Warnings and cautions
9Warning
Text marked 9 Warning provides
information on risk of accident or
injury. Disregarding this
information may lead to injury.
Caution
Text marked Caution provides
information on possible damage to
the vehicle. Disregarding this
information may lead to vehicle
damage.
Symbols
Page references are indicated with 3.
3 means "see page".
Theft-deterrent feature
Depending on Infotainment system,
an electronic security system is
included for the purpose of theft
deterrence. The Infotainment system
functions only in your vehicle and is
therefore worthless to a thief.
The security code (supplied
separately) must be entered upon
first use of the system and after
prolonged interruptions to the power
supply.
Entering the security code
When first switching on the
Infotainment system, an enter
security code message, e.g. Radio
code followed by 0000 appears on the
display screen. Depending on
Infotainment system, the message
may only appear after a brief delay.
To enter first digit of security code,
press numbered button 1 on the unit
repeatedly until desired number is
displayed. Enter second, third and
fourth digits using buttons 2, 3 and 4
in the same way.
When the full code is displayed, press
and hold button 6 until an audible
signal sounds. The system is
unlocked when the correct code has
been entered.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink,
NAVI 80 IntelliLink: Enter the security
code using numbered buttons 0 to 9
on the touchscreen display. The
system is unlocked when the correct
code has been entered.
Incorrect code entered
Depending on Infotainment system,
when the security code has been
entered incorrectly, an incorrect code
message, e.g. Error code followed by
a countdown value, e.g. Wait 100 is
displayed.
Wait until the countdown has expired,
then enter the correct code. Each
time the code is entered incorrectly,
the countdown time may be doubled,
depending on Infotainment system.
Changing the geographical area
When the security code is entered,
depending on Infotainment system it
will be necessary to choose a
geographical area, for example:
Europe
Asia
Arabia
America
Infotainment system 119
Switch off the Infotainment system,
then simultaneously press button 1
and 5 and m. Then press _ or 6 until
desired area is highlighted on the
display screen and set with button 6.
120 Infotainment system
Control elements overview
Radio 15 USB
Infotainment system 121
1m - Press: Switch on/off ...... 127
Turn: Adjust volume ............ 127
2Station buttons 1...6 ............ 143
Short press: Select station ..143
Long press: Save station .... 143
3 RADIO - Change audio
source, waveband ............... 141
4 MEDIA - Change audio
source ................................. 151
5Rotary knob ......................... 127
Short press: Confirm an
action .................................. 127
Turn: Access display
menu options ...................... 127
6/ - Return to previous
menu, cancel an action ....... 127
73 - Radio, Short press:
Search for next radio
frequency ............................ 143
Long press: Automatic
station search ...................... 143
8M USB port .......................... 151
9 SETUP - Short press:
Settings menu ..................... 127
10 TEL - Telephone menu ....... 190
11 2 - Radio, Short press:
Search for previous radio
frequency ............................ 143
Long press: Automatic
station search ...................... 143
12 TEXT - Display radio text
information .......................... 146
13 AUX input ............................ 149
122 Infotainment system
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Infotainment system 123
1æ: Darken screen (only
clock and audio system
information are displayed) ..127
2ñRadio: Change audio
source to radio .................... 141
3üMedia: Change audio
source - USB, iPod ............. 151
BT (Bluetooth) ..................... 154
AUX ..................................... 149
4Outside temperature
(depending on version) ....... 127
5yPhone: Telephone menu . 190
6Clock ................................... 127
7X: Switch on/off .................. 127
Increase / decrease volume 127
8M USB port .......................... 151
9AUX input ............................ 149
10 ÿSettings: Audio settings,
e.g. Tone settings ............... 134
Volume settings .................. 136
Connectivity settings ........... 127
Display settings ................... 127
System settings ................... 136
11 ýNav: Navigation menu ...... 161
12 _Map: Display the map ....161
Infotainment system 125
1Audio information, e.g.
Radio ................................... 141
Auxiliary devices ................. 149
M USB devices .................... 151
Bluetooth music .................. 154
2H: System notifications (if
equipped) ............................ 127
3y: Telephone status ........... 190
Call log ................................ 197
4Outside temperature ........... 127
5Clock ................................... 127
6Traffic information (if
applicable) ........................... 179
7R: Display lists - Scroll up ..127
Map: Change scale ............. 179
8Enter menus, confirm
actions ................................. 127
9S: Display lists - Scroll
down ................................... 127
Map: Change scale ............. 179
10 ;: Home page .................... 127
11 m - Press: Switch on/off ...... 127
Turn: Change volume ......... 127
12 Navigation: Direction and
distance to next change of
direction .............................. 161
13 <: Pop-up menu ................. 127
14 Navigation display ............... 161
Map ..................................... 179
15 f: Favourites, e.g. for
Navigation ⇑ ....................... 161
Media t (e.g. Radio) .......... 141
Phone g.............................. 190
Services N......................... 164
16 Driving economy (Eco
Driving) ................................ 127
17 Menu: Access Main menu ..127
Steering column controls -
Type A
126 Infotainment system
1 MEDIA - Change audio
source ................................. 127
2 RADIO - Change radio
waveband ........................... 141
3! - Increase volume ........... 127
4@ - Mute/unmute ................. 127
578 - Take/end phone call ..197
6# - Decrease volume .......... 127
75 - Voice recognition ........... 189
8Turn: Move up/down in
display menus, select
next/previous radio
preset / radio frequency /
audio track ......................... 143
Press: Confirm actions ........ 141
Steering column controls -
Type B
1 SOURCE/AUDIO -
Change audio source .......... 127
278 ...................................... 190
Take/end phone call ........... 197
@ - Mute/unmute ................. 127
3! - Increase volume,
mute/unmute ....................... 127
4# - Decrease volume,
mute/unmute ....................... 127
5 MODE/OK - Confirm
actions, change audio
mode ................................... 141
Take/end phone call ........... 197
6Turn: Access display
menu options, next/
previous radio preset /
radio frequency / audio
track ................................... 141
Infotainment system 127
Notice
If equipped, the voice recognition
button 5 may be located on the
steering column controls.
Usage
Infotainment controls
The Infotainment system is operated
via buttons, rotary knobs and/or
display menus.
Inputs are made via:
the central control unit in the
instrument panel 3 120, or
the controls on the steering
column 3 120
the voice recognition system (if
available) 3 187
the touchscreen
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink,
NAVI 80 IntelliLink) 3 134
Notice
Only the most direct ways for menu
operation are described in the
subsequent chapters. In some
cases, there may be other options.
Switching the Infotainment
system on or off
Press X to switch the Infotainment
system on.
The previously used audio source is
active.
Press X (or, depending on
Infotainment system, press and hold)
to switch the Infotainment system off.
Notice
The clock and/or outside
temperature may be displayed when
the Infotainment system is switched
off (depending on version).
NAVI 50 IntelliLink:
The Infotainment system
automatically switches on/off when
the ignition is switched on/off. Press
X instead, if required.
Press and hold X for 5 seconds to
restart the system.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink:
The Infotainment system switches on
automatically when the ignition is
switched on (depending on version).
Press X instead, if required.
The following options may be
displayed (depending on version):
Change settings (to authorise or
reject data sharing)
The system displays a screen to
confirm the authorisation of data
sharing after touching Change
settings.
Notice
When data sharing is switched off,
certain features may not operate
correctly.
Language (to change the system
language)
Done (to continue to the Home
page)
Help (to see more detailed
information)
The Infotainment system
automatically switches off when the
ignition is switched off and the driver's
door is opened. Press X instead, if
required.
Automatic switch-off
With the ignition off, if the
Infotainment system is switched on
with X, it will switch-off automatically
128 Infotainment system
a short period after the last user input.
Depending on Infotainment system,
automatic switch-off occurs after
approx. 5 to 20 minutes.
Pressing X again will allow the
Infotainment system to remain on for
a further 5 to 20 minutes, depending
on Infotainment system.
Setting the volume
Turn X / volume rotary knob.
Alternatively (with the steering
column controls), press ! or #.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink:
Depending on version, it is possible to
set various volume levels individually
(including audio players, traffic
announcements, navigation
instructions, phone calls and
ringtone).
From the Home page, touch
ÿSettings then Audio followed by
Sound.
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "Volume
settings" 3 136.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink:
To set various volume levels
individually (e.g. navigation
instructions, traffic announcements,
phone calls) from the Home page,
touch MENU then System followed by
Sound.
Refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "System
settings" 3 136.
Stored volume
When the Infotainment system is
switched off, the current volume is
stored.
Speed dependent volume
When speed dependent volume
(3 136) is activated, the volume is
adapted automatically to compensate
for road and wind noise.
Mute
To mute the current audio source
(depending on Infotainment system),
press X briefly or turn knob fully
anticlockwise.
Alternatively (with the steering
column controls), press @ or 8 or
press ! and # simultaneously.
Unmute
To unmute (depending on
Infotainment system), briefly press
X again or turn clockwise.
Alternatively (with the steering
column controls): Press @ again or
press ! and # simultaneously again.
Notice
When a traffic announcement is
broadcast, the system is
automatically unmuted.
For further information, refer to
"Radio data system" 3 146.
Display screen operation
Radio 15 USB
To move up/down in the display:
Turn OK.
To confirm actions: Press OK.
To cancel actions (and return to
previous menu): Press /.
Infotainment system 129
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Use the touchscreen for the following
displayed menus as described in
each section:
ñRadio
Refer to "Radio" section 3 141.
üMedia
Refer to "USB port" section
3 151.
yPhone
Refer to "Phone" section 3 190.
_Map
Refer to "Navigation" section
3 161.
ýNav
Refer to "Navigation" section
3 161.
ÿSettings
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Tone settings" 3 134, "Volume
settings" 3 136 and "System
settings" 3 136.
Notice
Depending on software version, the
menus available on the display
screen may differ from those listed
above.
When the Home page 7 is displayed,
it is possible to hide these menus from
the display (only clock and audio
system information may be shown) by
touching æ. Touch anywhere on the
screen to display these menus again.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
Use the touchscreen for the following
displayed menus as described in
each section.
On the Home page, touch MENU to
access the Main menu. The following
menus and controls are displayed:
Navigation
Refer to "Navigation" 3 161.
ª Multimedia:
Radio: Refer to "Radio"
3 141.
Media:
USB: Refer to "USB port"
3 151.
Auxiliary: Refer to "AUX
input" 3 149.
Bluetooth: Refer to
"Bluetooth music" 3 154.
Pictures: Refer to "Displaying
pictures" in the "External
devices" section 3 159.
Video: Refer to "Playing
movies" in the "External
devices" section 3 159.
Settings: Refer to
"Multimedia settings" in the
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "System
settings" section 3 136
130 Infotainment system
g Phone
Refer to "Phone" 3 190.
J Vehicle
Touch to open Eco Driving,
Onboard computer and Settings
menus.
Refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink)
"Modes of operation" below.
¯ Services
Touch to open Navigation
services and Settings menus.
Refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink)
"Modes of operation" below.
± System
Refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink)
"System settings" 3 136.
Notice
Depending on software version, the
menus on the display screen may
differ from the illustrations shown.
I/←: Move to previous page
j/→: Move to next page
↑: Display lists; Scroll up
↓: Display lists; Scroll down
<: Open pop-up menu
r: Return to previous menu
The display screen can also be
operated using the controls on the
Infotainment system fascia.
Notice
Depending on version, some
controls available on the
Infotainment system fascia do not
operate the features on the display
screen.
Notice
Depending on vehicle, operation of
the touchscreen may be restricted
during driving.
Modes of operation
Radio 15 USB:
To change the audio source to radio,
press RADIO.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink:
To access the radio menu at any time,
touch 7 followed by ñRadio.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink:
To access the radio menu from the
Home page, touch MENU then
Multimedia followed by Radio.
Detailed description of the radio
functions 3 141.
Audio players
To change the audio source to USB,
AUX, Bluetooth or iPod (where
applicable), touch MEDIA.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink: To access the
menu for connected auxiliary devices
(USB, iPod, BT (Bluetooth), Video or
AUX) at any time, touch 7 followed
by üMedia. Touch = in top left
corner and select auxiliary source.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink: To access the
menu for auxiliary devices (e.g. USB,
AUX input, Bluetooth) from the Home
page, touch MENU then Multimedia
followed by Media. Select auxiliary
source from the display list.
Radio 15 USB
Detailed descriptions of:
AUX input functions 3 149
USB port functions 3 151
Bluetooth music operation
3 154
Infotainment system 131
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Detailed descriptions of:
AUX input functions 3 149
USB port (including iPod)
functions 3 151
Bluetooth music operation
3 154
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
Detailed descriptions of:
AUX input functions 3 149
USB port functions 3 151
Bluetooth music operation
3 154
Navigation, Map (NAVI 50 IntelliLink,
NAVI 80 IntelliLink)
Detailed description of the navigation
system 3 161, Browse map 3 179.
Phone
Use the display options in the
following menus to connect mobile
phones, make telephone calls, create
contacts lists and adjust various
settings.
Detailed description of the handsfree
phone system functions 3 190.
Radio 15 USB
To access the Phone menu: Press
6 or TEL.
To access the phone settings menu:
Press TEL and select Phone settings.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
To access the Phone menu at any
time: Touch 7 followed by yPhone.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
To access the Phone menu from the
Home page, touch MENU followed by
Phone.
Vehicle information
To access the Vehicle menu from the
Home page, touch MENU followed by
Vehicle.
Depending on vehicle, the following
menus are displayed:
Eco Driving
Onboard computer
Settings
Eco Driving
The following features are available:
Trip report
Displays the following data from
the last journey:
Average fuel consumption,
average speed, total fuel
consumption, total distance, etc.
Within the trip report, Eco
scoring provides an overall score
out of 100 for driving economy.
Higher figures indicate better
driving economy. Ratings are
also given for average
environmental driving
performance (Acceleration),
gearchanging efficiency
(Gearbox) and brake control
(Anticipation).
To save journey data: Touch
'Save' then select the journey
type from the following list:
Home/work, holiday/vacation,
weekend, trip/tour, personal.
To reset journey data: Touch
'Reset'. Confirm or cancel with
'Yes' or 'No'.
Touch < to open pop-up menu
where trip reports can be
compared or to show/hide
reports after the completion of a
journey.
132 Infotainment system
My preferred trips
Displays changes in driving style
(when journey data has been
saved).
The 'Summary' tab for each
journey type (e.g. Home/work)
displays the following: Total route
distance, distance covered, date
of information update and
average driving economy rating
out of 100.
The 'Detailed report'/'Details' tab
displays journey record
information.
Eco-coaching
Displays advice for reducing fuel
consumption.
Scroll through the pages and
familiarise yourself with the
advice.
Onboard computer
Displays the following information
since the last reset:
start date of calculation
total distance
average speed
average fuel consumption
total fuel consumption
To reset onboard computer and
instrument panel trip computer
information, touch Reset then Yes to
confirm.
For further information, refer to "Trip
computer" in the Owner's Manual.
Settings
The following settings can be
changed:
Park assist
Volume:
Touch < or ] alongside the
volume bar to change volume
of the ultrasonic parking
assist system. For further
information, refer to "Parking
assist" in the Owner's
Manual.
Rear camera view settings
(available depending on
version):
Select to switch rear view
camera on/off, change
guidelines (static/dynamic)
and adjust image settings
(e.g. brightness, colour and
contrast).
Touch Done to save
changes. For further
information, refer to "Rear
view camera" in the Owner's
Manual.
< (pop-up menu):
Touch < in the Park Assist
menu or submenus followed
by Reset to the default
values to restore default
factory settings for all or
current park assist options.
Image settings (available
depending on version)
To adjust e.g., brightness, colour
and contrast.
The following options (depending
on vehicle) can also be adjusted:
Daytime running lights
(switch on/off).
Unlock the driver's door only
when opening the door
(switch on/off).
Easy access (switch on/off).
Infotainment system 133
Driving style indicator (fuel
economy gauge) (switch on/
off).
Eco score (switch on/off).
Show report after trip (switch
on/off).
After the settings are changed, touch
Done to confirm.
Favourites (NAVI 80 IntelliLink)
When the Home page is displayed,
touch f to view, add or delete
favourites for the following features:
Navigation 3 161.
ª Multimedia - refer to "Radio"
3 141.
g Phone 3 190.
¯ Services 3 164.
Navigation favourites
Select an empty slot in the display or
touch < (to open a pop-up menu),
then select Add Favourite.
Choose from the displayed list to add
a saved destination to the favourites.
For further information, refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Destination
input" in the "Navigation" section
3 174.
Multimedia favourites
Select an empty slot in the display or
touch < (to open a pop-up menu),
then Add Favourite.
Choose from the displayed list to add
a preset FM radio station to the
favourites.
Phone favourites
Select an empty slot in the display or
touch < (to open a pop-up menu),
then Add Favourite.
Choose from the displayed list to add
a phone contact to the favourites.
For further information, refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Phonebook" in
the "Phone" section 3 197.
Services favourites
Select an empty slot in the display or
touch < (to open a pop-up menu),
then Add Favourite.
Choose from the displayed list to add
a service item to the favourites.
Delete favourites
Touch < and select Remove all
Favourites or Remove a Favourite.
Then select a favourite from the
displayed list. A confirmation
message is displayed. Touch Delete
and confirm if prompted.
Additional features
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
Depending on version, rear camera
view settings are available.
Rear camera view settings
When the rear camera view is shown
on the display, touch ÿ to open the
settings menu.
The following settings can be
updated:
Switch the rear camera view
display Off/On.
Colours
Touch ]/< to adjust level.
Brightness
Touch ]/< to adjust level.
Contrast
Touch ]/< to adjust level.
134 Infotainment system
For further information, refer to "Rear
view camera" section in the vehicle
Owner's Manual.
Touch operation overview
The Infotainment system display
(NAVI 50, NAVI 80 IntelliLink) has a
touch-sensitive surface that allows
direct interaction with the displayed
menu controls.
Caution
Do not use pointed or hard items
like ballpoint pens, pencils or
similar for touchscreen operation.
Selecting or activating a screen
button or menu item
Touch a screen button or menu item.
A short touch activates the
selected item.
Touch and hold to save a
selected item.
The corresponding system function is
activated, a message is shown, or a
submenu with further options is
displayed.
Notice
In subsequent chapters, the
operating steps for selecting and
activating a screen button or menu
item via the touch screen will be
described as "...select <button
name>/<item name>".
Scrolling lists
If there are more items available than
presentable on the screen, the list
must be scrolled.
To scroll through a list of menu items,
touch S or R at the top and at the
bottom of the scroll bar.
Touch and hold S or R to fast scroll
through a list.
Notice
In subsequent chapters, the
operating steps for scrolling to a list
item via the touch screen will be
described as "...scroll to <item
name>".
Scrolling within a map
Touch anywhere on the map. The
cursor indicates the current position.
To scroll within the map, drag the map
in the required direction.
Notice
Constant pressure must be applied
and the finger must be moved at
constant speed.
Pop-up menus
To open pop-up menus with
additional options, touch <.
To exit a pop-up menu without
accessing any options or making any
changes, touch any part of the screen
outside the pop-up menu.
Tone settings
Radio 15 USB
In the audio settings menu, the tone
characteristics can be set.
Press SETUP to access the settings
menu.
Select Audio settings, then Sound
and turn OK until the desired setting
is selected from:
BASS (bass)
TREBLE (treble)
FADER (front/rear balance)
BALANCE (left/right balance)
Infotainment system 135
The display indicates the type of
setting followed by the adjustment
value.
Set the desired value by turning OK
and press the knob to confirm
selections.
To exit the audio settings menu,
press /.
Notice
If there is no activity, the system will
exit the audio settings menu
automatically.
Setting bass and treble
Select Bass or Treble.
Set the desired value by turning OK
and press the knob to confirm setting.
Depending on version,
BASS BOOST setting is also
available.
Setting the volume distribution
between right - left
Select Balance.
Set the desired value by turning OK
and press the knob to confirm setting.
Setting the volume distribution
between front - rear
Available depending on version.
Select Fader.
Set the desired value by turning OK
and press the knob to confirm setting.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
To access the settings menu at any
time, touch 7 followed by ÿSettings.
The following settings submenus are
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Audio
See "Audio settings" below.
Display
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"System settings" 3 136.
Connectivity
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"System settings" 3 136.
System
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"System settings" 3 136.
Audio settings
Select Audio to display the following
options:
Vol/Speed (Off/1/2/3/4/5)
Speed dependent volume control
- refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Volume settings" 3 136.
Loudness (On/Off)
Switch loudness on to increase
bass and treble levels.
BAL/FAD
Depending on version, touch l
to open the volume distribution
balance and tone settings
submenu.
On the left side of the display,
adjust the right/left balance with
k/l and the front/rear balance
with R/S (if available).
On the right side of the display,
adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
tone characteristics (between
-5 to +5) with k/l.
Touch OK to confirm changes.
Sound
Sound settings (where volumes
can be set individually for a list of
136 Infotainment system
audio types), refer to
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "Volume
settings" 3 136.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
Refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "System
settings" 3 136.
Volume settings
Radio 15 USB
Press SETUP to access the settings
menu.
Select Audio settings, then Speed
vol. and turn OK until the desired
setting is selected.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
To access the settings menu at any
time, touch 7 followed by ÿSettings.
The following settings submenus are
displayed:
Audio
See "Audio settings" below.
Display
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"System settings" 3 136.
Connectivity
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"System settings" 3 136.
System
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"System settings" 3 136.
Audio settings
Select Audio to display the following
options:
Vol/Speed (Off/1/2/3/4/5)
The volume increases when
vehicle speed increases, to
compensate for wind and road
noise.
Speed compensated volume can
be switched off or the degree of
volume adaptation can be set.
Loudness (On/Off)
Switch loudness on to increase
bass and treble levels.
BAL/FAD
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Tone settings" 3 134.
Sound
Touch l to open the audio
preferences submenu.
Depending on version, the
volume of different audio types
can be set independently, e.g.
audio, traffic announcements
(TA), navigation instructions,
handsfree phone system and
ringtone levels. Touch ]/< to
adjust volume of each audio type.
If required, touch Reset to return
all volumes to the factory
settings.
For other versions of the sound
submenu, refer to
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "Tone
settings" 3 134.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
Refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "System
settings" 3 136.
System settings
Radio 15 USB
Press SETUP and access the
settings menu by turning and
pressing OK.
Infotainment system 137
When system setting adjustments
have been made, press SETUP to
exit the menu and save changes. The
system also saves and exits
automatically after a delay.
Set clock
To set the system clock and the time
display format, select Clock. Select
the required setting by turning and
pressing OK.
Change system language
Change the display language by
accessing the Language menu.
Select a language from the list by
turning and pressing OK.
Restore default system settings
To restore system settings to their
default values, select Default
settings by turning and pressing OK.
Confirm modification when prompted
by pressing OK again.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
To access the settings menu at any
time, touch 7 followed by ÿSettings.
The following settings submenus are
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Audio:
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Tone settings" 3 134 and
"Volume settings" 3 136.
Display: See below.
Connectivity: See below.
System: See below.
Display
Select Display to display the following
options:
Brightness (Low/Mid/High)
Map mode (Auto/Day/Night)
Auto: Day and night mode
are changed automatically.
Day: The map screen is
always displayed with bright
colours.
Night: The map screen is
always displayed with dark
colours.
Background (Dark/Light)
Available depending on version.
Switch between a dark or light
display mode (available
depending on vehicle).
Parking assistance
Touch l to open a submenu:
Rear view camera (On/Off)
Obstacle detection
Touch l to open a submenu
for activation or deactivation
of the front parking sensors
and rear parking sensors.
Connectivity
Select Connectivity to display the
following options:
View Bluetooth device list
Search for Bluetooth device
External device authorization
Change passkey (for pairing of
Bluetooth devices with the
Infotainment system)
Smartphone
Available depending on version.
For help with activating and
operating voice controls - refer to
"Voice recognition" 3 187.
138 Infotainment system
For further information on Bluetooth
settings, refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Bluetooth music" 3 154 and
"Bluetooth connection" in the "Phone"
section 3 194.
System
Select System to display the following
options:
Language
Change display language and
voice instruction language for the
navigation system. Press OK to
confirm selection.
Clock/Units
The following settings can be
changed:
Time Format (12H/24H)
Nav Units (km/miles)
Temperature (°C/°F)
Time Setting
Press l to open the Time
set submenu containing the
following options:
Auto/Manual
If Auto time setting is
selected, the time is set
automatically by GPS.
If Manual time setting is
selected, adjust as
appropriate.
Notice
Navigation maps for the current
country must be installed on the
system to ensure the local time is
correct.
Factory settings
The following settings can be
reset to the factory default:
All
Phone - Smartphone
Navigation
Audio-Media-Radio-System
Navigation (On/Off)
System version (displays
Infotainment system software
version number)
When system setting adjustments
have been made, touch 7 (and select
another menu on the display) to exit
the settings menu and save changes.
The system also saves and exits
automatically after a delay.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
To access the system settings menu
from the Home page, touch MENU
followed by System.
The following settings submenus are
displayed:
Language
Display
Sound
Clock
Safety warnings
Home screen
Keyboards
Set units
Status & Information
Remove SD-card
Restore factory settings
Android Auto Settings
After system settings are changed,
touch Done to confirm.
Infotainment system 139
Language
To change Infotainment system
language then voice type (depending
on version).
Display
The following settings are displayed:
Daytime brightness: Change
screen brightness to suit external
light levels (daylight).
During low external light levels,
the display screen is easier to
view when the display is not too
bright.
Nighttime brightness/Night
brightness: Change screen
brightness to suit external light
levels (night light).
During low external light levels,
the display screen is easier to
view when the display is not too
bright.
Automatic day/night mode/
Change to night colours: To
activate automatic switching
between daytime/night
brightness.
Night mode is activated during
low external light levels and when
the headlights are switched on.
Force night mode/Use night
colours: To activate night mode.
Sound
The following settings submenus are
displayed:
Sound levels: To change volume
and sounds for the main volume,
handsfree phone system, phone
ringtone, navigation instructions,
system/computer voice, traffic
information, and park assist
(depending on version).
Alerts: To adjust alert volume,
and switch on/off alerts when
display screen is switched off.
Speed sensitivity volume: To set
volume adjustment based on
vehicle speed.
Voice output settings: Adjust
types of information to be given
by the Infotainment system voice
(e.g. "Read aloud motorway lane
instructions").
Voice: Change the voice used by
the Infotainment system (if
available).
Clock
To set the system clock and the time
display format.
Keeping the automatic time
adjustment setting switched on is
recommended.
Safety warnings
To switch on/off various alerts
provided by the Infotainment system
(e.g. "Warn when driving faster than
allowed"). Check appropriate boxes
to switch on.
Home screen
To change the home page
configuration.
Select from list of options to see a
preview of each home page layout.
140 Infotainment system
Keyboards
To change first the alphabet type (e.g.
Latin, Greek) then the keyboard type
(e.g. QWERTY, ABCD).
Set units
To change the units of measurement,
for e.g. distance (km/miles), co-
ordinates (degrees, minutes,
seconds), temperature (℃, ℉) and
barometric units (if available).
Status & Information
To display system information, e.g.
version, GPS status, network status,
licences and copyright information.
Remove SD-card
To eject the SD card safely.
Restore factory settings
To delete all Infotainment system
information. Follow the instructions
on the display.
Notice
Afterwards, the Infotainment system
will restart in English by default. If
necessary, select Language in the
System menu to change language.
Android Auto Settings
To set the preferences for the
“Android Auto™” application and
access the instruction tutorial for the
application on the Infotainment
system.
Multimedia settings
To access the Multimedia settings
menu from the Home page, touch
MENU then Multimedia, followed by
Settings.
The following settings submenus are
displayed:
Sound
Radio
Media
Pictures
Video
After settings have been changed,
touch Done to confirm.
Sound
The following sound settings can be
updated:
'Spatialisation':
Set the sound distribution in the
vehicle.
'Bass Treble':
Set the sound option, e.g.
'Neutral' or 'Pop-rock', 'Classical',
'Jazz' (if available). Select
'Manual' to manually set the
treble and bass levels.
Press Done to save changes.
'AGC Arkamys':
Equalise sound volume between
two audio tracks.
'Bass Boost Arkamys':
Switch bass amplification on/off.
Radio
The following radio settings can be
updated:
switch searching for Alternative
Frequencies (AF) on/off
switch i-traffic (Traffic program
information) on/off
switch programme type (PTY)
on/off
switch simulcast on/off
display i-announcement
information (e.g. Area weather
information, Event information)
update list of saved radio stations
Infotainment system 141
For further information, refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Radio" 3 141.
Media
The following media settings can be
updated:
switch Repeat (a track) on/off
switch Shuffle on/off
switch Display album cover on/off
configure Manage Bluetooth
devices
For further information, refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Bluetooth
music" 3 154.
Pictures
The following photo settings can be
updated:
set display time for photos during
a slideshow ("Slide show delay")
switch from normal to full screen
display ("Default view")
For further information, refer to
"Displaying pictures" 3 159.
Video
The following video settings can be
updated:
set display type for videos (if
available)
switch from normal to full screen
display
For further information, refer to
"Playing movies" 3 159.
Radio
Usage
Radio reception
Radio reception may be disrupted by
static, noise, distortion or loss of
reception due to:
changes in distance from the
transmitter
multi-path reception due to
reflection
shadowing
Radio 15 USB - Controls
The most important buttons for
control of the radio are:
RADIO: Activate radio, change
waveband
2 3: Station search
OK: Change frequency
Station buttons 1...6: Preset
station buttons
142 Infotainment system
SETUP: System settings,
automatic station storing
TEXT: Display radio text
information
Activating the radio
Press RADIO to switch the audio
source to radio.
The station previously selected will be
received.
Selecting the waveband
Press RADIO repeatedly to switch
between the available wavebands
(e.g. FM1, FM2, AM).
The station previously selected in that
waveband will be received.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink - Controls
Use the touchscreen to operate the
radio.
The main controls are:
FM/AM/DAB (depending on
version): Switch between FM and
AM wavebands.
*/': Start automatic search
for next/previous radio station.
;/:: Change to next/previous
frequency in increments of 0.5.
R/S: Scroll through a list of
stations.
Activating the radio
To activate the radio at any time,
touch 7 followed by ñRadio. The
station previously selected will be
received.
The following submenus are
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Main: Radio station/frequency is
displayed.
List: Displays an alphabetical list
of available radio stations
(maximum 50 stations).
Notice
Radio stations without RDS: Only
the frequency is displayed. These
stations appear at the end of the list.
Presets: Displays stored
favourite radio stations.
Options:
The following settings can be
changed, depending on selected
waveband:
RDS (On/Off)
TA (On/Off)
Region (On/Off)
News (On/Off)
AM (On/Off)
Update List (Start)
For further information, refer to
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "Radio data
system (RDS)" 3 146.
Selecting the waveband
Touch = alongside FM/AM/DAB (if
available) in the top left corner of the
display and select FM, AM or DAB
waveband.
The station previously selected in that
waveband will be received.
Notice
AM waveband can be switched off
via the Options menu.
Refer to "Digital audio broadcasting"
3 148.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink - Controls
Use the touchscreen to operate the
radio.
Infotainment system 143
The main controls are:
FM/AM/DR: Switch between FM,
AM and DR (digital radio)
wavebands.
Y/Z: Start automatic search for
next/previous radio station.
</>: Change to next/previous
frequency in increments.
↑/↓: Scroll through a list of
stations.
Activating the radio
To access the Radio from the Home
page, touch MENU then Multimedia,
followed by Radio.
The following modes are available:
Preset:
Displays stored favourite radio
stations.
List:
Displays an alphabetical list of
available radio stations
(maximum 50 stations).
Notice
Radio stations without RDS: Only
the frequency is displayed. These
stations appear at the end of the list.
Frequency:
Search manually or automatically
by scanning the selected range
of frequencies.
Selecting the waveband
Touch FM/AM/DR tab in top left
corner of the display to switch
between wavebands.
The station previously selected in that
waveband will be received.
Station search
Automatic station search
Radio 15 USB
Briefly press 2 or 3 to search for
the next receivable station in the
current waveband.
If no station is found, automatic
searching continues until 2 or 3 is
pressed again.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Touch * or ' to search for the
next receivable station in the current
waveband.
If no station is found, automatic
searching continues until * or '
is touched again.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
Touch Y or Z to search for the next
receivable station in the current
waveband.
If no station is found, automatic
searching continues until Y or Z is
touched again.
Manual station search
Radio 15 USB
Select the desired waveband then
press and hold 2 or 3 to scan the
selected waveband.
Release the button when close to the
required frequency. An automatic
search is then made for the next
receivable station and it is played
automatically.
Turn OK to change the frequency in
increments.
144 Infotainment system
Stored station search
This allows to recall radio stations that
have previously been stored.
To store a station, select the desired
waveband and station then press
station button 1...6 until an audible
signal sounds, confirming that the
station has been stored to the
appropriate station button. Six
stations per waveband can be stored.
Recalling a stored station
To recall a station, select the desired
waveband then briefly press station
button 1...6.
Search radio station name (FM only)
Select the FM waveband then
highlight the station name in the
display using _ or 6.
Press 1 or 4 repeatedly to manually
search for the required station name.
The frequency may be displayed
instead if the station name is
unavailable.
The alphabetical list contains up to
60 FM radio stations with the best
reception. This list can be updated at
any time. Autostore lists 3 145.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Select the desired waveband then
touch ; or : to change to next/
previous frequency in increments of
0.5.
Stored station search
This allows to recall radio stations that
have previously been stored.
To store a station, select the desired
waveband and station then touch
Presets to display the stored
favourites.
Touch and hold on the desired
location. The frequency or name of
the radio station appears on the
favourite location, confirming that the
station has been stored (i indicates
the currently received station).
Notice
Twelve stations per waveband can
be stored.
Recalling a stored station
To recall a station, select the desired
waveband then touch Presets to
display the stored favourites, then
select the desired favourite radio
station.
Touch k/l to move to the previous/
next page of favourites.
Search radio station name (FM and
DAB only)
Select waveband FM or DAB (if
available) then touch List to display
an alphabetical list of available radio
stations.
Touch S or R to manually search for
the required station name. The
frequency may be displayed instead
if the station name is unavailable.
Select a list item to receive the
selected station (i indicates the
currently received station).
The alphabetical list contains up to 50
radio stations with the best reception.
This list can be updated at any time,
refer to "Autostore lists" 3 145.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
Select the desired waveband then
touch < or > to change to next/
previous frequency in increments.
Stored station search
This allows to recall radio stations that
have previously been stored.
Infotainment system 145
To store a station, select the desired
waveband and station then touch
Preset to display the stored
favourites.
Touch and hold on the desired
location until a beep is heard. The
frequency or name of the radio station
appears on the favourite location,
confirming that the station has been
stored. Six stations per waveband
can be stored.
Alternatively, select the desired
waveband and station, then select
Frequency or List. Touch < to open a
pop-up menu, then select Save as
preset. Touch and hold on the desired
location until a beep is heard.
Recalling a stored station
To recall a station, select the desired
waveband then touch Preset to
display the stored favourites, then
select the desired favourite radio
station.
Search radio station name (FM only)
Select the FM waveband then touch
List to display an alphabetical list of
available radio stations.
Touch ↑ or ↓ to manually search for
the required station name. The
frequency may be displayed instead
if the station name is unavailable.
The alphabetical list contains up to
50 radio stations with the best
reception. This list can be updated at
any time, refer to "Autostore lists"
3 145.
Autostore lists
The stations with the best reception in
a waveband can be searched for and
stored automatically via the autostore
function.
Automatic station storing
Radio 15 USB
The FM waveband has an autostore
list (AST), on which six stations can
be stored.
While listening to the radio, press and
hold RADIO: The six stations with the
strongest reception will be
automatically stored on AST.
Notice
Due to signal strength, it is possible
that less than six stations will be
stored.
Recalling a station
Radio 15 USB
Select the desired waveband, then
briefly press station button 1...6 to
recall a stored station.
To recall a station on the autostore list
(AST), while listening to the radio
briefly press SETUP to activate AST
mode. The station previously
selected will be received. Briefly
press station button 1...6 to recall
another stored station on the
autostore list.
Updating stations list manually
Stations can also be stored manually
in the autostore list.
Notice
Only available with
NAVI 50 IntelliLink,
NAVI 80 IntelliLink.
146 Infotainment system
To update the list of stations and
obtain the most recent ones, activate
the system update manually.
Depending on Infotainment system,
the sound may be muted during a
manual update.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Touch Options, scroll down to
Update List then select Start;
Updating ... appears on the display
until the update is complete.
Notice
If DAB is available, it is
recommended to update the DAB
stations list manually when the
system is switched on.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
From the Home page, touch MENU
then Multimedia, followed by
Settings. Select Radio and scroll
down to Update radio list.
Alternatively (depending on version),
select Multimedia followed by Radio,
and choose any the following modes:
Preset
List
Frequency
Then touch < to open a pop-up menu,
and select Update radio list.
Radio data system (RDS)
RDS is an FM station service that
helps to find the desired station and
ensures its fault-free reception.
Advantages of RDS
The programme name of the
chosen station appears on the
display screen instead of its
frequency.
During an automatic station
search, the Infotainment system
tunes into RDS stations only.
The Infotainment system always
tunes into the best receivable
broadcasting frequency of the
chosen station, by means of AF
(Alternative Frequency).
Radio 15 USB
Configuring RDS
Press SETUP and turn OK to access
the RDS menu. Press knob to select.
Turn the rotary knob to select RDS
SETUP.
Switching RDS on and off
Press Options on the display screen.
The following settings can be
changed:
Switch on/off RDS-AF by pressing
OK. AF is shown on the display
screen when RDS is active.
Text information (Radio text)
Certain FM radio stations issue text
information relating to the broadcast
program (e.g. song name).
Press SETUP and turn OK to access
the Radio texts menu.
Turn the rotary knob to select Radio
and press the knob to see this
information.
Infotainment system 147
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Configuring RDS
Select Options. The following settings
can be changed:
RDS (On/Off)
Switch off if not required.
TA (On/Off)
See below.
Region/AF (On/Off)
See below.
News (On/Off)
See below.
AM (On/Off)
Switch off if not required.
Update List (Start)
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Autostore lists" 3 145.
TA (Traffic announcements)
If TA is switched on:
Traffic announcements from
certain FM radio stations (and
DAB stations, if available) are
broadcast automatically.
Radio and auxiliary audio source
playback is interrupted for the
duration of the traffic
announcement.
Notice
Automatic broadcasting of traffic
announcements is deactivated if
waveband is set to AM.
Region/AF
If the RDS function is activated and
Region/AF is switched on:
The frequency of certain FM radio
stations may change depending on
the geographical area.
News
If News is switched on:
News announcements from
certain FM radio stations (and
DAB stations, if available) are
broadcast automatically.
Radio and auxiliary audio source
playback is interrupted for the
duration of the traffic
announcement.
Text information (Radio text)
Certain FM radio stations (and DAB
stations, if available) issue text
information relating to the broadcast
program (e.g. song name).
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
Configuring RDS
To access the Radio settings menu
from the Home page, select MENU
then Multimedia, followed by
Settings then Radio.
Depending on version, touch < to
open a pop-up menu, and access the
'Radio settings' option.
148 Infotainment system
The following radio settings can be
updated:
switch searching for Alternative
Frequencies (AF) on/off
switch i-traffic (Traffic program
information) on/off
switch programme type (PTY)
on/off
switch simulcast on/off
display i-announcement
information (e.g. Area weather
information, Event information)
update list of saved radio stations
Alternative Frequency (AF)
Switch on the RDS-AF function to
always tune into the best receivable
broadcasting frequency of the chosen
station.
i-traffic (Traffic program information)
Radio traffic service stations are FM
RDS stations that broadcast traffic
news.
Switch on I-Traffic to automatically
receive traffic bulletins when they are
broadcast.
Programme type search (PTY)
Switch on PTY to display the type of
programme (e.g. news, sport)
currently being broadcast
Update radio list
Refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink)
"Autostore lists" 3 145.
Simulcast
Switch on the simulcast function to
automatically change from a DR
(digital radio) station to the same
station on the FM waveband in the
event of a loss of reception.
i-announcement
Select to display information such as
weather or events in the vicinity.
Text information (Radio text)
Certain FM radio stations issue text
information relating to the broadcast
program (e.g. song name).
To check for text information, from
any radio mode (e.g. Preset, List,
Frequency) touch < to open a pop-up
menu, and access the text
information option, by selecting e.g.
"Show radio text".
Digital audio broadcasting
Digital audio broadcasting (DAB) is
an innovative and universal
broadcast system.
General information
DAB stations are indicated by the
programme name instead of the
broadcasting frequency.
With DAB, several radio
programmes (services) can be
broadcast on a single frequency
(ensemble).
Besides high-quality digital audio
services, DAB is also able to
transmit programme-associated
data and a multitude of other data
services including travel and
traffic information.
As long as a given DAB receiver
can pick up the signal sent out by
a broadcasting station (even if
the signal is very weak), sound
reproduction is ensured.
There is no fading (weakening of
the sound) that is typical of AM or
FM reception. The DAB signal is
reproduced at a constant volume.
Infotainment system 149
Interference caused by stations
that are on nearby frequencies (a
phenomenon that is typical of AM
and FM reception) does not
occur with DAB.
If the DAB signal is too weak to
be picked up by the receiver, the
system switches over to the
same programme on another
DAB or FM station.
If the DAB signal is reflected by
natural obstacles or buildings,
the reception quality of DAB is
improved, whereas AM or FM
reception is considerably
impaired in such cases.
When DAB reception is enabled,
the FM tuner of the Infotainment
system remains active in the
background and continually
searches for the best receivable
FM stations.
AUX input
General information
Depending on version, in the
Infotainment unit (or on the
instrument panel) there is an AUX
socket for the connection of external
audio sources.
Notice
The socket must always be kept
clean and dry.
It is possible, for example, to connect
a portable CD player with a 3.5 mm
jack plug to the AUX input.
Usage
An audio source that is connected to
the AUX input can only be operated
via the controls on the audio source,
i.e. not via the Infotainment system.
Only select a track directly on the
audio source when the vehicle is
stationary.
Caution
Before connecting or
disconnecting an auxiliary device,
e.g. a portable CD player, switch
off the player and the Infotainment
system, to avoid sound quality
issues and possible damage to the
equipment.
Upon connection via the jack plug, the
system detects the audio source
automatically. Depending on the
recording volume, there may be a
delay before the audio source is
heard.
The artist or track name are not
shown on the display screen.
150 Infotainment system
Notice
Ensure the auxiliary device is
securely stowed during driving.
Vehicle occupants could be injured
by objects being thrown around in
the event of hard braking, a sudden
change in direction or an accident.
Radio 15 USB
Press MEDIA to change the audio
source to AUX mode, then switch on
the auxiliary device. AUX appears on
the display screen.
AUX settings
Press SETUP to access the settings
menu.
Select AUX IN and turn OK until the
desired setting is selected from:
HI (300 mV)
MID (600 mV)
LO (1200 mV)
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
To access the media menu at any
time, touch 7 followed by t/
üMEDIA.
To switch between auxiliary sources,
touch S in top left corner. The
following options are available:
USB: Refer to
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "USB port"
3 151.
iPod: Refer to
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "USB port"
3 151.
BT: Refer to
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "Bluetooth
music" 3 154.
Video: Refer to
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "Video"
3 159.
AUX: Select to change the audio
source to AUX mode, then switch
on the auxiliary device.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
Change the audio source to AUX
mode to playback content from a
connected auxiliary device.
To access the media menu from the
Home page, touch MENU then
Multimedia, followed by Media.
Touch < to open a pop-up menu
(depending on version). The following
options are available:
Auxiliary socket: Change the
audio source to AUX mode, then
switch on the auxiliary device.
USB: Refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "USB port"
3 151.
Bluetooth connection: Refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Bluetooth
music" 3 154
Infotainment system 151
USB port
General information
Depending on version, in the
Infotainment unit (or on the
instrument panel) there is a USB
socket M for the connection of external
audio sources.
Notice
The socket must always be kept
clean and dry.
An MP3 player, USB drive, iPod or
smartphone can be connected to the
USB port.
These devices are operated via the
controls and menus of the
Infotainment system.
Important information
MP3 player and USB drives
The MP3 players and USB drives
connected must comply with the
USB Mass Storage Class
specification (USB MSC).
Only MP3 players and USB
drives with a sector size of
512 Bytes and a cluster size
smaller or equal to 32 kBytes in
the FAT32 file system are
supported.
Hard disk drives (HDD) are not
supported.
The following restrictions apply
for the data stored on an MP3
Player or USB device:
Only MP3 files, WMA and
(depending on Infotainment
system) ACC files can be read.
WAV files and all other
compressed files cannot be
played.
Maximum folder structure depth:
eleven levels.
Maximum number of files that
can be saved: 1000 files.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink: Minimum
recommended storage capacity
of USB drive is 4 GB.
Recommended maximum
storage capacity is 32 GB.
WMA files with Digital Rights
Management (DRM) from online
music shops may not play
correctly or not at all.
Applicable playlist
extensions: .m3u, .pls.
Playlist entries must be in the
form of relative paths.
Playing saved audio files
Once connected, it is only possible to
use the controls and menus of the
Infotainment system to operate the
audio device.
152 Infotainment system
Radio 15 USB
MP3 player / iPod / USB drives
The system detects the audio device
when a USB device is connected and
the current track is displayed
automatically.
When a new audio device is
connected, the first track in the first
folder is played automatically. When
reconnecting the device, the
previously played track is resumed.
Depending on the audio device
connected, select a folder (MP3
player, USB drive) or a playlist
(portable digital music player).
Selecting a track
To select tracks directly (and change
folders), first access the audio device
menu structure by pressing OK
during playback. Select tracks and
change folders by turning and
pressing the knob.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
MP3 player / USB drives / iPod
The system detects the audio device
when a USB device is connected and
the current track is displayed
automatically. The device type (MP3
player/USB drive or iPod) is also
recognised and the relevant audio
source mode (USB or iPod) is
selected automatically.
When the t/üMEDIA menu is
active, the following submenus are
available:
Main/Player
List
Options
To switch between audio sources,
touch S in top left corner. The
following options are available:
USB: Select to change the audio
source to USB mode.
Notice
During use, the battery of a
connected USB device is charged or
maintained.
iPod: Select to change the audio
source to iPod mode.
BT: Refer to
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "Playing
music via Bluetooth" - 3 154.
AUX: Refer to
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "Aux input
usage" 3 149.
Main/Player
Select to display the current track. In
this display screen, the following
options are available:
l (skip to previous track, press
and hold to fast rewind)
=/l (pause/play)
m (skip to next track, press and
hold to fast forward)
List
Displays a list of the tracks in the
current album/folder. Select a
particular track to play it directly.
Infotainment system 153
Notice
By default, albums are listed in
alphabetical order.
If a USB drive is connected, all the
folders will be at the same level on
the tree structure.
To return to the previous level on the
folder tree structure, touch ò.
Options
Select to display the following
options:
Repeat (Off/Track/Folder/All)
Shuffle (On/Off)
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
MP3 player / USB drives
Change the audio source to USB
mode to playback files from a
connected USB device.
To access the media menu from the
Home page, select MENU then
Multimedia, followed by Media.
Touch < to open a pop-up menu
(depending on version). The following
options are available:
USB: Change the audio source to
USB mode.
Auxiliary socket: Refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "AUX input"
3 149.
Bluetooth connection: Refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Playing
music via Bluetooth" 3 154.
SD card
When USB mode is selected, the
display includes the following options:
t or v: Move to previous/next
track.
=: Pause track.
Scroll bar for time elapsed: Scroll
through tracks.
New selection: Choose another
track from the connected audio
source.
Current playlist: Access the
current playback list.
r: Return to previous screen.
<: Open pop-up menu; To
change the audio source or
access the track settings (e.g.
switch on/off shuffle or repeat,
show current track details, and
access sound settings).
Disconnecting from USB socket
Playback is stopped immediately
when the audio device is withdrawn
from the USB socket.
154 Infotainment system
Bluetooth music
General information
Bluetooth-enabled auxiliary audio
sources (e.g. music mobile phones,
MP3 players etc.) can be connected
wirelessly to the Infotainment system.
Important information
The Infotainment system only
connects to Bluetooth devices
that support A2DP (Advanced
Audio Distribution Profile).
Connection issues may arise with
early versions.
The Bluetooth device must
support AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile)
version 1.0 or higher. If the
device does not support AVRCP,
only the volume can be controlled
via the Infotainment system.
Before connecting the Bluetooth
device to the Infotainment
system, become acquainted with
its operating instructions for
Bluetooth functions.
Operation
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be
met, in order to control a Bluetooth-
enabled audio device via the
Infotainment system:
The Bluetooth function of the
Infotainment system must be
activated.
Refer to "Bluetooth connection"
in the "Phone" section 3 194.
The Bluetooth function of the
Bluetooth-enabled auxiliary
audio source must be activated
(see audio device operating
instructions).
Dependent upon the audio
source, it may be required to set
that device to "visible" (see audio
device operating instructions).
The audio source must be paired
and connected to the
Infotainment system.
Radio 15 USB
Bluetooth connection
A connection must be set up between
the audio device and the Infotainment
system via Bluetooth, i.e. the device
must be paired to the vehicle before
using it.
Refer to "Bluetooth connection" in the
"Phone" section 3 194.
A maximum of five audio devices
can be paired and saved in the
device list, but only one can be
connected at a time.
If the device has both audio
player and telephone functions,
both functions will be paired.
Pairing a mobile phone 3 192.
Phone functions will remain
active while the audio player is in
use, and audio playback will be
suspended during phone use.
Pairing an auxiliary audio device to
the Infotainment system
To pair the audio device, press TEL
and select Pair device by turning and
pressing OK. The Ready to Pair
screen is displayed.
Infotainment system 155
Then, on the audio device, search for
Bluetooth equipment in the vicinity of
the device.
Select My Radio (i.e. the name of the
system) from the list on the audio
device, then, if applicable, on the
audio device keypad enter the pairing
code shown on the Infotainment
system display screen.
Notice
If the audio device does not have a
screen, enter the default pairing
code on the device, then on the
Infotainment system. Refer to the
operating instructions for this default
audio device pairing code, usually
0000. Depending on the device, the
pairing code may need to be entered
in reverse order, i.e. on the
Infotainment system first.
If pairing fails, the system returns to
the previous menu and a
corresponding message is displayed.
Repeat procedure if necessary.
When pairing is completed, a
confirmation message followed by the
name of the paired audio device is
shown on the Infotainment system
display screen.
Notice
When a Bluetooth connection is
active, controlling the audio device
via the Infotainment system will
discharge the audio device battery
more rapidly.
Connecting an audio device
Audio devices are automatically
connected to the Infotainment system
after the pairing procedure is
completed.
To connect any audio device that has
been paired, or to connect to a
different paired audio device than the
current one, press TEL and select the
Select Device menu. The device list
shows the audio devices already
paired.
Select the desired device from the list
and confirm by pressing OK. A
display message confirms
connection.
Disconnecting an audio device
To disconnect an audio device from
the Infotainment system, press TEL
(or SETUP) and select Bluetooth
connection. Select the desired device
from the device list then select
Disconnect the device by turning and
pressing OK. A display message
confirms disconnection.
Switching off the audio device or
deactivating the Bluetooth function on
the audio device also disconnects the
device from the Infotainment system.
Unpairing an auxiliary audio device
from the Infotainment system
If the list of paired audio devices is full,
a new device can only be paired if an
existing device is unpaired.
To unpair, i.e. to delete an audio
device from the system memory,
press TEL and select Delete device.
Select the desired audio device from
the list and press OK to confirm
deletion when prompted.
Operation via Infotainment system
When paired and connected
wirelessly, audio playback begins
automatically.
The audio device can then be
operated via the Infotainment system
function buttons, rotary knobs and
display menus.
156 Infotainment system
The range of accessible functions
that can be operated via the
Infotainment system depends on the
type of audio player.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Bluetooth connection
A connection must be set up between
the audio device and the Infotainment
system via Bluetooth, i.e. the device
must be paired to the vehicle before
using it.
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Bluetooth connection" in the "Phone"
section 3 194.
A maximum of five audio devices
can be paired and saved in the
device list, but only one can be
connected at a time (depending
on version, up to eight audio
devices may be paired).
If the device has both audio
player and telephone functions,
both functions will be paired.
Pairing a mobile phone 3 192.
Phone functions will remain
active while the audio player is in
use, and audio playback will be
suspended during phone use.
Pairing an auxiliary audio device to
the Infotainment system
To pair the audio device, touch 7
followed by ÿSettings.
Select Connectivity then either
Search for Bluetooth device or
External device authorization.
On the audio device, search for
Bluetooth equipment in the vicinity of
the device.
Select the name of the Infotainment
system (e.g. Media Nav Evolution)
from the list on the audio device, then
(if required), on the audio device
keypad, enter the pairing code shown
on the Infotainment system display
screen.
The default pairing code is 0000. To
change this pairing code before the
pairing procedure is started, select
Change passkey to update.
Notice
If the audio device does not have a
screen, enter the default pairing
code on the device, then on the
Infotainment system. Refer to the
operating instructions for this default
audio device pairing code, usually
0000. Depending on the device, the
pairing code may need to be entered
in reverse order, i.e. on the
Infotainment system first.
If pairing fails, repeat procedure if
necessary.
Notice
When a Bluetooth connection is
active, controlling the audio device
via the Infotainment system will
discharge the audio device battery
more rapidly.
Connecting an audio device
Audio devices are automatically
connected to the Infotainment system
after the pairing procedure is
completed.
Infotainment system 157
To change the audio device
connected, touch 7 followed by
ÿSettings.
Then select Connectivity followed by
View Bluetooth device list. The device
list shows the audio devices already
paired.
Select the desired audio device from
the list and confirm by touching OK.
Disconnecting an audio device
Switching off the audio device or
deactivating the Bluetooth function on
the audio device disconnects the
device from the Infotainment system.
Unpairing an auxiliary audio device
from the Infotainment system
If the list of paired audio devices is full,
a new device can only be paired if an
existing device is unpaired.
To unpair, i.e. to delete an audio
device from the system memory,
touch 7 followed by ÿSettings.
Select Connectivity then View
Bluetooth device list.
Select the desired audio device from
the list, then touch ë to delete the
device. If required, delete all devices
in the list by selecting Options
followed by Delete all. Confirm with
OK.
Operation via Infotainment system
When paired and connected
wirelessly, audio playback begins
automatically.
The audio device can then be
operated via the Infotainment system
display options.
The range of accessible functions
that can be operated via the
Infotainment system depends on the
type of audio player.
The operation of the audio device
when connected wirelessly is similar
to the operations for playing saved
audio files via the USB socket. Refer
to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "Playing music
via USB socket" in the "USB port"
section 3 151.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
Bluetooth connection
A connection must be set up between
the audio device and the Infotainment
system via Bluetooth, i.e. the device
must be paired to the vehicle before
using it.
There is a maximum number of
audio devices that can be paired
and saved in the device list, but
only one can be connected at a
time.
If the device has both audio
player and telephone functions,
both functions will be paired.
Pairing a mobile phone 3 192.
Phone functions will remain
active while the audio player is in
use, and audio playback will be
suspended during phone use.
Pairing an auxiliary audio device to
the Infotainment system
From the Home page, touch MENU
then Multimedia, followed by
Settings.
158 Infotainment system
Select Media to access the media
settings menu, then select the
"Manage Bluetooth
devices"/"Configure Bluetooth
connection" option.
The pairing procedure is similar to
pairing a mobile phone. Refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Bluetooth
connection" in the "Phone" section
3 194.
Connecting an audio device
Audio devices are automatically
connected to the Infotainment system
after the pairing procedure is
completed.
At any time, change the audio source
to Bluetooth mode to playback files
from a connected Bluetooth device.
From the Home page, select MENU
then Multimedia, followed by Media.
Depending on version, touch < (to
open a pop-up menu). Select
Bluetooth/Bluetooth connection to
change the audio source to
Bluetooth.
Disconnecting an audio device
Switching off the audio device or
deactivating the Bluetooth function on
the audio device disconnects the
device from the Infotainment system.
Unpairing an auxiliary audio device
from the Infotainment system
To unpair, i.e. to delete a device from
the system memory:
From the Home page, touch MENU
then Multimedia, followed by
Settings.
Select Media to access the media
settings menu, then select the
"Manage Bluetooth
devices"/"Configure Bluetooth
connection" option.
Press < to open a pop-up menu. The
following options are available:
Disable Bluetooth: Select to
deactivate the Bluetooth function
on the Infotainment system.
Set TomTom visible: Select to
make the Infotainment system
"visible" to other Bluetooth
devices, allowing them to be
paired to the system.
Disconnect all devices: Select to
disconnect all currently
connected devices from the
Infotainment system without
deleting/unpairing them.
Delete device(s): Select to unpair
a device from the Infotainment
system.
The unpairing procedure is similar to
unpairing a mobile phone. Refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Bluetooth
connection" in the "Phone" section
3 194.
Operation via Infotainment system
When paired and connected
wirelessly, audio playback may begin
automatically.
The audio device can then be
operated via the Infotainment system
display options.
The range of accessible functions
that can be operated via the
Infotainment system depends on the
type of audio player.
The operation of the audio device
when connected wirelessly is similar
to the operations for playing saved
audio files via the USB socket. Refer
160 Infotainment system
The video screen includes the
following options:
Scroll bar for time elapsed: Scroll
through videos.
%: Play video from the
beginning / play previous video /
fast rewind.
&: Pause video.
/: Play next video / fast forward.
(: Adjust the brightness. To
continue the video playback,
touch the screen.
): View the video in full screen.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
To access the "Videos" menu from
the Home page, touch MENU and
then Multimedia, followed by Video.
Notice
Playback is only possible when the
vehicle is stationary.
Select the connected source device
(e.g. USB) to access individual or all
compatible videos on the device.
The display includes the following
options:
t or v: Move to previous/next
video.
=: Pause video.
Scroll bar for time elapsed: Scroll
through videos.
New selection: Choose another
video from the connected source
device.
Full screen: Switch to full screen
display.
r: Return to previous screen.
<: Open pop-up menu; To
change the source device or
access the video settings.
During video playback, the pop-
up menu also allows to return to
the list of videos.
Video settings - refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "System
settings" 3 136.
Using smartphone
applications
The phone projection applications
Apple CarPlay™ and Android™ Auto
display selected apps from your
smartphone on the display screen
and allow their operation directly via
the Infotainment controls.
Check with the device's manufacturer
if this function is compatible with your
smartphone and if this application is
available in the country you are in.
Android Auto is available for
NAVI 50 IntelliLink and
NAVI 80 IntelliLink. Apple CarPlay is
available for NAVI 50 IntelliLink.
Notice
While using navigation and music
applications via phone projection,
similar applications integrated in the
Infotainment system will be
replaced.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Preparing the smartphone
Android phone: Download the
Android Auto app to the smartphone
from the Google Play™ Store.
Infotainment system 161
iPhone: Make sure Siri® is activated
on the smartphone.
Connecting the mobile phone
Connect the smartphone to the USB
port 3 151.
Starting phone projection
Android phone: Touch the Android
Auto button on the main screen of the
Infotainment system and accept the
requests on the smartphone in order
to use the Android Auto app.
iPhone: Touch the CarPlay button on
the main screen of the Infotainment
system.
The phone projection screen
displayed depends on the
smartphone and software version.
To access a tutorial on smartphone
connectivity, go to the Settings menu,
select Connectivity and scroll through
the list.
Returning to the home screen
Touch the home button.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
Preparing the smartphone
Download the Android Auto app to the
smartphone from the Google Play™
Store.
Activating phone projection
1. Connect the smartphone to the
USB port 3 151.
2. Accept the request on the display
screen.
3. Touch û on the display screen
and accept the confidentiality
clauses. As a first time user look
out for system requests on the
mobile device to continue.
4. Touch û again.
Phone projection can now be used.
Using phone projection
Touch û on the display screen to
access the Android Auto menu of
the connected smartphone.
Press and hold 5 on the steering
column to access voice controls.
Returning to the display screen
Press ;.
Navigation
General information
9Warning
The navigation system is an aid to
your navigational abilities and
does not replace them. Drive with
due care and attention and adopt
a safe, vigilant attitude.
If a navigation system instruction
contradicts traffic regulations, the
traffic regulations always apply.
The navigation system will reliably
guide to the chosen destination
without the need for physical road
maps.
Functioning of the navigation
system
The position and movement of the
vehicle are detected by the navigation
system using sensors.
The distance travelled is determined
by the vehicle's speedometer signal,
and turning movements on bends are
162 Infotainment system
determined by a gyro sensor. The
position is determined by GPS
(Global Positioning System)
satellites.
By comparing these sensor signals
with the digital maps on the
navigation system, it is possible to
accurately determine the position of
the vehicle.
When using the vehicle for the first
time, or after a ferry trip, etc., the
system will self-calibrate. It is,
therefore, normal if it does not provide
an exact location until the vehicle has
travelled for some distance.
After the entry of the destination
address or point of interest (nearest
petrol station, hotel, etc.) the route is
calculated from the current location to
the selected destination.
Route guidance is provided by voice
output and the display screen.
9Warning
Areas such as one-way streets
and pedestrian zones are not
marked on the navigation system
map. In such areas, the system
may issue a warning that must be
accepted. Therefore, pay
particular attention to one-way
streets and other roads and
entrances that must not be driven
into.
Notice
Depending on Infotainment system,
radio reception may be interrupted
during voice guidance and before
each change of direction.
USB memory stick
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
A USB memory stick is required for
the navigation system, to contain,
among other things, a digital map of
the towns and roads in your country.
Notice
Use a USB memory stick, formatted
to FAT32 format, with a minimum
4 GB and maximum 32 GB of
storage capacity.
After driving the first 60 miles, it is
possible to check for free digital map
updates within a period of 90 days.
Notice
To avoid possible technical issues,
only use a compatible USB memory
stick for operating and updating the
navigation system. Do not insert
USB memory stick in any other
device (e.g. digital camera, mobile
phone, etc.), or in another vehicle.
Software installation
To update the digital maps and to
benefit from exclusive downloadable
services, an account must be created
on the vauxhall.naviextras.com
website and the free software must be
installed.
Creating an account
Create your internet account via the
vauxhall.naviextras.com website.
Select e.g., the "Register" option on
the web page and enter the
appropriate details.
Installing the software
Install the software on your computer
by downloading from
vauxhall.naviextras.com.
Follow the on-screen instructions to
install the software and launch the
online application.
164 Infotainment system
SD card (NAVI 80 IntelliLink)
An SD card is supplied with the
navigation system and contains,
among other things, a digital map of
the towns and roads in the country.
Consult a workshop to purchase a
new SD card with updated digital
map.
Notice
To avoid possible technical issues,
only use a compatible SD card for
operating the navigation system. Do
not insert SD card in any other
device (e.g. digital camera, mobile
phone, etc.), or in another vehicle.
Usage
USB memory stick
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Inserting the USB memory stick
Switch off the navigation system and
insert the USB memory stick in the
USB slot on the Infotainment system
fascia. The USB memory stick is
fragile; treat it with care.
Removing the USB memory stick
Switch off the navigation system and
remove the USB memory stick from
the USB slot on the Infotainment
system fascia.
SD card
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
Inserting the SD card
Switch off the Infotainment system
and insert the SD card in its slot
located on the instrument panel. The
SD card is fragile; do not bend it.
Ensure the SD card is inserted the
correct way. The orientation may
differ, depending on location of the
SD card slot in the vehicle.
Removing the SD card
To remove SD card from the
Infotainment system, on the Home
page touch MENU, then System
followed by Remove SD card; The SD
card can now be ejected safely from
its slot located on the instrument
panel.
To remove the SD card from its slot,
press on the card then release it. The
card is released slightly to enable it to
be withdrawn.
Notice
To avoid possible technical issues,
only use a compatible SD card for
operating and updating the
navigation system. Do not insert SD
card in any other device (e.g. digital
camera, mobile phone, etc.), or in
another vehicle.
Infotainment system 165
Activating the navigation system
Switching on
The navigation system switches on
automatically when the ignition is
switched on. In other cases, press X.
With the ignition off, the navigation
system can be used for upto
20 minutes. Press X to switch on the
navigation system again. The system
will automatically switch off upto
20 minutes after the last user input.
Switching off
With the ignition off, the navigation
system switches off automatically
when the driver's door is opened.
With the ignition on, press X to switch
off the navigation system.
Switching between navigation system
and Infotainment system menus
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
With the navigation system active,
touch 7 or touch and hold q/r to
return to the Infotainment system
Home page.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
With the navigation system active,
touch r (one or more times) to return
to the Infotainment system Home
page.
Information on the display
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Menu screen
To access the navigation menu
screen, touch 7 followed by ýNav.
The navigation menu screen contains
the following menus and submenus:
Destination
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Destination input" 3 174.
Address
Points of interest
History
Favourites
Find on map
Coordinate
Route
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Route information" and "Edit
Itinerary" in the "Guidance"
section 3 179.
Create Route/Edit Route
Avoidances
Overview
Cancel Route
Alternative routes
Route
Options
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Setting up the navigation
system" below.
Warnings
Route settings
Map settings
166 Infotainment system
Voice settings
Coordinate format
GPS
Map Update
Traffic
Map screen
To access the map screen without
route guidance, touch 7 followed by
sMap (if available). Refer to
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "Browse map" in
the "Guidance" section 3 179.
Touch anywhere on the map. The
cursor indicates the current position.
To scroll within the map, drag the map
in the required direction. To return the
cursor to the current vehicle position
at any time, touch =.
To access the map screen with route
guidance, touch 7 followed by
ýNav and enter a destination. Refer
to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "Destination
input" 3 174.
Touch anywhere on the map. The
cursor indicates the current position.
To scroll within the map, drag the map
in the required direction.
The map screen (with or without route
guidance) contains the following
controls and information:
1. ä/å: Rotate map left/right
2. â/ã: Viewpoint (low/high view)
3. OK (with countdown timer):
Confirm actions
4. Options menu (for route and map
settings)
5. q: Return to previous screen
6. ¼/¾: Change scale (zoom in/out)
7. Ô: Compass (touch to switch
between '2D', '3D' and '2D North'
map modes)
8. Name of the next major road or
road sign information, if
applicable
9. Current time
10. Direction and distance to next
change of direction
11. Journey information, e.g.
estimated arrival time, total
remaining distance
12. Audio system information (touch
to access audio source)
13. Route calculated and direction
changes
14. K: Current location
15. Home page
Infotainment system 167
16. Ö: Traffic information (TMC -
Traffic Message Channel)
17. Speed limit
18. L: Settings pop-up menu (see
items below)
19. Ù/Ú: Voice guidance on/off
20. ¼/½/¾: Change scale (zoom in/
out)
21. N: Switch between '2D', '3D' and
'2D North' map modes
Intersection view
During route guidance, before each
change of direction a close-up view of
the intersection is automatically
displayed. The normal view is
resumed after passing the
intersection.
Motorway view
During route guidance, before each
motorway junction a 3D view of the
junction is automatically displayed.
The normal view is resumed after
passing the junction.
Notice
For some motorway junctions, only
a small turn arrow may appear on
the map.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
Menu screen
On the Home page, touch MENU
followed by Navigation to access the
navigation menu.
The navigation menu screen contains
the following menus, submenus and
controls:
1. DRIVE TO ...
Refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink)
"Destination input" 3 174.
Home
Saved locations
Address
Recent destinations
Local search/TomTom
places
Point of Interest
Point on map
Latitude Longitude
2. CHANGE ROUTE
Refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Edit
Itinerary" in the "Guidance"
section 3 179.
Calculate alternative
Cancel route
Travel via
Infotainment system 169
remaining distance, journey
status (green flag/red flag)
Route summary
10. Compass (touch to switch
between 2D/3D map modes)
11. Change volume of guidance
instructions
12. <: Pop-up menu
13. Direction and distance to next
change of direction
14. Audio system information
15. K: Current location (cursor)
Route calculated and direction
changes
16. r: Return to previous screen
Lane images
During route guidance, before each
major road change, a 3D view of the
junction (with a turn arrow and road
signs) is automatically displayed. The
normal view is resumed after passing
the junction.
To switch off the lane images view,
refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink)
"Advanced Settings" in "Setting up
the navigation system" below.
Automatic zoom
During route guidance, before each
change of direction a close-up view of
the junction is automatically
displayed. The normal view is
resumed after passing the junction.
To switch off the automatic zoom
feature, refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink)
"Advanced Settings" in "Setting up
the navigation system" below.
Operating keyboards in the
display
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
To move within and to enter
characters in both the alphabetical
and numerical keyboards, make the
appropriate selection by touching the
display screen.
Select Options to change the
keyboard type (e.g. QWERTY,
ABC).
Select 1^& to switch to numbers
and symbols.
Select the drop down menu icon
ó to display a list of results for the
current operation (e.g.
destination input).
Entries can be corrected during
input with the k keyboard
character.
Touch r to stop using the
keyboard and return to the
previous screen.
Notice
When making an entry, certain
letters and numbers are unavailable
for selection (greyed-out) based on
the information stored in the
navigation system.
For further information, refer to
"Touchscreen operation" 3 134.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
To move within and to enter
characters in both the alphabetical
and numerical keyboards, make the
appropriate selection by touching the
display screen.
Entries can be corrected during
input with the k keyboard
character.
Touch r to stop using the
keyboard and return to the
previous screen.
170 Infotainment system
For further information, refer to
"Touchscreen operation" 3 134.
Setting up the navigation system
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Touch 7 followed by yNAVI / ýNav
then Options. This menu screen
allows you to check and update the
following map and navigation
settings:
Warnings
Route settings
Map settings
Voice settings
Coordinate format
GPS
Map update
Traffic (depending on version)
Warnings
Select Warnings to access the
following settings (switch off if not
required):
Warn when speeding (On/Off)
Speed limit always visible (On/
Off)
Alert point warnings (On/Off)
Pre-alert distance (0 m/200 m/
500 m)
Available depending on version.
Warn when speeding: The digital map
contains speed limits for certain
roads. Audio and/or visual warnings
are given when the vehicle exceeds
the speed limit.
Speed limit always visible: The speed
limit for certain roads is always visible
on the screen.
Alert point warnings: When the
vehicle passes an alert point
(permanent or temporary) - i.e. when
entering a hazardous section of road
requiring extra caution, or nearing a
speed camera location (depending on
country) - audio and visual warnings
are given.
Pre-alert distance: Select a distance
from which notifications of alert point
warnings should be given.
Notice
Warnings may not be available for
some roads and regions.
Route settings
Select Route settings to update the
following settings for route
calculation:
Route planning method (Fast/
Short/ECO)
Motorways (On/Off)
Period charge (On/Off)
Per-use toll (On/Off)
Ferries (On/Off)
Carpool/HOV (On/Off)
Unpaved roads (On/Off)
Permits needed (On/Off)
(depending on version)
If necessary, touch Options then
Reset to defaults to set each of these
options back to the factory default
settings.
Alternatively, when the map is
displayed (no route guidance is
active), the Route settings menu can
be accessed by touching Options.
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Information on the display", "Map
screen" above for further information.
Infotainment system 171
Route planning method: Select Fast
to set the fastest route to the
destination entered. This method
assumes the vehicle travels at or near
the speed limit on all roads.
Select Short to set the shortest route
and minimise the total distance to
travel to the destination entered.
Select Eco to set a compromise
between the fastest and the shortest
route planning methods. The route
provided may be shorter than the
fastest method, but not significantly
slower.
Motorways: To include or exclude
motorways from the route plan.
Turn off, e.g. when towing a vehicle,
or when motorway driving is not
permitted.
Notice
Follow the regulations of the country
in which you are driving.
Period charge: To include or exclude
roads which require a special license
to be purchased for certain periods.
Per-use toll: To include or exclude
roads for which a toll must be paid to
use the road once only.
Ferries: To include or exclude the use
of ferries, ships and trains.
Carpool/HOV: To include or exclude
carpool lanes and high-occupancy
vehicle (HOV) lanes.
Unpaved roads: To include or
exclude the use of unpaved roads,
e.g. dirt, gravel roads.
Map settings
Select Map settings to access the
following:
View mode (3D/2D/2D North)
2D North is available depending
on version.
Viewpoint (Low/Normal/High)
Motorway view (On/Off)
POI markers
Alternatively, when the map is
displayed (no route guidance is
active), the Map settings menu can be
accessed by touching Options.
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Information on the display", "Map
screen" above for further information.
View mode: Select View mode to
change the default map mode
between a 2D top-down view, a 3D
perspective view and a 2D view with
North always facing upwards.
Alternatively, touch the Compass on
the map to switch between map view
modes.
Viewpoint: Select Viewpoint to raise
or lower the map view.
Alternatively, when the map is
displayed (no route guidance is
active), touch ⇧/⇩ to raise or lower the
map view. They are greyed-out when
the maximum position is reached.
Motorway view: Select Motorway
view to switch on/off the motorway
junction view for route guidance.
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Information on the display", "Map
screen" above for further information.
POI markers: Select l alongside POI
markers to display a list of Points of
Interest (POI) types.
Use this screen to switch on/off (show
or hide on map) certain POI type
markers on the map, e.g.
accommodation, airport, café or bar.
172 Infotainment system
Select a POI type to open a list of its
subcategories and switch on/off
(show or hide) individual
subcategories.
Notice
POIs are only visible on the map
depending on the zoom level.
Voice settings
Select Voice Settings to change voice
guidance language.
Scroll the list of languages by
touching R/S then select a language
and touch OK to confirm selection.
Coordinate format
Select Coordinate format to change
the format of co-ordinate entries to
one of the following options:
DD.DDDDD
DD MM.MMM
DD MM SS.S
GPS
Select GPS to view the GPS
information, e.g. available satellites,
their location and signal strength.
Map update
Select Map update to display the
following digital map content and
latest update information:
Alert Points
Junction View
Maps
Places
Traffic Service
Address Points
Specific content or all map content
can be updated. Select one of the
options first or touch Options then
Update. Wait for the update to
complete.
Refer to "USB memory stick"
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink), "Updating the
USB memory stick and navigation
system" in the "General information"
section 3 161.
Traffic
Select Traffic to change the following
traffic information settings:
Traffic info (On/Off)
Detour
Event types
Traffic info: Warnings are given for
incidents that occur along the route.
Detour: Save time by using an
alternative route when a traffic jam or
an incident occurs along the current
route. Select 'On'/'Off' alongside
"Confirm offered route?" as required.
If necessary, update the time value
for the option "Offer detour if the
calculated route saves more than:"
(e.g. five minutes) by touching k/l.
Event types: Select the type of events
to be displayed during route
guidance, e.g. all events, traffic flow
events, closures and blockages,
accidents.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
To access the navigation settings
menu from the Home page, touch
MENU then Navigation, followed by
Settings. The following settings
submenus are displayed:
Turn off voice guidance:
Switch on/off voice guidance
during navigation.
Infotainment system 173
Route planning:
Settings for route type, toll roads,
ferries, route summary, carpool
lanes and unpaved roads.
Select a planning preference
type; "Fastest route" is
recommended. The eco-route is
designed to save the most fuel.
Then switch on/off "iQ routes™"
as required. iQ routes™ enables
routes to be calculated according
to average traffic levels during a
particular day and time, and also
the best route according to actual
traffic speeds.
Show POI on map:
Show or hide categories of POI
markers on the map.
Manage POIs:
Add, change or delete POIs or
POI categories.
Voice (depending on version):
Select synthesised voice or a
male or female human voice (for
the voice instructions) from the
available list.
Human voices provide more
simplified voice guidance
instructions and are not available
when using the Voice recognition
function 3 187.
Set home location:
Change the home or most used
destination address.
Manage saved locations:
Delete or rename saved
destination addresses.
To rename, select an address
from the displayed list, select
Rename then enter a new name.
Touch Done to confirm. To delete
a selected address, touch
Delete and confirm when
prompted.
Switch map:
If more than one map is installed
on the SD card, use this option to
switch between the saved maps.
Select "Change map" then
choose the desired map from the
options available.
Change map colours:
Change day and night colours
used on navigation map.
For downloaded new colours;
choose a new colour, select
additional colour scheme, then
choose the desired colour from
the options available.
Car symbol:
Change the vehicle icon used on
the 3D navigation map.
Advanced:
Select from the following
advanced options:
Map information:
Show/hide information
displayed on the map, e.g.
address number before
street name, street names/
current street name, name of
street after current street.
Map behaviour:
Change how the map
operates with the following
options:
Show lane images (e.g. at
motorway junctions), rotate
174 Infotainment system
map with vehicle direction
(2D mode only), switch to 3D
mode automatically during
guidance, zoom
automatically (2D mode, 3D
mode).
Traffic source:
Choose a traffic information
source from the available list.
Destination input
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Select a destination
Touch 7 followed by ýNav then
Destination.
The following menu options are
available for entering a destination:
Address
Enter an address using the
keyboard.
Points of Interest
Select Points of Interest (POI),
e.g. petrol station, restaurant,
parking.
History
Select from a list of previous
destinations.
Favourites
Select from a saved list of
favourite destinations.
Find on map
Select a destination by using the
digital map.
Coordinate
Enter the co-ordinates of the
destination.
After a destination has been entered,
wait for the ten second countdown to
expire or touch OK to begin route
guidance immediately.
Enter an address
Select Address and enter part or all of
an address, e.g.:
Country
Town or Postcode
Street
Number
Intersecting street
Notice
Full addresses can only be entered
if they are recognised by the
navigation system.
When entering an address for the first
time, touch Country, then use the
keyboard to enter the name of the
country required. Alternatively, use
the drop down menu icon ó and select
from a list of suggested countries.
Notice
When entering an address, certain
letters and numbers are unavailable
for selection (greyed-out) based on
the addresses recognised by the
navigation system.
Proceed in the same way to enter
details for Town or Postcode, Street,
Number and Intersecting street.
Notice
If a Postcode consists of several
parts, insert a space after the first
part of the postcode.
The address is automatically stored in
the memory, available for future
selection.
Infotainment system 175
For keyboard operation, refer to
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "Operating
keyboards in the display" in the
"Usage" section 3 164.
Notice
Number and Intersecting Street are
only available after a Street has
been entered.
When entering a Street, it is not
necessary to specify the type of road
(street, avenue, boulevard etc.).
Select Points of Interest (POI)
POIs can be selected as a destination
using the following search options:
preset POI list
POI categories
quick search for POIs via the map
Preset POI list
Select Points of Interest to choose
from the frequently-used preset
categories list (e.g. petrol station,
parking, restaurant).
POI categories
Select Points of Interest followed by
Custom Search to select from the list
of categories and subcategories.
The search for POIs differs
depending on the current situation:
If route guidance is active, Petrol
station and Restaurant POIs are
searched for along the route, and
Parking POIs are searched for
around the destination.
If there is no active route
guidance, POIs are searched for
around the current position.
If the current position is not
available (i.e. no GPS signal),
POIs are searched for around the
last known position.
The following options are available:
In a Town
To search for a POI within a
selected town (the resulting list is
ordered by distance from the
town centre).
Along Route
To search for a POI along the
current route (the resulting list is
ordered by length of the required
detour).
Around My Position
To search for a POI around the
current position (the resulting list
is ordered by distance from this
position).
Around Destination
To search for a POI around the
destination of the current route
(the resulting list is ordered by
distance from the destination).
When a list of POIs is displayed, they
can be sorted or displayed on the
map. Touch Options to display the
following:
Sort by name
Sort by distance
Sort by detour (if route guidance
is active)
Show all on map
Quick search for POIs
Touch anywhere on the map. The
cursor indicates the current selected
position. To scroll within the map,
drag the cursor in the required
direction.
176 Infotainment system
Touch Options followed by Points of
Interest Around Cursor to show
nearby POI names and their distance
from the selected position on the
map.
Alternatively, touch Find and use the
keyboard to search for a destination
by name.
Select from previous destinations list
Select History to access a list of
previously entered destinations.
To sort the list, touch Options to
display the following:
Sort by name
Sort by distance
Delete all
Alternatively, touch Find and use the
keyboard to search for a destination
by name.
Select from Favourites list
Select Favourites to access a list of
saved favourite destinations.
When the list of favourites is
displayed, they can be sorted or
displayed on the map. Touch
Options to display the following:
Sort by name
Sort by distance
Show all on map
Delete all
Alternatively, touch Find and use the
keyboard to search for a favourite by
name.
Select a destination by using the map
Select Find on Map to begin a search
for a destination by scrolling the map.
Touch anywhere on the map. The
cursor indicates the current selected
position. To scroll within the map,
drag the cursor in the required
direction.
Touch OK to select the position as a
destination.
Enter the co-ordinates of the
destination
Select Coordinate to begin a search
for a destination by entering its co-
ordinates.
To change the format of the co-
ordinates, touch Options and select
from the following:
Latitude/Longitude
Values can be entered in any of
the following formats:
decimal degrees
degrees and decimal
minutes
degrees, minutes and
decimal seconds
UTM (Universal Transverse
Mercator)
Confirm the destination
When a destination has been
selected, the route appears on the
map. Touch OK and set as a New
route.
If route guidance is active, the
destination can be set as a
Waypoint along the route.
Infotainment system 177
Add and save a favourite
When a destination has been
selected, touch Options to display the
following:
Add to Favourites: Save the
destination in the favourites list.
Current traffic: Provides
information on traffic incidents
(depending on version).
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Traffic information" in the
"Guidance" section 3 179.
Info/News: Displays information
(e.g. address) for the selected
POI.
Shows the location (address) of
the position selected, provides
the GPS coordinates (latitude/
longitude) and also, if applicable,
displays the phone number of a
selected POI.
Back to car: Return to current
vehicle location.
Before saving a favourite, the name
of the favourite can be changed by
using the keyboard.
For keyboard operation, refer to
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "Operating
keyboards in the display" in the
"Usage" section 3 164.
Delete a favourite
When a favourite has been selected,
touch Options before starting route
guidance followed by Delete
Favourite and confirm deletion.
To delete all favourite destinations,
select the menu Destination then
Favourites followed by Options then
Delete all and confirm deletion.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
Select a destination
From the Home page, touch MENU
then Navigation followed by Drive
to....
Select a destination from the
following options on the display:
Home
Saved locations
Address
Recent destinations
Local search/TomTom places
Point of Interest
Point on Map
Latitude Longitude
Home
Guides to the home address.
To store the home address, from the
Home page, touch MENU then
Navigation, followed by Settings.
Select Set home location and enter
an address.
Refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Setting
up the navigation system" in the
"Usage" section 3 164.
Saved locations
Select from a list of previously saved
destinations.
To delete or rename saved
destinations, from the Home page,
touch MENU then Navigation,
followed by Settings.
Then select Manage saved locations
and update the selected destination
as required.
Refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Setting
up the navigation system" in the
"Usage" section 3 164.
178 Infotainment system
Address
Enter part or all of an address using
the keyboard, e.g.:
Country
Postcode
Town/City
Street
House number
Notice
Full addresses can only be entered
if they are recognised by the
navigation system.
When entering an address for the first
time, the country of the destination
will be requested. Use the keyboard
to enter the name of the country
required.
Suggestions may be shown on the
display during input. Touch to select
a destination shown in the display, or
touch List to access the full list for the
current part of the address.
Notice
When entering an address, certain
letters and numbers are unavailable
for selection (greyed-out) based on
the addresses recognised by the
navigation system.
Proceed in the same way to enter a
Postcode or enter details for Town/
City, Street and Number.
Notice
If a Postcode consists of several
parts, insert a space after the first
part of the postcode.
The address is automatically stored in
the memory, available for future
selection.
For keyboard operation, refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Operating
keyboards in the display" in the
"Usage" section 3 164.
Recent destinations
Select from a list of previous
destinations that have been
automatically stored.
Point of Interest
POIs can be selected as a destination
using the following search options:
POI categories:
Select a POI category type (e.g.
petrol station, restaurant,
parking), then select a search
area (e.g. POI nearby, POI in
town, POI at home.
Enter a town/city name and touch
Done to confirm selection.
POI names:
Enter name of a POI and select
to begin a search.
Point on Map
Select a destination by using the
digital map.
To scroll within the map, drag the
cursor in the required direction, then
confirm the position as a destination.
Latitude Longitude
Enter the co-ordinates of the
destination.
Infotainment system 179
Confirm the destination
When a destination has been
selected, the route appears on the
map and a route summary is provided
in the y tab.
Touch Done to confirm the route.
Add and save a favourite
Add to saved locations
From the Home page, touch MENU
then Navigation followed by Drive
to....
Select Recent destinations and
choose a destination from the
displayed list.
Touch < (to open a pop-up menu)
then Add to saved locations, give a
name to the destination using the
keyboard, then touch Next.
A message is displayed asking if the
saved address should be set as the
Home address. Select Yes or No. A
message is displayed confirming that
the address has been saved.
Add Favourite
On the Home page, touch f to open
the favourites menu and select
Navigation.
To set a saved destination as a
favourite, touch < (to open a pop-up
menu), then Add Favourite.
Choose from the displayed list to add
a saved destination to the favourites.
For further information, refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Favourites" in
the "Introduction" section 3 127.
Delete a favourite
On the Home page, touch f to open
the favourites menu and select
Navigation.
Touch < and select Remove all
Favourites or select a favourite from
the displayed list then select Remove
a Favourite. A confirmation message
is displayed. Touch Delete to confirm.
For further information, refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Favourites" in
the "Introduction" section 3 127.
Guidance
Route information
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
To view the route before guidance
begins, touch 7 followed by yNAVI /
ýNav then Route after a destination
has been entered.
For the various methods of entering a
destination, refer to
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "Destination
input" 3 174.
The following options are available:
Create Route/Edit Route
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Edit Itinerary" below.
Avoidances
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Edit Itinerary" below.
Overview
See below.
Cancel Route
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Deactivating guidance" below.
180 Infotainment system
Alternative Routes
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Edit Itinerary" below.
Itinerary
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Edit Itinerary" below.
Overview
When the Route screen is displayed,
touch Overview to get a detailed plan
for the current route and a bird's eye
view of the route on the map.
This menu option contains the
following information:
name and/or address of the
destination
total time of the route
total distance of the route
special points and sections of the
route (e.g. toll roads, motorways,
etc.)
alternative routes (e.g. Short,
Fast, Economical)
When the Overview screen is
displayed, touch Options to access
the following submenus:
Alternative routes
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Edit Itinerary" below.
Itinerary
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Edit Itinerary" below.
Route settings
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Setting up the navigation
system" 3 164.
Simulate navigation
See below.
Notice
These options can also be accessed
during route guidance by touching
on the 'Journey information' (e.g.
estimated arrival time, total
remaining distance) area of the
display screen.
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Information on the display" in the
"Usage" section 3 164.
Simulate navigation
This function enables to see a rapid
view of the suggested route.
The following options are available:
r: Start or pause the route
simulation
f: Move to previous
manoeuvre
e: Move to next
manoeuvre
1x / 4x / 8x : Increase the speed of
the route simulation
r/q: Return to previous
screen
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
To view the route before guidance
begins, touch < (to open a pop-up
menu), then select Route details after
a destination has been entered.
The following options are available:
Display instructions:
Displays the route plan.
The following details are shown:
direction change arrows
road types
Infotainment system 181
road names
distance before a fork in the
road (km/miles)
Display route map:
View a map of the route.
Display route demo:
View a demonstration of the
route.
Route summary:
Return to the previous screen.
The details of the journey time,
distance and the type of journey
are displayed. Refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink)
"IQ routes™" in the "Destination
input" section 3 174.
Display destination:
View changes in direction as
images.
Edit itinerary
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
This function makes it possible to
view and change the route plan to the
destination entered.
To access at any time, touch 7
followed by yNAVI / ýNav then
Route. Select Itinerary.
The following information will appear:
direction change arrows
road number
distance before a direction
change
Touch Options to change and sort the
details of the route.
The following options are available:
Summary
Shows each waypoint and the
destination, including the
waypoint distance, time left to
next waypoint and arrival time.
Normal
Shows each manoeuvre, with
street or place names, distance,
and route section numbers.
This option also shows signpost
information, access and
manoeuvre restrictions,
warnings and system preference
information.
Road list
Shows only the main sections of
the route using road names/
numbers.
This option also shows the length
of each section, time left to next
section, arrival time and average
direction.
Alternatively, these itinerary/route
options can be changed by touching
the "Direction and distance to next
change of direction" tab on the display
during route guidance. Select
Options to change and sort the details
of the route.
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Information on the display", "Map
screen" in the Usage section 3 164.
Edit route
To edit the route by modifying the list
of waypoints, touch 7 followed by
yNAVI / ýNav, Route then Edit
Route on the display screen.
182 Infotainment system
The following options are available:
Top <: Add waypoint
Bottom <: Add new destination
ë: Delete destination
y: Change the route
departure address
(available depending on
version)
To change the order of the waypoints
in the list, touch Options followed by
Re-order then move the waypoints
up/down.
For the various methods of entering a
destination, refer to
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "Destination
input" 3 174.
Avoidances
To edit the route by avoiding
particular sections, touch 7 followed
by yNAVI / ýNav, Route then
Avoidances.
Select a section from the list on the
display screen to be avoided. The
avoided section is highlighted in red.
Confirm the new route by touching
OK.
Alternative routes
To change the route planning
method, touch 7 followed by yNAVI /
ýNav, Route then Alternative routes.
The following options are available,
each with a distance and estimated
time:
fast
short
eco
Select one of the options and confirm
the new route by touching r.
For further information, refer to
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "Setting up the
navigation system" in the "Usage"
section 3 164.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
Journeys can be planned in advance
by selecting both the starting point
and the destination.
From the Home page, touch MENU
then Navigation, followed by
Itineraries.
Select a point of departure in the
same way as entering a destination.
Refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink)
"Destination input" 3 174. Then select
a destination, choose the type of
route and confirm.
The system plans the route and
allows you to view the details.
Change route
To change the route during active
route guidance, from the Home page,
touch MENU then Navigation,
followed by Change route.
The following options are available:
Calculate alternative
Cancel route
Travel via
Avoid roadblock
Avoid part of route
Minimise delays
Calculate alternative
Select to calculate an alternative
route to the destination.
Cancel route
Select to stop the current route
guidance.
To restart guidance, touch Drive to..,
followed by Recent destinations and
select the route again.
Infotainment system 183
Travel via (waypoints)
Select to change the calculated route
to your destination so that it includes
a particular location (waypoint).
The location to be included is entered
the same way as entering a
destination.
Select from the same list of options,
e.g. "Address", "Saved locations",
"Point of Interest", "Point on map".
Refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink)
"Destination input" 3 174.
Avoid roadblock
Select this option in the event a
roadblock is not currently indicated by
the Traffic information service.
Refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Traffic
information" below.
Choose the distance (in metres) of
the route ahead to be avoided, e.g.
"100m", "500m", "2000m", "5000m".
The route is recalculated to avoid a
section of the route for the distance
selected.
Avoid part of route
Select to avoid a part of the route.
Choose the road to be avoided from
the list of roads along the route.
Minimise delays
Select to plan the route based on the
latest traffic information.
Deactivating guidance
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
To stop route guidance when in
progress, touch 7 followed by
yNAVI / ýNav, Route then Cancel
Route.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
To stop guidance when in progress,
touch < followed by Delete route.
Browse map
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
To access the map screen at any
time, touch 7 followed by sMAP.
Touch anywhere on the map. The
cursor indicates the current selected
position. To scroll within the map,
drag the cursor in the required
direction.
For further control operations, refer to
(NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "Map screen" in
the "Usage" section 3 164.
Options menu
When the map screen is displayed,
touch Options to display the following:
Route settings:
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Setting up the navigation
system" in the "Usage" section
3 164.
Map settings:
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Setting up the navigation
system" in the "Usage" section
3 164.
Where am I?:
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"HELP!" below.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
To access the map screen without
navigation, on the Home page touch
MENU, then Navigation followed by
View Map.
184 Infotainment system
Touch anywhere on the map. The
cursor indicates the current selected
position. To scroll within the map,
drag the cursor in the required
direction.
When the map screen is displayed,
touch < to open a pop-up menu
containing the following options:
Use this location to...
Find
Change the map details
Add to saved locations
Use this location to...
Select this option to perform any of
the following actions:
centre the map on the vehicle's
location
navigate to a point on the map
search for a point on the map
add a point on the map to the
favourites
add a point on the map to the POI
list
correct the position of your
vehicle
Find
Select this option to centre the map
on:
the saved home
a saved address
an address
a recent destination
a local search
a point of interest
current vehicle position
a co-ordinate (latitude/longitude)
Change the map details
Select this option to switch on/off the
following map settings:
traffic
names
points of interest (POI)
satellite image map background
GPS co-ordinates
Add to saved locations
Select this option to add the current
position on the map as a saved
destination. Use the keyboard to
enter a name or confirm the
suggested name.
For keyboard operation, refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Operating
keyboards in the display" in the
"Usage" section 3 164.
Help!
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
When the map screen is displayed,
touch Options followed by Where am
I? to check helpful information about
the current location and to search for
Points of Interest (POI) nearby.
To access the map screen at any
time, touch 7 followed by sMAP.
Where am I?
This menu option contains the
following information:
current location (address)
latitude
longitude
altitude
GPS status
Infotainment system 185
Touch Options to display the
following options:
Add to favourites
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Destination input", "Add and
save a favourite" for further
information 3 174.
Country information: Refer to
"Country information" below.
Country information
This function allows you to check
country information and legislation for
the current location.
When the Where am I? screen is
displayed, touch Options followed by
Country information.
This menu option contains the
following information:
speed limits
phone country code
(International dialling code, e.g.
+49)
emergency number (e.g. 112)
legal restrictions, e.g.:
vehicle equipment
requirements, e.g. warning
triangle, first aid kit, fire
extinguisher, spare bulbs,
high-visibility jacket etc.
headlights legislation
maximum blood alcohol level
snow chains legislation
winter tyres legislation
Help Nearby
This function allows you to search for
assistance near the current location.
When the Where am I? screen is
displayed, touch Help Nearby.
This menu option contains the
following information:
Car repair around here (Vehicle
repair services)
Health around here (Medical and
emergency services)
Police around here (Police
stations)
Petrol station around here (Fuel
stations)
Select the appropriate option to
access a list of local Points of Interest
(POI).
For information on Points of Interest
(POI), refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Destination input" 3 174.
Traffic information
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Available depending on version, up-
to-date traffic information from local
sources can be received. Information
is provided for the current route or for
the current vehicle location.
During route guidance, touch
Options then select Current traffic, or
touch the traffic icon Ö on the map
screen. Traffic incidents along the
route and estimated delay times are
displayed.
The following options are available:
Event list: Select to change event
display settings.
Offer detour: Create an
alternative route to the selected
destination.
Options: Access traffic options.
186 Infotainment system
To access these traffic options at any
time, touch 7 followed by yNAVI /
ýNav then Options. Then select
ÖTraffic.
Touch q to return to route guidance.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
Allows up-to-date traffic information
from local sources to be received.
From the Home page, touch MENU
then Navigation, followed by
Navigation Services. Then select
Traffic.
The navigation system indicates
traffic incidents with voice messages,
the traffic information bar and also by
displaying symbols on the map.
Refer to "Symbols overview" 3 186.
The system receives updates approx.
every 15 minutes and traffic incidents
are shown for major roads only.
Depending on the current traffic
situation, the traffic information bar
can include the following information:
heavy delays on the route (given
in minutes)
unknown or indeterminate
situation (grey)
slow traffic (orange)
traffic jam (red)
stationary traffic or road closed
(dark red)
distance before next incident (in
km/miles)
To manage the Traffic information
service, select from the following
options:
Minimise delays
Alter journey based on the latest
traffic information.
Display traffic on route
Displays an overview of all traffic
incidents on the current route.
Touch incident icons for more
detailed information.
View map
Select to explore the map and
stay up-to-date with the traffic
situation in the area.
The map displays the last
searched location. Touch
incident icons for more detailed
information.
Read traffic information
Activates voice guidance for
traffic information.
Traffic settings
Select Traffic settings and tick the box
alongside the required preferences
(e.g. automatically minimise delays
after every traffic update) and select
Done to confirm.
Symbols overview
L: Accident
M: Traffic jam
G: One or more lanes closed
F: Road closed
N: Traffic incident
E: Road works
J: Heavy rain
C: Snow
B: Strong wind, storm
K: Fog
Infotainment system 187
I: Ice Voice recognition
General information
The voice recognition function allows
to operate certain functions via voice
input.
To ensure that conversations held
inside the vehicle do not start
unintentional calls to a saved contact,
the voice recognition function must
first be activated via 5 on the column
controls.
Control elements overview 3 120.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Available depending on version, the
voice recognition function of the
handsfree phone system allows you
to operate certain functions of a
compatible smartphone via voice
input.
Refer to "Phone control" in this
section 3 189.
To confirm that a paired and
connected smartphone is compatible
with the voice recognition function,
touch 7 followed by ÿSetting(s).
Then select Connectivity followed by
View Bluetooth device list. The list
shows the paired devices and 5
appears alongside the name of the
smartphone to indicate compatibility.
Notice
If supported, the language set on the
smartphone will automatically be
used by the Infotainment system for
voice recognition.
The navigation system can also be
operated using voice controls. Refer
to "Navigation control" in this section
3 188.
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be
met:
The Bluetooth function of the
Infotainment system must be
activated.
Refer to "Bluetooth connection"
in the "Phone" section 3 194.
The Bluetooth function of the
Bluetooth-enabled smartphone
must be activated and the
smartphone must have a 3G, 4G
188 Infotainment system
or wi-fi connection (see
smartphone operating
instructions).
Dependent upon the
smartphone, it may be required
to set the device to "visible" (see
smartphone operating
instructions).
The smartphone must be paired
and connected to the
Infotainment system.
Help
For information and help with
activating and operating voice
controls, touch 7 followed by
ÿSetting(s) then Connectivity.
Select Smartphone from the list (use
S/R to search list), then select l to
access help.
A series of screens are displayed,
explaining how to use the voice
recognition function and information
on the following:
switching on/off with steering
wheel/column controls
compatible phones
operation methods
available functions and
descriptions
conditions of use
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
The voice recognition function allows
to operate certain functions via voice
input, including:
Navigation
Refer to "Navigation control" in
this section 3 188.
Phone
Refer to "Phone control" in this
section 3 189.
Press 5 on the column controls to
open the Voice control main menu.
After the tone, say the name of the
menu you wish to access.
When activated, the Voice control
main menu is displayed and the voice
recognition indicator in the top right
corner indicates system status and
optimisation levels:
Green : optimal voice recognition
Orange : good voice recognition
Red : average voice recognition
Microphone é: System is ready to
receive a voice
command
Loudspeaker
l
: Voice instructions
are currently being
given by the system
Loading icon : Data currently
loading
Navigation control
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Activating voice recognition
To activate the voice recognition
function during navigation:
Press 5 on the column controls; 5
appears, alongside the audio system
information, in the bottom right corner
of the display.
Notice
During use of the voice recognition
function, audio source playback is
interrupted.
For a guide to using voice commands,
refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "Help" in
the "General information" section
3 187.
Infotainment system 189
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
Activating voice recognition
To activate the voice recognition
function:
Press 5 on the column controls to
open the Voice control main menu.
After the tone, say "Destination" to
enter a new address. Say "Address"
then say the full destination of a new
address (number, street name,
destination town/city).
The address recognised by the
system is displayed. Confirm
destination when prompted to begin
guidance.
Alternatively, after the tone say
"Recent destinations" to access a list
of the most recent destinations
entered and select the desired
destination.
Notice
A compatible SD card must be
inserted for the voice recognition to
operate the navigation system.
For further information, refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Destination
input" in the "Navigation" section
3 174.
Phone control
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Activating voice recognition
To activate the voice recognition
function:
Press 5 on the column controls to
open the Smartphone menu; a beep
sounds and 5 appears on the display,
indicating activation.
To use voice recognition, touch 5 on
the display (or press 5).
Notice
During operation of the voice
recognition function, Radio and
Media functions are not available for
use.
To deactivate, touch and hold 5 on
the display (or press 5).
For a guide to using voice commands,
refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink) "Help" in
the "General information" section
3 187.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
Activating voice recognition
To activate the voice recognition
function:
Press 5 on the column controls to
open the Voice control main menu.
After the tone, say "Phone" to access
the Phone menu. Say the name of a
saved contact or a telephone number.
The desired contact appears in the
display when registered by the
system.
Say "Call" to start the dialling process.
Say "Delete" to cancel input and retry.
Alternatively, to initiate a call directly
from the Voice control main menu,
touch 5 and say the name of a saved
contact or a telephone number.
190 Infotainment system
Phone
General information
The handsfree phone system
provides you with the possibility of
having mobile phone conversations
via the vehicle's microphone and
loudspeakers, as well as operating
the most important mobile phone
functions via the Infotainment system.
To be able to use the handsfree
phone system, the mobile phone
must be connected with it via
Bluetooth.
Not all handsfree phone system
functions are supported by every
mobile phone. The possible phone
functions depend on the relevant
mobile phone and network provider.
Refer to the operating instructions for
the mobile phone or consult the
network provider.
Important information for
operation and traffic safety
9Warning
Use of the handsfree phone
system while driving can be
dangerous as your concentration
is reduced when telephoning. Park
the vehicle before using the
handsfree phone system.
Follow the regulations of the
country in which you are driving.
Also follow the special regulations
that apply in specific areas and
always switch off the mobile
phone if the use of mobile phones
is prohibited, if interference is
caused by the mobile phone or if
dangerous situations can occur.
9Warning
Mobile phones have effects on
your environment. For this reason,
safety regulations have been
prepared which you should make
yourself familiar with before you
use the telephone.
Bluetooth
The Phone portal is certified by the
Bluetooth Special Interest Group
(SIG).
Further information about the
specification will be found on the
Internet at http://www.bluetooth.com
Phone controls
Controls on Infotainment system or
steering column:
6TEL
- or -
TEL
- or -
yPHONE on the 7 Home page
screen (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
- or -
gPHONE in the Main menu
screen (NAVI 80 IntelliLink)
Select Phone to open the menu.
192 Infotainment system
Press / to stop using the keyboard
and return to the previous screen.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink,
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
To move within and to enter
characters in the numerical keyboard,
make the appropriate selection by
touching the display screen.
Entries can be corrected during input
with the k keyboard character.
Depending on version, touch r to
stop using the keyboard and return to
the previous screen.
For further information, refer to
"Touchscreen operation" 3 134.
Connection
A mobile phone must be connected to
the handsfree phone system in order
to control its functions via the
Infotainment system.
No phone can be connected to the
system unless it has first been paired.
Refer to the Bluetooth connection
section (3 194) for pairing a mobile
phone to the handsfree phone system
via Bluetooth.
When the ignition is switched on, the
handsfree phone system searches for
paired phones in the vicinity.
Bluetooth must be activated on the
mobile phone for the phone to be
recognised by the handsfree phone
system. Searching continues until a
paired phone is found. A display
message indicates that the phone is
connected.
Notice
When a Bluetooth connection is
active, using the handsfree phone
system will discharge the mobile
phone battery more rapidly.
Automatic connection
For your phone to connect
automatically when the system is
switched on, it may be necessary to
activate the automatic Bluetooth
connection function on your mobile
phone; refer to the mobile phone
operating instructions.
Notice
Depending on Infotainment system,
when reconnecting to a paired
phone, or when two paired phones
are within range of the handsfree
phone system, either the priority
phone (if defined) or the last
connected phone is connected
automatically, even if this phone is
outside the vehicle but still within
range of the handsfree phone
system.
During automatic connection, if a call
is already in progress, the
conversation will automatically switch
to the vehicle's microphone and
loudspeakers.
If connection fails:
check the phone is switched on
check the phone battery is not flat
check if the phone has already
been paired
The Bluetooth function on the mobile
phone and on the handsfree phone
system must be active and the mobile
phone must be configured to accept
the system connection request.
Infotainment system 193
Manual connection
Radio 15 USB
To change the phone connected to
the handsfree phone system, press
TEL and select the Select Device
menu. The device list shows the
phones already paired.
Select the desired phone from the list
and confirm by pressing OK. A
display message confirms phone
connection.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
To change the phone connected to
the handsfree phone system, touch
7 followed by ÿSettings then
Connectivity (or select Phone from
the Home page).
Then select View Bluetooth device
list. The device list shows the phones
already paired.
Select the desired phone from the list
and confirm by touching OK.
Depending on version, J appears
alongside the selected phone, to
indicate connection.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
To change the phone connected to
the handsfree phone system, from
the Home page, touch MENU then
gPhone followed by Settings.
Then select Manage devices. The
device list shows the phones already
paired. Select the desired phone from
the list.
Disconnecting a phone
If the mobile phone is switched off, the
phone is automatically disconnected
from the handsfree phone system.
During disconnection, if a call is
already in progress, the conversation
will automatically switch to the mobile
phone.
Radio 15 USB
To disconnect a phone from the
Infotainment system, press TEL (or
the SETUP) and select Bluetooth
connection. Select the desired device
from the device list then select
Disconnect the device by turning and
pressing OK. A display message
confirms phone disconnection.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Depending on version, to disconnect
a phone from the Infotainment
system, touch 7 followed by
ÿSettings then Connectivity (or
select yPhone from the Home page).
Then select View Bluetooth device
list. Select the connected phone
shown in the displayed list to
disconnect; I appears alongside the
phone, to indicate disconnection.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
To disconnect a phone from the
Infotainment system, from the Home
page, touch MENU then gPhone
followed by Settings.
Then select Manage devices. Select
the connected phone in the displayed
list to disconnect.
Defining the priority phone
Radio 15 USB
The priority phone is the last
connected phone.
194 Infotainment system
When the ignition is switched on, the
handsfree phone system searches
first for the priority paired phone.
Searching continues until a paired
phone is found.
Bluetooth connection
Bluetooth is a radio standard for the
wireless connection of, e.g., a
telephone with other devices.
Information such as a mobile phone
contact list and call lists can be
transferred. The functionality can be
restricted depending on the phone
model.
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be
met, in order to control a Bluetooth-
enabled mobile phone via the
Infotainment system:
The Bluetooth function of the
Infotainment system must be
activated.
The Bluetooth function of the
Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone
must be activated (see mobile
phone operating instructions).
Dependent upon the mobile
phone, it may be required to set
the device to "visible" (see mobile
phone operating instructions).
The mobile phone must be paired
and connected to the
Infotainment system.
Activating Bluetooth function of
the Infotainment system
Radio 15 USB
To enable the Infotainment system to
recognise and operate a Bluetooth-
enabled mobile phone, the Bluetooth
function must first be activated.
Deactivate the function if not
required.
Press TEL and select Bluetooth by
turning and pressing OK.
Select ON or OFF and confirm by
pressing the knob.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Touch 7 followed by ÿSettings.
Select Connectivity to display the
following options:
View Bluetooth device list
Search for Bluetooth device
External device authorization
Change passkey
Smartphone
Available depending on version.
For help with activating and
operating voice controls - refer to
"Voice recognition" 3 187).
When the Connectivity screen is
displayed, Bluetooth-enabled
devices can be paired to the
Infotainment system.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
To access the Phone settings menu
from the Home page, touch MENU
then gPhone followed by Settings.
The following options are displayed:
Manage devices
Sound levels
Voice mail
Activate Bluetooth
Automatically download phone
data (on/off)
Select Turn Bluetooth on to tick the
box alongside it. Bluetooth-enabled
devices can now be paired to the
Infotainment system.
Infotainment system 195
Refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Phone
settings" in the "Operation" section for
further information 3 197.
Pairing a mobile phone to the
handsfree phone system
In order to use the handsfree phone
system, a connection must be set up
between the mobile phone and the
system via Bluetooth, i.e. the mobile
phone must be paired to the vehicle
before using it. For this purpose, the
mobile phone must support
Bluetooth. Refer to the operating
instructions for the mobile phone.
To set up a Bluetooth connection, the
handsfree phone system must be
switched on and Bluetooth must be
activated on the mobile phone.
Notice
If another phone is automatically
connected during a new pairing
procedure, it will automatically be
disconnected, to allow the new
pairing procedure to continue.
Pairing enables the handsfree phone
system to recognise and store a
mobile phone in the device list. A
maximum of five mobile phones can
be paired and stored in the device list,
but only one can be connected at a
time.
Notice
Depending on version of
NAVI 50 IntelliLink, a maximum of
eight mobile phones can be paired.
When pairing is completed, a
message with the name of the paired
phone is shown on the Infotainment
system display screen and the phone
is automatically connected to the
handsfree phone system. The mobile
phone can then be operated via the
Infotainment system controls.
Notice
When a Bluetooth connection is
active, using the handsfree phone
system will discharge the mobile
phone battery more rapidly.
Radio 15 USB
To pair a phone to the handsfree
phone system, press TEL and select
Pair device by turning and pressing
OK. The Ready to Pair screen is
displayed.
On the mobile phone, search for
Bluetooth equipment in the vicinity of
the device.
Select My Radio (i.e. the name of the
handsfree phone system) from the list
on the mobile phone, then, on the
mobile phone keypad, enter the
pairing code shown on the
Infotainment system display screen.
If pairing fails, the system returns to
the previous menu and a
corresponding message is displayed.
Repeat procedure if necessary.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Touch 7 followed by ÿSettings.
Select Connectivity then either
Search for Bluetooth device or
External device authorization.
Alternatively, when in the Phone
menu screen, touch y.
On the mobile phone, search for
Bluetooth equipment in the vicinity of
the device.
Select the name of the handsfree
phone system (e.g. MEDIA-NAV)
from the list on the mobile phone, then
(if required), on the mobile phone
198 Infotainment system
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
During a call, press ! or # with the
steering column controls to change
the call volume.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
During a call, turn X on the
Infotainment unit to change the call
volume.
Alternatively (with the steering
column controls), press ! or #.
Dialling a telephone number
Several options are available for
dialling telephone numbers, including
calling a contact from the phonebook
or from a call log. Numbers can also
be dialled manually.
Entering a number manually
Radio 15 USB
With the Phone menu displayed,
select Dial from the list.
Enter the desired number using the
numerical keyboard (3 190) and
select 7 to start dialling.
To redial the last number, press and
hold TEL.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
With the yPhone menu displayed,
touch = in top left corner and select
Dial from the list.
Enter the desired number using the
numerical keyboard and select y to
start dialling.
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Operating keyboards in the display"
in the "General information" section
3 190.
Entries can be corrected during input
with the k keyboard character.
Touch and hold k to delete all
numbers at once.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
From the Home page, select MENU
then gPhone followed by Dial a
number.
Enter the desired number using the
numerical keyboard and touch Call to
start dialling.
Entries can be corrected during input
with the k keyboard character.
Phonebook
The phonebook contains contact lists
available only to the current vehicle
user. For reasons of confidentiality,
each downloaded contacts list can
only be viewed when the
corresponding phone is connected.
Radio 15 USB
After pairing the mobile phone to the
Infotainment system, the contact list
in the mobile phone is downloaded to
the handsfree phone system.
To dial a number from the
phonebook, with the Phone menu
displayed, select Phonebook and
select the desired contact from the
alphabetical list. Press OK to start the
dialling process.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
After pairing the mobile phone to the
Infotainment system, the contact list
in the mobile phone is downloaded to
the handsfree phone system.
With the yPhone menu displayed,
touch S in top left corner and select
Phone Book from the list.
Infotainment system 199
To dial a number from the
phonebook, select the desired
contact from the list.
Alternatively, select Search by Name,
then enter the name of the desired
contact using the keyboard.
Refer to (NAVI 50 IntelliLink)
"Operating keyboards in the display"
in the "General information" section
3 190.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
After pairing the mobile phone to the
Infotainment system, the contact list
in the mobile phone is downloaded to
the handsfree phone system.
Notice
Data sharing must be authorised on
the phone. Refer to the operating
instructions for the mobile phone or
consult the network provider.
The feature "Automatically
download phone data" must also be
switched on in the Infotainment
phone settings menu. Refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Phone
settings" below.
From the Home page, touch MENU
then gPhone followed by Phone
book.
To dial a number from the
phonebook, select the desired
contact from the list. If a contact has
more than one saved number, select
the appropriate number when
prompted. The call will be started
automatically after the contact
number is selected.
Alternatively, select Find, then enter
the name of the desired contact using
the keyboard.
After the initial pairing of the phone
with the Infotainment system, the
system can be updated with the latest
contacts on the mobile phone. Touch
< to open a pop-up menu and select
Update phone data. If necessary,
select Help from the pop-up menu for
assistance.
To add a contact to your list of
favourites, press < and select Add a
contact to the Favourites page.
Notice
Favourites can be accessed at any
time by pressing f on the Home
page.
For further information, refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Favourites" in
the "Introduction" section 3 127.
Call lists
Radio 15 USB
To dial a number from the call history
lists (e.g. dialled numbers, received
calls, missed calls), select the
relevant option, e.g. Dialled numbers
from the Call list menu. Select the
desired contact and press OK to start
the dialling process.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
After connecting the mobile phone to
the Infotainment system, the list of
dialled numbers, received calls and
missed calls in the mobile phone are
transferred automatically to the
handsfree phone system.
With the yPhone menu displayed,
touch S in top left corner and select
Calling Lists from the list.
200 Infotainment system
To dial a number from the call history
lists, select from the following options
on the display:
yAll: Displays list of all calls in
the below lists.
ú: Dialled numbers.
ù: Received calls.
û: Missed calls.
Notice
The number of missed calls is shown
alongside the symbol.
The most recent calls are displayed at
the top. Select the desired contact
from the chosen list to start the
dialling process.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
After connecting the mobile phone to
the Infotainment system, the list of
dialled numbers, received calls and
missed calls in the mobile phone are
transferred automatically to the
handsfree phone system.
Notice
Data sharing must be authorised on
the phone. Refer to the operating
instructions for the mobile phone or
consult the network provider.
The feature "Automatically
download phone data" must also be
switched on in the Infotainment
phone settings menu. Refer to
(NAVI 80 IntelliLink) "Phone
settings" below.
From the Home page, touch MENU
then gPhone followed by Call logs.
To dial a number from the call history
lists, select from the following options
on the display:
All: Displays list of all calls in the
below lists.
ù: Received calls.
þ: Missed calls.
ú: Dialled numbers.
The most recent calls are displayed at
the top. Alternatively, touch ↑ or ↓ to
move up/down in the display.
Select the desired contact from the
chosen call list to start the dialling
process.
Notice
If necessary, touch < (to open a
pop-up menu) and select Update
telephone data to update the call
lists.
Voicemail box
Radio 15 USB
To listen to mobile phone voicemail
messages via the Infotainment
system while the phone is connected,
select the Voicemail box menu.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
To listen to mobile phone voicemail
messages via the Infotainment
system while the phone is connected,
from the Home page, select MENU
then gPhone followed by Voice mail.
The system will call the configured
voicemail box.
The configuration screen will be
displayed if the voicemail box is not
configured. Enter number on the
numerical keyboard and confirm.
Receiving calls
Radio 15 USB
To accept the call, depending on
vehicle configuration:
Briefly press 7 (on the steering
column controls).
Select the 7 icon in the display
(by turning and pressing OK).
Infotainment system 201
To reject the call, depending on
vehicle configuration:
Press and hold 8 (on the steering
column controls).
Select the } icon in the display
(by turning and pressing OK).
When receiving a call, the caller
number may be shown on the
Infotainment system display screen. If
the number is stored in the system
memory, the name is displayed
instead. If the number cannot be
displayed, the message Private
number is shown.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
To accept the call:
Touch Accept/Agree.
Briefly press 7 (on the steering
column controls).
To reject the call:
Touch Refuse/Reject.
Press and hold 8 (on the steering
column controls).
When receiving a call, the caller
number may be shown on the
Infotainment system display screen. If
the number is stored in the system
memory, the name is displayed
instead. If the number cannot be
displayed, the message Unknown/
Unknown number is shown.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
To accept the call:
Touch Pick up.
Briefly press 7 (on the steering
column controls).
To reject the call:
Touch Reject.
Press and hold 8 (on the steering
column controls).
When receiving a call, the caller
number may be shown on the
Infotainment system display screen. If
the number is stored in the system
memory, the name is displayed
instead. If the number cannot be
displayed, the message No Caller ID
is shown.
Functions during a telephone call
Radio 15 USB
In addition to volume control, various
functions are available during a call,
including:
Switch the call to the mobile
phone.
Access the keyboard.
End call.
Turn and press OK to select and
confirm.
Switch the call from the handsfree
phone system to the mobile phone by
selecting the mobile phone display
item. Some mobile phones may
become disconnected from the
handsfree phone system during the
switch to this mode.
A number can also be entered on the
numerical keyboard (3 190) e.g. to
control a voice server such as the
voicemail box. Select the #123
display item to access the numerical
keyboard. Refer to "Voicemail box"
for further information.
202 Infotainment system
To end the call, depending on vehicle
configuration:
Briefly press 8.
Press TEL.
Select the } icon in the display.
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
In addition to volume control, various
functions are available during a call,
including:
}: End call.
n: Switch vehicle microphone off.
é: Switch vehicle microphone on.
m/m3: Transfer conversation to
mobile phone.
J3: Transfer conversation to
vehicle's microphone and
loudspeakers.
7: Return to previous screen
(e.g. navigation or Home page).
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
In addition to volume control, various
functions are available during a call,
including:
Place call on hold: Touch < (to
open pop-up menu) then select
On hold. Touch Continue to
resume the call.
Transfer conversation to mobile
phone: Touch < (to open pop-up
menu) then select Handset.
In some cases, the phone may be
disconnect from the Infotainment
system during a call transfer.
End call: Touch End call.
Return to previous menu: Touch
r.
Phone settings
NAVI 50 IntelliLink
Restore default phone settings
To access the settings menu at any
time, touch7 followed by
ÿSETTING(S).
Select System followed by Factory
settings then Phone to restore phone
settings to their default values.
Confirm by touching OK.
Display software version
To access the settings menu at any
time, touch 7 followed by
ÿSETTING(S).
Select System followed by System
version to display the software
version.
NAVI 80 IntelliLink
From the Home page, touch MENU
then gPhone followed by Settings.
Select from the following options:
Manage devices:
Refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink)
"Pairing a mobile phone" in the
"Bluetooth connection" section
3 194.
Sound levels:
To set the handsfree phone
system call volume and the
ringtone.
Infotainment system 203
Voice mail:
Refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink)
"Voicemail box" above.
Activate Bluetooth:
Refer to (NAVI 80 IntelliLink)
"Activating Bluetooth" in the
"Bluetooth connection" section
3 194.
Automatically download phone
data:
Select this option to tick the box
☑ alongside it.
When pairing and/or connecting
the mobile phone to the
Infotainment system, the contact
list and call lists in the mobile
phone can now be downloaded
to the handsfree phone system.
Data sharing must also be
authorised on the phone. Refer to
the operating instructions for the
mobile phone or consult the
network provider.
Mobile phones and CB radio
equipment
Installation instructions and
operating guidelines
The vehicle specific installation
instructions and the operating
guidelines of the mobile phone and
handsfree manufacturer must be
observed when installing and
operating a mobile telephone. Failure
to do so could invalidate the vehicle
type approval (EU directive 95/54/
EC).
Recommendations for fault-free
operation:
professionally installed exterior
antenna to obtain the maximum
range possible
maximum transmission power
ten watts
installation of the phone in a
suitable spot, consider relevant
Note in the Owner's Manual
section Airbag system
Seek advice on predetermined
installation points for the external
antenna or equipment holder and
ways of using devices with a
transmission power exceeding
ten watts.
Use of a handsfree attachment
without external antenna with mobile
telephone standards GSM
900/1800/1900 and UMTS is only
permitted if the maximum
transmission power of the mobile
telephone is two watts for GSM 900
or one watt for the other types.
For reasons of safety, do not use the
phone while driving. Even use of a
handsfree set can be a distraction
while driving.
9Warning
Operation of radio equipment and
mobile telephones which fail to
meet above mentioned mobile
telephone standards is only
permitted using an antenna
located outside of the vehicle.
204 Infotainment system
Caution
Mobile telephones and radio
equipment may lead to
malfunctions in the vehicle
electronics when operated inside
the vehicle with no exterior
antenna, unless the above
mentioned regulations are
observed.
Climate control 205
Climate control
Climate control systems ............. 205
Heating and ventilation system 205
Air conditioning system ........... 206
Electronic climate control
system .................................... 207
Rear heating system ............... 210
Rear air conditioning system ... 212
Auxiliary heater ........................ 213
Air vents ..................................... 218
Adjustable air vents ................. 218
Fixed air vents ......................... 219
Glovebox cooler ...................... 219
Maintenance .............................. 220
Air intake ................................. 220
Air conditioning regular
operation ................................ 220
Service .................................... 220
Climate control systems
Heating and ventilation
system
Controls for:
temperature
fan speed
air distribution
demisting and defrosting
Heated rear window Ü 3 42.
Heated seats ß 3 51.
Temperature
red : warm
blue : cold
Heating will not be fully effective until
the engine has reached normal
operating temperature.
Fan speed
Adjust the air flow by switching the fan
to the desired speed.
Air distribution
M: to head area
L: to head area and foot well
K: to foot well
206 Climate control
J: to windscreen, front door
windows and foot well
V: to windscreen and front door
windows
Intermediate settings are possible.
Demisting and defrosting the
windows
Switch cooling A/C on if
available.
Set temperature control to
warmest level.
Set fan speed to highest level.
Set air distribution control to V.
Switch on heated rear window Ü.
Open side air vents as required
and direct them towards door
windows.
For simultaneous warming of the
foot well, set air distribution
control to J.
Notice
If V is pressed while the engine is
running, an Autostop will be inhibited
until V is pressed again.
If V is pressed while the engine is
in an Autostop, the engine will restart
automatically.
Stop-start system 3 225.
Air conditioning system
Cooling (A/C)
Press A/C to switch on cooling. The
LED in the button illuminates to
indicate activation. Cooling is only
functional when the engine is running
and climate control fan is switched on.
Press A/C again to switch off cooling.
The air conditioning system cools and
dehumidifies (dries) the air when
outside temperature is a little above
the freezing point. Therefore
condensation may form and drip from
under the vehicle.
If no cooling or drying is required,
switch the cooling system off to save
fuel.
Notice
If the climate control is set to
maximum cooling while the ambient
temperature is high, an Autostop
may be inhibited until the required
temperature in the passenger
compartment has been reached.
If the climate control is set to
maximum cooling while the engine is
in an Autostop, the engine may
restart automatically.
Stop-start system 3 225.
Climate control 207
Air recirculation system
Press n to activate air recirculation
mode. The LED in the button
illuminates to indicate activation.
Press n again to deactivate air
recirculation mode.
9Warning
The exchange of fresh air is
reduced in air recirculation mode.
In operation without cooling the air
humidity increases, so the
windows may mist up. The quality
of the passenger compartment air
deteriorates, which may cause the
vehicle occupants to feel drowsy.
Electronic climate control
system
Controls for:
temperature
air distribution (ï or î) and
menu selection
fan speed x
AUTO : automatic mode
u: air recirculation
V: demisting and defrosting
Ü: heated rear window,
heated exterior mirrors
A/C OFF : switch off air conditioning
Heated rear window Ü 3 42.
Heated exterior mirrors Ü 3 39.
Heated seats ß 3 51.
The preselected temperature is
automatically regulated. In automatic
mode, the fan speed and air
distribution automatically regulate the
air flow.
The system can be manually adapted
by use of air distribution and air flow
controls.
The electronic climate control system
is only fully operational when the
engine is running.
For correct operation, do not cover
the sensor on the instrument panel.
Automatic mode
208 Climate control
Basic setting for maximum comfort:
Press AUTO (AUTO appears in
the display).
Set desired temperature (the
temperature appears in the
display).
Open all air vents.
During automatic mode, the settings
for fan speed, air distribution, air
conditioning and air recirculation are
automatically regulated by the system
and are not shown on the display.
Temperature preselection
Temperatures can be set to the
desired value with the two buttons
below the display.
For reasons of comfort, change
temperature only in small increments.
red : warm
blue : cold
Heating will not be fully effective until
the engine has reached normal
operating temperature.
If the minimum temperature of 15 ℃
is set, the electronic climate control
system runs at maximum cooling.
If the maximum temperature of 27 ℃
is set, the electronic climate control
system runs at maximum heating.
Notice
If the temperature is to be reduced
for climate comfort reasons, an
Autostop can be inhibited or the
engine will restart automatically
when cooling is switched on.
Stop-start system 3 225.
Fan speed
Fan speed can be increased or
decreased with the x buttons.
The selected fan speed is indicated
with x in the display.
If the fan is switched off, the air
conditioning is also deactivated.
To return to automatic mode: Press
AUTO.
Demisting and defrosting the
windows
Press V. The LED illuminates.
Temperature and air distribution are
set automatically, air conditioning is
switched on and the fan runs at a high
speed.
Heated rear window, heated exterior
mirrors are also switched on
automatically. Press Ü to switch off
without deactivating demisting /
defrosting of the windows. The fan
speed can also be decreased.
To return to automatic mode: press
V or AUTO.
Climate control 209
Notice
If V is pressed while the engine is
running, an Autostop will be inhibited
until V is pressed again.
If V is pressed while the engine is
in an Autostop, the engine will restart
automatically.
Stop-start system 3 225.
Air distribution
Press ï or î repeatedly.
Arrows shown in the display indicate
the distribution settings:
ï: to windscreen and front door
windows
: to windscreen, front door
windows and foot well
²: to head area
³: to head area and foot well
î: to foot well
To return to automatic mode, press
AUTO.
Cooling
The air conditioning system cools and
dehumidifies (dries) when outside
temperature is above a specific level.
Therefore condensation may form
and drip from under the vehicle.
If no cooling or drying is required,
press A/C OFF to switch the cooling
system off, thus saving fuel.
A/C OFF appears in the display.
Manual air recirculation mode
Press u to switch on air recirculation.
u appears in the display.
9Warning
The exchange of fresh air is
reduced in air recirculation mode.
In operation without cooling the air
humidity increases, so the
windows may mist up. The quality
of the passenger compartment air
deteriorates, which may cause the
vehicle occupants to feel drowsy.
To return to automatic mode, press
u or AUTO.
210 Climate control
Rear heating system
If the engine is switched off, the rear
compartment can be heated by the
additional heating, through low level
vents.
By programming values using the
control panel, the user can adjust the
time, day and temperature settings.
Heating will cease to operate if the
vehicle fuel level drops too low.
During operation, power from the
vehicle battery is used. For short
journey times, check the vehicle
battery regularly and recharge if
necessary.
Notice
If the rear heating system is
activated while the engine is
running, an Autostop will be
inhibited.
To ensure efficient performance, the
low level air vents in the rear
passenger compartment must not be
obstructed.
9Warning
Do not operate the system when
refuelling, when dust or
combustible vapours are present
or in enclosed spaces (e.g.
garage).
9Warning
If the warning light illuminates in
combination with the hazard
warning flashers, stop vehicle and
switch off engine as soon as
possible. Evacuate the vehicle,
there is a risk of fire.
Climate control 211
Timer
1 Display : Displays preset,
weekday or preset
day, current time or
preset time,
temperature, Z and
Y
2 Temperature : Selects
temperature
3 l: Adjusts values up
4 k: Adjusts values
down
5 Y: Selects heat
settings
6 P: Selects preset
settings
7 Þ: Selects time and
weekday settings
Operation
Heating Y
Press Y, the predetermined heating
duration, e.g. 30 is displayed.
To temporarily adjust the heating
duration, adjust using k or l. The
value can be set from 10 to
120 minutes. Due to the power
consumption, note the heating
duration.
To switch off, press Y.
To change the default predetermined
heating duration, ensure the heater is
switched off, press and hold k until
the display flashes and adjust using
k or l.
Programming P
Up to three preset departure times
during one day, or one preset
departure time over one week can be
programmed.
Press P once to select preset
memory number 1.
Press P twice to select preset
memory number 2.
Press P three times to select
preset memory number 3.
Press P again to exit the preset
memory.
Start heating within 24 hours
Press P to select desired preset
memory number 1, 2 or 3.
Briefly press k or l. The preset
time flashes.
Adjust the preset time using k or
l.
Press P to confirm and exit the
preset memory.
Start heating up to seven days
Press P to select desired preset
memory number 1, 2 or 3.
Briefly press k or l. The preset
time flashes.
Adjust the preset time using k or
l.
212 Climate control
After 5 seconds the preset day
flashes.
Adjust the preset day using k or
l.
The preset time and day are set
once the display changes to the
current time.
Set time and weekday Þ
If the vehicle battery is disconnected
or its voltage is too low, the unit will
need to be reset.
Press Þ until the time flashes.
Press k or l to change the
current time.
Time is stored when the display
stops flashing.
Wait for weekday to flash.
Press k or l to change the
weekday.
Weekday is stored when the
display stops flashing.
Heating level
The preferred heating level for
programmed departure times can be
set between 10 to 30 ℃.
To adjust the temperature of the
heating, turn the rotary knob located
on the control panel.
turn clockwise : increase
temperature
turn anticlock‐
wise : decrease
temperature
Rear air conditioning
system
The rear air conditioning system is
activated in conjunction with the front
passenger compartment air
conditioning system.
Bus
Fan speed
Adjust the air flow to select the
desired speed.
turn clockwise : increase air flow
turn anticlock‐
wise : decrease air flow
Notice
Rear air conditioning cannot be
switched on during an Autostop.
Stop-start system 3 225.
Climate control 213
Combi
Additional air conditioning is supplied
to the rear passenger compartment
via the air vents located above the
driver and front passenger
compartment.
With the front passenger
compartment air conditioning system
switched on, adjust the air flow to
select the desired speed.
Ensure the air vents are open when in
use, to prevent ice forming in the
system due to lack of air movement.
Auxiliary heater
Coolant heater
The engine-independent, fuel-
powered coolant heater provides
rapid heating of the engine coolant to
enable heating of the vehicle interior
without the engine running.
Notice
Depending on version, an additional
coolant heater may be switched on
automatically to speed up heating
when the ignition is on and the
outside temperature is below 5 ℃.
9Warning
Do not operate the system when
refuelling, when dust or
combustible vapours are present
or in enclosed spaces (e.g.
garage).
Before starting or programming the
system to start, turn the vehicle's
climate control system to heat, set the
air distribution to V and turn the fan
on.
Switch off when not required. Heating
stops automatically after the
programmed runtime. It will also
cease to operate if the vehicle fuel
level drops too low.
During operation, power from the
vehicle battery is used. The driving
time should therefore be at least as
long as the heating time. For short
journey times, check the vehicle
battery regularly and recharge if
necessary.
To ensure efficient performance,
briefly operate the auxiliary heater
once a month.
Control units
The timer or remote control unit turns
the system on and off, and is used to
programme specific departure times.
Timer (Type A)
1 Display : Displays preset, current
time or preset time,
temperature, Y, Ö and x
2 l: Adjusts values up
3 7: Long press: switch
heater on, short press:
turns display on or
confirms selection
214 Climate control
4 k: Adjusts values down
5 d: Long press: switch
heater off, short press:
turns display on or exit
menu
Remote control (Type A)
1 Display : Displays preset, current
time or preset time,
temperature, Z, Ü, Y,
Ö and x
2 7: Long press: switch heater on,
short press: turns display on
or confirms selection
3 l: Adjusts values up
4 d: Long press: switch heater off,
short press: turns display on
or exit menu
5 k: Adjusts values down
If no buttons are pressed within
ten seconds the display automatically
turns off.
Remote control (Type A) fault
displays
INIT : automatic detection –
wait until automatic
detection is finished
NO
SIGNAL : no signal –
check heater fuse
Z: poor signal –
move closer
Ü: battery low –
replace battery
Y: heater fault –
consult workshop
Add, AddE : system in learning
mode
Teach remote control (Type A)
If the vehicle battery is reconnected,
the LED in the instrument panel
button illuminates and the system
configures the remote control menu
automatically. If the LED flashes,
select Add or AddE and confirm.
Additional remote control units may
also be configured. Press the button
until LED flashes, switch on the
remote control, select Add and
confirm.
AddE teaches the current remote
control unit exclusively and blocks all
previously configured units. Add
teaches up to four remote control
units, but only one unit can operate
the system at any one time.
Climate control 215
Remote control (Type B)
1 Display : Displays preset, current
time or preset time,
temperature, Z, Ü, Y,
Ö and x
2 l: Adjusts values up
3
OFF : Switch heater off, or press
Y and OFF simultaneously
to confirm selection
4 Y:Switch heater on, or press Y
and OFF simultaneously to
confirm selection
5 k: Adjusts values down
If no buttons are pressed within
30 seconds the display automatically
turns off.
9Warning
When refuelling, switch off the
remote control unit as well as the
heater!
The remote control has a maximum
range of 1000 m. The range may be
reduced due to environmental
conditions and as the battery
becomes weaker.
Remote control (Type B) fault
displays
Z: poor signal – adjust position
FAIL : error during signal
transmission –
move closer or check heater
fuse
Ü: battery low – replace battery
Teach remote control (Type B)
Up to four additional remote control
units may also be configured. During
additional teaching processes, the
oldest transmitter will be deleted each
time.
Remove the heater fuse for
5 seconds, then refit the fuse. Within
2–6 seconds press OFF for
1 second. Teaching is completed.
If the remote has not been used for a
long period, press the OFF button
6 times at intervals of 2 seconds, then
press and hold for another
2 seconds, then wait 2 minutes.
Manual control
216 Climate control
Depending on version, the auxiliary
heater can also be switched on for the
last duration time or the default
duration 30 minutes, or cut-off
immediately, using the button on the
instrument panel. The LED in the
button confirms operation.
Battery replacement
Replace the battery when the range
of the remote control is reduced or
when the battery charge symbol
flashes.
Open the cover and replace the
battery (Type A: CR 2430, Type B:
2CR 11108, or equivalent), ensuring
the new battery is correctly installed
with the positive (<) side facing the
positive terminals. Replace the cover
securely.
Dispose of old batteries in
accordance with environmental
regulations.
Batteries do not belong in household
waste. They must be disposed of at
an appropriate recycling collection
point.
Operation (Type A)
Heating Y
Select Y in the menu bar and press
G to confirm. The predetermined
heating duration, e.g. L 30, flashes in
the display. The factory setting is
30 minutes.
Adjust the heating duration using k
or l and confirm. The value can be
set from 10 to 120 minutes. Due to the
power consumption, note the heating
duration.
To switch off, select Y in the menu bar
again and press d.
Ventilation x
Select x in the menu bar and press
G to confirm.
Adjust the ventilation duration using
k or l and confirm. The value can
be set from 10 to 120 minutes. Due to
the power consumption, note the
heating duration.
To switch off, select x in the menu bar
again and press d.
Programming P
Up to three preset departure times
can be programmed, either during
one day or over one week.
Select P in the menu bar and
press G to confirm.
Select desired preset memory
number P1, P2 or P3 and
confirm.
Select F and confirm.
Select weekday or weekday
group and confirm.
Select hour and confirm.
Select minutes and confirm.
Select Y or x and confirm.
Select ECO or HIGH and confirm.
Select duration and confirm.
Press d to exit.
Repeat the procedure to programme
the other preset memory numbers if
required.
Climate control 217
To activate a desired preset memory
number select P1, P2 or P3, then
select On and confirm.
When a program is activated P and
Y will be displayed together.
To deactivate a preset memory,
select P1, P2 or P3, then select Off
and confirm.
Heating stops automatically
5 minutes after the programmed
departure time.
Notice
The remote control system features
a temperature sensor which
calculates the runtime according to
the ambient temperature and the
desired heating level (ECO or
HIGH). The system starts
automatically between
5 and 60 minutes prior to the
programmed departure time.
Set time and weekday Þ
If the vehicle battery is disconnected
or its voltage is too low, the unit will
need to be reset.
Select F in the menu bar and
confirm.
Select Þ in the menu bar and
confirm.
Adjust using k or l to change
the hour and confirm.
Adjust using k or l to change
the minutes and confirm.
Press d to exit.
Select F in the menu bar and
confirm.
Select Mo in the menu bar and
confirm.
Adjust using k or l to change
the weekday and confirm.
Press d to exit.
Heating level
The preferred heating level for
programmed departure times can be
set to either ECO or HIGH.
Select Y in the menu bar and
confirm.
Select ECO or HIGH and confirm.
Press d to exit.
Operation (Type B)
Heating Y or Ventilation x
Select the operating mode Y or x, if
necessary.
Press l three times.
Press Y and OFF
simultaneously, Y or x flashes.
Adjust using k or l to select Y
or x.
Press Y and OFF simultaneously
to confirm.
To switch on, press Y for 1 second.
The predetermined heating duration,
e.g. 30, is displayed. The factory
setting is 30 minutes.
The heating duration can be set in
increments of 10 minutes. Due to the
power consumption, note the heating
duration.
Press l four times.
Press Y and OFF
simultaneously, Y/x flashes.
Adjust using k or l to select the
desired heating duration.
Press Y and OFF simultaneously
to confirm.
218 Climate control
To switch off, press OFF.
Programming y
The system calculates the operating
time of the heater depending on the
temperature inside the vehicle.
Press k twice.
Press Y and OFF
simultaneously, y flashes.
Adjust using k or l to select the
departure time.
Press Y and OFF simultaneously
to confirm.
To switch on, press Y for one second,
HTM is displayed.
Heating stops automatically after the
programmed departure time, or can
be manually switched off.
Press k twice.
Press OFF for 1 second, HTM
goes out.
Set time
If the vehicle battery is disconnected
or its voltage is too low, the time will
need to be reset.
Press l once.
Press Y and OFF
simultaneously, Ö flashes.
Adjust using k or l to set the
time.
Press Y and OFF simultaneously
to confirm.
Heating level
The preferred heating level for
programmed departure times can be
set to between C1 and C5.
Press k three times.
Press Y and OFF
simultaneously, Y flashes.
Adjust using k or l to set the
heating level.
Press Y and OFF simultaneously
to confirm.
To display the passenger
compartment temperature, press l
twice.
Air vents
Adjustable air vents
At least one air vent must be open
while cooling is on in order to prevent
the evaporator from icing up due to
lack of air movement.
Centre air vents
Direct the flow of air by tilting and
swivelling the slats.
To close the vent, swivel the slat
towards the outside of the vehicle.
Climate control 219
Side air vents
Direct the flow of air by tilting and
swivelling the slats.
To close the vent, swivel the slat
towards the outside of the vehicle.
9Warning
Do not attach any objects to the
slats of the air vents. Risk of
damage and injury in the event of
an accident.
Combi
Adjustable air vents may be located in
the roof frame. To open, press air
vent. Hold air vent and turn it to the
required position to direct the airflow.
Bus
Adjustable air vents may be located in
the roof frame above the seats. Turn
adjuster to increase / decrease
airflow to the appropriate seat.
Fixed air vents
Additional air vents are located
beneath the windscreen and door
windows and in the foot wells.
Glovebox cooler
The air conditioning system can also
keep the contents of the glovebox
cool.
220 Climate control
Maintenance
Air intake
The air intake in front of the
windscreen in the engine
compartment must be kept clear to
allow air intake. Remove any leaves,
dirt or snow.
Air conditioning regular
operation
In order to ensure continuously
efficient performance, cooling must
be operated for a few minutes once a
month, irrespective of the weather
and time of year. Operation with
cooling is not possible when outside
temperature is too low.
Service
For optimal cooling performance, it is
recommended to annually check the
climate control system, starting
3 years after initial vehicle
registration, including:
functionality and pressure test
heating functionality
leakage check
check of drive belts
cleaning of condenser and
evaporator drainage
performance check
Notice
Refrigerant R-134a may contain
fluorinated greenhouse gases with a
global warming potential of 1430.
Front air conditioning system is filled
with 0.58 kg and has a CO2
equivalent of 0.83 tonnes, the front
and rear air conditioning system in
Combi variants is filled with 1.1 kg
and has a CO2 equivalent of
1.57 tonnes and the front and rear air
conditioning system in Bus variants
is filled with 1.7 kg and has a CO2
equivalent of 2.43 tonnes.
Depending on vehicle, information
regarding air conditioning refrigerant
appears on a label located in the
engine compartment.
Driving and operating 221
Driving and
operating
Driving hints ............................... 222
Driving economically ............... 222
Control of the vehicle ............... 222
Steering ................................... 222
Starting and operating ............... 223
New vehicle running-in ............ 223
Ignition switch positions ........... 223
Starting the engine .................. 224
Idle speed control .................... 225
Overrun cut-off ........................ 225
Stop-start system .................... 225
Parking .................................... 228
Air suspension ......................... 228
Engine exhaust .......................... 230
Diesel particle filter .................. 230
Catalytic converter ................... 231
AdBlue ..................................... 231
Manual transmission .................. 238
Manual transmission automa‐
ted .............................................. 238
Transmission display ............... 238
Starting the engine .................. 239
Selector lever .......................... 239
Manual mode ........................... 240
Electronic driving programmes 240
Fault ........................................ 241
Interruption of power supply .... 241
Brakes ........................................ 241
Antilock brake system ............. 241
Parking brake .......................... 242
Brake assist ............................. 243
Hill start assist ......................... 243
Ride control systems ................. 244
Traction Control system .......... 244
Electronic Stability Control ...... 245
Limited-slip rear axle ............... 246
Driver assistance systems ......... 246
Cruise control .......................... 246
Speed limiter ........................... 248
Active emergency braking ....... 250
Parking assist .......................... 252
Side blind spot alert ................. 254
Rear view camera ................... 256
Lane departure warning .......... 258
Fuel ............................................ 259
Fuel for diesel engines ............ 259
Refuelling ................................ 260
Trailer hitch ................................ 262
General information ................. 262
Driving characteristics and
towing tips .............................. 262
Trailer towing ........................... 262
Towing equipment ................... 263
Trailer stability assist ............... 263
Auxiliary features ....................... 263
Power take-off ......................... 263
222 Driving and operating
Driving hints
Driving economically
ECO mode
ECO mode is a function that
optimises fuel consumption. It affects
engine power and torque,
acceleration, gear shift indication,
heating, air conditioning and electrical
consumers.
Activation
Press ECO. When activated ECO
appears in the Driver Information
Centre.
During driving, it is possible to
temporarily disable ECO mode, e.g.
to increase engine performance, by
depressing the accelerator pedal
firmly.
ECO mode is reactivated when
pressure is reduced on the
accelerator pedal.
Deactivation
Press ECO again. ECO disappears in
the Driver Information Centre.
Driver Information Centre 3 103.
Control of the vehicle
Never coast with engine not
running (except during Autostop)
Many systems will not function in this
situation (e.g. brake servo unit, power
steering). Driving in this manner is a
danger to yourself and others. All
systems function during an Autostop,
but there may be a controlled
reduction in power steering assist and
vehicle speed is reduced.
Stop-start system 3 225.
Pedals
To ensure the pedal travel is
uninhibited, there must be no mats in
the area of the pedals.
Use only floor mats which fit properly
and are fixed by the retainers on the
driver's side.
Driving downhill
Engage a gear when driving downhill
to ensure that sufficient brake
pressure is available.
Steering
If power steering assist is lost
because the engine stops or due to a
system malfunction, the vehicle can
be steered but may require increased
effort.
Caution
Vehicles equipped with hydraulic
power steering:
If the steering wheel is turned until
it reaches the end of its travel, and
is held in that position for more
Driving and operating 223
than 15 seconds, damage may
occur to the power steering
system and there may be loss of
power steering assist.
Starting and operating
New vehicle running-in
Do not brake unnecessarily hard for
the first few journeys and after new
disc brake pads have been fitted.
During the first drive, smoke may
occur because of wax and oil
evaporating off the exhaust system.
Park the vehicle in the open for a
while after the first drive and avoid
inhaling the fumes.
Limit the engine speed to 2,500/min
for the first 900 miles.
During the running-in period fuel and
engine oil consumption may be
higher and the cleaning process of
the diesel particle filter may take
place more often. Autostop may be
inhibited to allow for charging the
vehicle battery.
Stop-start system 3 225.
Diesel particle filter 3 230.
Ignition switch positions
Turn key:
0: ignition off: Some functions
remain active until key is
removed or driver's door is
opened, provided the ignition was
on previously
1: accessory power mode: Steering
wheel lock released, some
electrical functions are operable,
ignition is off
2: ignition is on, diesel engine is
preheating. Control indicators
illuminate and most electrical
functions are operable
3: engine start: Release key after
starting procedure begins
224 Driving and operating
Steering wheel lock
Remove key from ignition switch and
turn steering wheel until it engages.
9Danger
Never remove the key from
ignition switch during driving as
this will cause steering wheel lock.
Starting the engine
Manual transmission: operate clutch.
Manual transmission automated:
operate brake; transmission
automatically shifts to N.
Do not accelerate.
Turn the key to position 2 for
preheating, and hold until control
indicator N extinguishes.
Notice
Depending on vehicle, if a gear is
engaged during preheating, a
message may appear in the Driver
Information Centre 3 103 indicating
that the clutch pedal must be
depressed when starting the engine.
Turn key to position 3 and release.
The increased engine speed
automatically returns to normal idling
speed as the engine temperature
rises.
Start attempts should not last longer
than 15 seconds. If engine does not
start, wait 15 seconds before
repeating starting procedure. If
necessary, depress accelerator
before repeating starting procedure.
Notice
Rear-wheel drive with twin rear
wheels and front-wheel drive: When
starting on a level surface with an
unladen vehicle, it is recommended
that second gear is selected when
starting off.
Before restarting or to switch off the
engine, turn key back to 0.
During an Autostop, the engine can
be started by depressing the clutch
pedal.
Stop-start system 3 225.
Turbo engine warm-up
Upon start-up, engine available
torque may be limited for a short time,
especially when the engine
temperature is low. The limitation is to
allow the lubrication system to fully
protect the engine.
Driving and operating 225
Idle speed control
To increase the idle speed press the
switch. After a few seconds the
function will be activated.
The function will be deactivated
when:
The clutch pedal is depressed.
The accelerator pedal is
depressed.
The manual transmission
automated is not in N (neutral).
Vehicle speed is above 0 mph.
Control indicator j, W or C
illuminate in the instrument
cluster.
To increase or decrease the fast idle
speed rate, consult a workshop.
Notice
When the fast idle function is
activated, the stop-start system is
automatically deactivated.
Stop-start system 3 225.
Overrun cut-off
The fuel supply is automatically cut off
during overrun, i.e. when the vehicle
is driven with a gear engaged but
accelerator pedal is released.
Depending on driving conditions, the
overrun cut-off may be deactivated.
Stop-start system
The stop-start system helps to save
fuel and to reduce the exhaust
emissions. When conditions allow, it
switches off the engine as soon as the
vehicle is at a low speed or at a
standstill, e.g. at a traffic light or in a
traffic jam.
It restarts the engine automatically as
soon as the clutch pedal is depressed
(manual transmission) or the brake
pedal is released (manual
transmission automated).
A vehicle battery sensor ensures that
an Autostop is only performed if the
vehicle battery is sufficiently charged
for a restart.
Activation
The stop-start system is available as
soon as the engine is started, the
vehicle starts-off and the conditions
as stated below in this section are
fulfilled.
If the below conditions are not
fulfilled, an Autostop is prohibited and
control indicator \ illuminates in the
Driver Information Centre 3 101.
226 Driving and operating
Deactivation
Deactivate the stop-start system
manually by pressing ).
Deactivation is indicated when the
LED in the button illuminates.
To reactivate, press ) again. The
LED extinguishes in the button. The
system is reactivated automatically
the next time the ignition is switched
on.
Notice
When the fast idle function is
activated, the stop-start system is
automatically deactivated and
cannot be reactivated by pressing
Ï. LED in button illuminates to
indicate deactivation and a
corresponding message may
appear in the Driver Information
Centre 3 103.
Idle speed control 3 225.
Autostop
Manual transmission
If the vehicle is at low speed or
standstill, activate an Autostop as
follows:
depress the clutch pedal
move the selector lever to neutral
release the clutch pedal
Control indicator Ï may flash if the
clutch is not released sufficiently.
Manual transmission automated
If the vehicle is at a standstill, activate
an Autostop as follows:
selector lever in position D, M or
N
depress brake pedal firmly
do not accelerate
The engine will be switched off while
the ignition stays on if the required
conditions are fulfilled.
An Autostop is indicated when Ï
illuminates 3 101.
During an Autostop, the heating
performance, power steering and
brake performance will be
maintained. Brake assist, however, is
not available 3 243.
Notice
If you exit the vehicle while the
engine is in an Autostop, a warning
chime will sound as a reminder that
the engine is on standby and has not
been switched off.
9Warning
Switch off engine and ignition
before exiting the vehicle.
Conditions for an Autostop
The stop-start system checks if each
of the following conditions is fulfilled,
otherwise an Autostop will be
inhibited and control indicator \ will
illuminate.
the stop-start system is not
manually deactivated
the bonnet is fully closed
Driving and operating 227
the vehicle battery is sufficiently
charged and in good condition
the engine is warmed up
the engine coolant temperature is
not too high
the ambient temperature is not
too low
the altitude is not too high
the slope is not too steep
the defrosting function is not
activated
the parking assist is not in
operation
the climate control system does
not inhibit an Autostop
the rear air conditioning system is
not activated
the brake vacuum is sufficient
the self-cleaning function of the
diesel particle filter is not active
3 230
the vehicle has moved since the
last Autostop
An Autostop may become
unavailable as the ambient
temperature approaches freezing
point.
Certain settings of the climate control
system may also inhibit an Autostop.
See "Climate control" chapter for
further information 3 205.
Immediately after motorway driving
an Autostop may be inhibited.
New vehicle running-in 3 223.
Vehicle battery discharge protection
To ensure reliable engine restarts,
several vehicle battery discharge
protection features are implemented
as part of the stop-start system.
Restart of the engine by the driver
Manual transmission
With the selector lever in neutral,
depress the clutch pedal to restart the
engine.
Notice
If any gear is selected, the clutch
pedal must be fully depressed to
restart the engine.
If the engine does not restart first
time, depress clutch pedal fully again.
Manual transmission automated
With the selector lever in position D,
M or N and the parking brake
released, release the brake pedal to
restart the engine.
Engaging reverse gear or depressing
the accelerator pedal may also restart
the engine.
The control indicator Ï will extinguish
when the engine is restarted. If
certain conditions are not fulfilled, a
restart will not take place. Start using
the ignition key.
Starting the engine 3 224.
Bus
The engine is restarted automatically
when operating the power sliding
door switch on the instrument panel
during an Autostop.
Sliding door 3 29.
228 Driving and operating
Restart of the engine by the stop-
start system
If one of the conditions for an
Autostop is not fulfilled anymore or
the vehicle starts to move, the engine
may be restarted automatically by the
stop-start system.
An automatic engine restart may not
be possible if a door or the bonnet is
open.
If an electrical accessory, e.g. a
portable CD player, is connected to
the power outlet, a brief power drop
during restart might be noticeable.
If the Infotainment system is active,
audio sound may briefly be reduced
or interrupted during the restart.
Fault
If the LED illuminates in deactivation
button ) without first being pressed
to deactivate the system, there is a
fault in the stop-start system and it is
deactivated. A corresponding
message also appears in the Driver
Information Centre 3 103.
Seek the assistance of a workshop.
Parking
9Warning
Do not park the vehicle on an
easily ignitable surface. The
high temperature of the
exhaust system could ignite the
surface.
Always apply parking brake
without pressing release
button. Apply as firmly as
possible on a downhill slope or
uphill slope. Depress brake
pedal at the same time to
reduce operating force.
Switch off the engine.
If the vehicle is on a level
surface or uphill slope, engage
first gear. On an uphill slope,
turn the front wheels away from
the kerb.
If the vehicle is on a downhill
slope, engage reverse gear.
Turn the front wheels towards
the kerb.
Close the windows.
Turn the ignition key to position
0 and remove it. Turn the
steering wheel until the
steering wheel lock is felt to
engage.
Lock the vehicle 3 23 and activate the
anti-theft locking system 3 34 and
anti-theft alarm system 3 35.
Air suspension
Operates automatically when the
vehicle is driven. The air suspension
system constantly adjusts the ride
height according to the vehicle load.
Caution
To ensure safe operation of the air
suspension system, do not exceed
the maximum permissible gross
vehicle weight rating. Refer to
identification plate 3 313 or the
vehicle documents.
Driving and operating 229
For further information on the air
suspension system, refer to the
operating instructions supplied.
Master switch
Caution
The air suspension system must
be switched off when the vehicle is
being towed, jump‐started, raised
off the ground or transported.
Do not switch off the air
suspension system when driving.
Jump starting 3 301.
Towing the vehicle 3 304.
The master switch is located on the
lower part of the right-hand door pillar,
behind a trim panel.
Switch on to enable operation and
adjustment of the air suspension
system.
Switch off to put the vehicle into
service mode.
Remote control
When increased ground clearance or
improved vehicle access is required,
the suspension can be raised or
lowered using the remote control.
Caution
Ensure there is adequate
clearance and that there are no
obstructions when adjusting the
suspension height.
The remote control unit is magnetic
and may be fixed to any metal part of
the vehicle or stored in its holder.
With the engine running, press the
appropriate button for two seconds to
adjust the suspension height.
Indicator light will flash intermittently
while height adjustment is in progress
and illuminates when complete.
If the ignition is switched on with
engine not running, the suspension
height can only be lowered.
Notice
Handle with care, protect from
moisture and high temperatures and
avoid unnecessary operation.
Pre-programmed settings
Adjusts the suspension height to one
of three pre-programmed positions.
230 Driving and operating
l: lowered position
k: normal position
j: raised position
Caution
If an obstacle is detected while
raising or lowering, the
suspension height is returned to
the normal position after a delay.
This does not guarantee damage-
free operation. Ensuring sufficient
clearance and freedom from
obstacles is the responsibility of
the driver.
Manual settings
Manual adjustment can only be
performed when the vehicle is
stationary.
Select by pressing h for 2 seconds,
then R to raise, or S to lower.
To exit, press any of the pre-
programmed buttons.
Notice
Obstacle detection is not available
during manual adjustment.
When a certain low speed is
exceeded or when the ignition is
switched off, height adjustment is
deactivated automatically and the
suspension height is returned to the
normal position.
Service mode
When the vehicle is stationary, press
i for 5 seconds to put the vehicle into
service mode. The indicator light will
illuminate.
When service mode has been
activated, the air suspension master
switch must be turned off.
To exit service mode, press i again
for 5 seconds.
Fault
If a fault is detected, i will flash
intermittently. If service mode has
been activated and there is a fault, h,
S and R will flash simultaneously.
Have the cause of the fault remedied
by a workshop.
Engine exhaust
9Danger
Engine exhaust gases contain
poisonous carbon monoxide,
which is colourless and odourless
and could be fatal if inhaled.
If exhaust gases enter the interior
of the vehicle, open the windows.
Have the cause of the fault
rectified by a workshop.
Avoid driving with an open load
compartment, otherwise exhaust
gases could enter the vehicle.
Diesel particle filter
The diesel particle filter system filters
soot particles out of the exhaust
gases. The system includes a self-
cleaning function that runs
automatically during driving without
any notification.
The filter is cleaned by periodically
burning off the soot particles at high
temperature. This process takes
place automatically under set driving
Driving and operating 231
conditions. Autostop is not available
and fuel consumption may be higher
during this period. The emission of
smells and smoke during this process
is normal.
Under certain driving conditions, e.g.
short distances, the system cannot
clean itself automatically.
If cleaning of the filter is required and
if previous driving conditions did not
enable automatic cleaning, it will be
indicated by illumination of control
indicator j 3 98. Seek the
assistance of a workshop
immediately.
Caution
If the cleaning process is
interrupted, there is a risk of
provoking severe engine damage.
Cleaning takes place quickest at high
engine speeds and loads.
Catalytic converter
The catalytic converter reduces the
amount of harmful substances in the
exhaust gases.
Caution
Fuel grades other than those listed
on page 3 259 could damage the
catalytic converter or electronic
components.
Unburnt fuel will overheat and
damage the catalytic converter.
Therefore avoid excessive use of
the starter, running the fuel tank
dry and starting the engine by
pushing or towing.
In the event of misfiring, uneven
engine running, a reduction in engine
performance or other unusual
problems, have the cause of the fault
rectified by a workshop as soon as
possible. In an emergency, driving
can be continued for a short period,
keeping vehicle speed and engine
speed low.
If control indicator Z flashes, the
permitted emission limits may be
exceeded. Lift your foot off the
accelerator until Z stops flashing and
is steadily illuminated. Contact a
workshop immediately.
Malfunction indicator light 3 97.
AdBlue
General information
The selective catalytic reduction is a
method to substantially reduce the
nitrogen oxides in the exhaust
emission. This is achieved by
injecting a Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF) into the exhaust system.
The designation of this fluid is
AdBlue®. It is a non-toxic, non-
flammable, colourless and odourless
fluid which consists of 32% urea and
68% water.
232 Driving and operating
9Warning
Avoid contact of your eyes or skin
with AdBlue.
In case of eye or skin contact,
rinse off with water.
Caution
Avoid contact of the paintwork with
AdBlue.
In case of contact, rinse off with
water.
AdBlue freezes at a temperature of
approx. -11 °C. As the vehicle is
equipped with an AdBlue pre-heater,
the emissions reduction at low
temperatures is ensured. The AdBlue
pre-heater works automatically.
Level warnings
The AdBlue consumption is approx.
4.3 l per 600 miles (660 mpg) and
depends on the driving behaviour.
AdBlue gauge 3 91.
Level warnings in the Driver
Information Centre
If the AdBlue level falls below a
certain value, a level warning will be
displayed in the Driver Information
Centre 3 103.
Additionally, control indicator ú
illuminates continuously together with
a warning chime.
Refill the AdBlue tank as soon as
possible. Refer to "Refilling AdBlue"
below.
If AdBlue is not refilled within a certain
distance, further level warnings are
displayed in the Driver Information
Centre depending on the current
AdBlue level.
Engine restarts prevented
Subsequent requests to refill AdBlue
and finally the announcement that an
engine restart will be prevented are
displayed in the Driver Information
Centre.
Notice
These restrictions are a legal
requirement.
Warning stages: level warnings,
engine restarts prevented
1. The warning message TOP UP
ADBLUE is displayed after the
ignition is switched on and the
range is less than 1500 miles.
Driving is possible without any
restrictions.
Refill the AdBlue tank soon.
2. ú illuminates and the warning
message TOP UP ADBLUE is
displayed after the ignition is
switched on and the range is less
than 930 or 745 miles.
Driving and operating 233
Refill the AdBlue tank soon.
3. ú illuminates and the warning
message XXXX KM FAILURE
TOP UP ADBLUE is displayed
after the ignition is switched on
and the range is less than 620 or
500 miles. The message is
repeated every 62 miles. When
the range is less than 124 miles
the message is repeated every 31
miles.
Vehicle speed may be limited to
12 mph after switching the engine
off and on again until the range is
reduced to 0 miles.
Refill the tank completely or with a
volume of at least 10 l of AdBlue
(depending on AdBlue
consumption) as soon as
possible.
4. Y illuminates during driving with
warning message 0KM FAILURE
TOP UP ADBLUE:
The engine cannot be restarted
after switching off the ignition.
To allow the engine to be
restarted, refill the tank
completely or with a volume of at
least 10 l of AdBlue (depending on
AdBlue consumption) as soon as
possible.
Illumination of control indicator Y may
be accompanied by a warning chime.
Warning chimes 3 105.
High emission warnings
If the exhaust emission rises above a
certain value, warnings similar to the
range warnings as described above
will be displayed in the Driver
Information Centre. Control indicator
ú illuminates continuously together
with j 3 98 and a warning chime.
Requests to have the exhaust system
checked and finally the
announcement that an engine restart
will be prevented are displayed in the
Driver Information Centre.
Notice
These restrictions are a legal
requirement.
Seek the assistance of a workshop as
soon as possible.
Warning stages: high emission
warnings
1. ú and j illuminate with warning
message Check Anti- Pollution
System.
Fault in the system that may result
in a loss of engine power.
Seek the assistance of a
workshop as soon as possible.
2. ú and j illuminate with warning
message xxxKM failure
antipollution.
Indicates that in less than 620 or
500 miles an engine restart will be
prohibited after switching off the
ignition. This warning message
will be repeated every 62 miles.
When the range is less than 124
miles the message is repeated
every 31 miles.
Vehicle speed may be limited to
12 mph after switching the engine
off and on again until the range is
reduced to 0 miles.
234 Driving and operating
Seek the assistance of a
workshop as soon as possible.
3. ú and j illuminate with warning
message 0KM failure
antipollution.
The engine cannot be restarted
after switching off the ignition.
Seek the assistance of a
workshop.
Illumination of control indicators ú
and j may be accompanied by a
warning chime.
Warning chimes 3 105.
Version without level warnings in the
Driver Information Centre
When the AdBlue gauge shows the
level is very low, control indicator ú
first illuminates continuously, then as
AdBlue level drops to a certain
amount ú flashes for a few seconds
then illuminates continuously.
Refill the AdBlue tank as soon as
possible. Refer to "Refilling AdBlue"
below.
Driving is possible without any
restrictions.
Notice
These restrictions are a legal
requirement.
Warning stages: level warnings,
engine power loss
1. Range A. No control indicator:
Driving is possible without any
restrictions.
2. Range B. Control indicator ú
illuminates:
Refill the AdBlue tank as soon as
possible.
3. Range C. Control indicator ú
flashes for a few seconds each
time the ignition is switched on,
then illuminates continuously:
Refill the AdBlue tank as soon as
possible.
4. Range D. Control indicator ú
flashes for a few seconds each
time the ignition is switched on
then illuminates continuously,
accompanied by a warning chime:
Loss of engine power.
Refill the tank completely or with a
volume of at least 10 l of AdBlue
(depending on AdBlue
consumption) as soon as
possible.
5. Range E. Tank is empty and ú
flashes accompanied by warning
chimes:
Driving and operating 235
Vehicle speed will be limited to
12 mph after switching the engine
off and on again.
Refill the tank completely or with a
volume of at least 10 l of AdBlue
(depending on AdBlue
consumption) as soon as
possible.
High emission warnings
If the exhaust emission rises above a
certain value, control indicator ú
illuminates together with j 3 98.
Consult a workshop as soon as
possible.
Notice
These restrictions are a legal
requirement.
Warning stages: high emission
warnings
1. ú and j illuminate:
Fault in the system.
Seek the assistance of a
workshop as soon as possible.
2. ú and j flash when the engine
is started then illuminate
continuously:
Fault in the system resulting in a
loss of engine power.
Seek the assistance of a
workshop as soon as possible.
3. ú and j flash:
Fault in the system.
Vehicle speed will be limited to
12 mph after switching the engine
off and on again.
Seek the assistance of a
workshop as soon as possible.
Illumination of control indicators ú
and j may be accompanied by a
warning chime.
Warning chimes 3 105.
Refilling AdBlue
Caution
Only use AdBlue that complies
with European standards
DIN 70 070 and ISO 22241-1.
Do not use additives.
Do not dilute AdBlue.
Otherwise the selective catalytic
reduction system could be
damaged.
236 Driving and operating
Notice
If AdBlue must be refilled at very low
temperatures, the refilling of AdBlue
may not be detected by the system.
In this case, park the vehicle in a
space with a higher ambient
temperature until AdBlue is
liquefied.
Notice
If engine starting is prohibited due to
low AdBlue level, we recommend
refilling the tank completely or with a
volume of at least 10 l of AdBlue
(depending on AdBlue
consumption).
Avoid minor top-ups (e.g. less than
10 l), otherwise the system may not
detect a refill.
Notice
When unscrewing the protective cap
from the filler neck, ammonia fumes
may emerge. Do not inhale as the
fumes have a pungent smell. The
fumes are not harmful by inhalation.
The vehicle must be parked on a level
surface.
The filler neck for AdBlue is located
behind the filler flap located on the
right-hand side of the vehicle.
The filler flap can only be opened if
the vehicle is unlocked and the right-
hand door is opened.
9Danger
Vehicles with stop-start system:
The engine must be switched off
and the ignition key removed, to
avoid risk of engine being
restarted automatically by the
system.
Capacities 3 314.
Filling station
9Danger
Follow the operating and safety
instructions of the filling station
when refilling AdBlue.
1. Switch off engine and remove key
from ignition switch.
2. Open right-hand door and pull fuel
filler flap to open.
3. Unscrew blue protective cap
anticlockwise from the filler neck.
4. Fully insert the pump nozzle into
the filler neck and switch it on.
5. When refilling is complete, mount
the protective cap and turn
clockwise until it engages.
6. Close filler flap and right-hand
door.
Driving and operating 237
AdBlue canister
Notice
Only use the designated AdBlue
canisters for refilling, to prevent a
topping-up of too much AdBlue.
Additionally, the fumes in the tank
are captured in the canister and do
not emerge.
Notice
Since AdBlue has a limited
durability, check the date of expiry
before refilling.
1. Switch off engine and remove key
from ignition switch.
2. Open right-hand door and pull fuel
filler flap to open.
3. Unscrew blue protective cap
anticlockwise from the filler neck.
4. Open AdBlue canister.
5. Mount one end of the hose on the
canister and screw the other end
on the filler neck.
6. Lift the canister until it is empty, or
until the flow from the canister has
stopped. This can take up to five
minutes.
7. Place the canister on the ground
to empty the hose, wait
15 seconds.
8. Unscrew the hose from the filler
neck.
9. Mount the protective cap and turn
clockwise until it engages.
10. Close filler flap and right-hand
door.
Notice
Dispose of AdBlue canister
according to environmental
requirements. Hose can be reused
after flushing with clear water before
AdBlue dries out.
Notice
Allow the vehicle to idle for at least
ten seconds to allow the system to
detect the AdBlue refill.
Failure to observe this procedure will
result in the system only recognising
the AdBlue refill after approx.
20 minutes of driving.
If the AdBlue refill is detected
successfully, AdBlue level warnings
will disappear.
If the AdBlue refill is not detected
some time after running the engine,
seek the assistance of a workshop.
Filler cap
Only use genuine filler caps. AdBlue
tank has a special filler cap.
Fault
If the system detects an operating
fault, control indicator ú illuminates
together with j and a warning
chime. Seek the assistance of a
workshop immediately.
Depending on version, a
corresponding message may also
appear in the Driver Information
Centre 3 103.
238 Driving and operating
Manual transmission
To engage reverse, with the vehicle
stationary depress the clutch pedal,
pull up the collar on the selector lever
and engage the gear.
If the gear does not engage, set the
lever to neutral, release the clutch
pedal and depress again, then repeat
gear selection.
Do not slip the clutch unnecessarily.
When operating, depress the clutch
pedal completely. Do not use the
pedal as a foot rest.
Caution
It is inadvisable to drive with hand
resting on the selector lever.
Gear shifting 3 98.
Stop-start system 3 225.
Manual transmission
automated
The manual transmission automated
(MTA) permits manual (manual
mode) or automatic gear shifting
(automatic mode), both with
automatic clutch control.
Transmission display
Shows the mode and current gear.
Driving and operating 239
Starting the engine
Depress the brake pedal when
starting the engine. If the brake pedal
is not depressed, T illuminates in the
transmission display and the engine
cannot be started.
When the brake pedal is depressed,
the transmission automatically shifts
to N (neutral). "N" appears in the
transmission display and the engine
can be started. There may be a slight
delay.
Selector lever
Always move the selector lever in the
appropriate direction as far as it will
go. Upon release, it automatically
returns to the centre position.
N: neutral
D/M : switch between automatic and
manual mode
The transmission display
shows "D" when in automatic
mode.
R: reverse gear
Engage only when vehicle is
stationary. The transmission
display shows "R" when
reverse gear is engaged.
+: shift to a higher gear.
-: shift to a lower gear.
Starting off
When the engine is started, the
transmission is in automatic mode.
Depress the brake pedal and move
the selector lever towards + to
engage first gear.
If R is selected, reverse gear is
engaged. The vehicle starts to move
when the brake pedal is released. To
start off quickly, release the brake
pedal and accelerate immediately
after engaging a gear.
In automatic mode the transmission
shifts to other gears automatically,
dependent on driving conditions.
To engage manual mode, move the
selector lever towards D/M. The
current gear will appear in the
transmission display.
To engage first gear, depress brake
pedal and move selector lever
towards + or -. Shift to a higher or
lower gear by moving selector lever to
+ or -. Gears can be skipped by
moving the selector lever repeatedly
at short intervals.
Stopping the vehicle
In automatic or manual mode,
first gear is engaged and the clutch is
released when the vehicle is stopped.
In R, reverse gear remains engaged.
When stopping on gradients, engage
parking brake or depress the brake
pedal. To prevent overheating of the
clutch, an intermittent audible
240 Driving and operating
warning may sound as a signal to
depress the brake pedal or apply the
parking brake.
Switch off engine if stopping for a
lengthy period, e.g. in traffic jams.
When the vehicle is parked and the
driver's door is opened, a warning
chime will sound if neutral is not
selected or the brake pedal has not
been depressed.
Engine braking
Automatic mode
When driving downhill, the manual
transmission automated does not
shift into higher gears until a fairly
high engine speed has been reached.
It shifts down in good time when
braking.
Manual mode
To utilise the engine braking effect,
select a lower gear in good time when
driving downhill.
Rocking the vehicle
Rocking the vehicle is only
permissible if the vehicle is stuck in
sand, mud, snow or a hole. Move the
selector lever between R and D/M (or
between + and -) in a repeat pattern,
while applying light pressure to the
accelerator pedal. Do not race the
engine and avoid sudden
acceleration.
Parking
Apply the parking brake. The most
recently engaged gear (see
transmission display) remains
engaged. With N, no gear is engaged.
When the ignition is switched off, the
transmission no longer responds to
movement of the selector lever.
If the ignition is not switched off, or the
parking brake has not been applied, a
warning chime will sound upon
opening the driver's door.
Manual mode
If a higher gear is selected when the
engine speed is too low, or a lower
gear when the speed is too high, the
shift is not executed. This prevents
the engine from running at too low or
too high an engine speed.
If engine speed is too low, the
transmission automatically shifts to a
lower gear.
If engine speed is too high, the
transmission only switches to a higher
gear via kickdown.
Electronic driving
programmes
Laden mode kg
Driving and operating 241
It is possible to use the Laden mode
in both manual and automatic modes.
In both cases, the gearshifting
patterns are adapted automatically
for carrying an increased payload.
Activation
Press kg. Control indicator kg is
shown in the transmission display.
The transmission will then select
optimized gearshift patterns.
Deactivation
The Laden mode is switched off by:
pressing kg again
turning off the ignition
Kickdown
If the accelerator pedal is pressed
past the pressure point, the
transmission shifts to a lower gear
depending on engine speed. Full
engine power is available for
acceleration.
If engine speed is too high the
transmission switches to a higher
gear, even in manual mode. Without
kickdown this automatic shift is not
effected in manual mode.
Fault
In the event of a fault, control indicator
W is shown in the transmission
display. Continued driving is possible
provided the vehicle is driven with
care and anticipation.
Have the cause of the fault remedied
by a workshop.
Interruption of power supply
The clutch is not disengaged if there
is an interruption of the power supply
when a gear is engaged. The vehicle
cannot move.
If the vehicle battery is discharged,
start the vehicle using jump leads
3 301.
If the cause of the fault is not a
discharged vehicle battery, seek the
assistance of a workshop.
If neutral cannot be selected, the
vehicle must only be towed with the
drive wheels raised off the ground
3 304.
Towing the vehicle 3 304.
Brakes
The brake system comprises two
independent brake circuits.
If a brake circuit fails, the vehicle can
still be braked using the other brake
circuit. However, braking effect is
achieved only when you depress the
brake pedal firmly. You need to use
considerably more force for this. The
braking distance is extended. Seek
the assistance of a workshop before
continuing your journey.
When the engine is not running, the
support of the brake servo unit
disappears once the brake pedal has
been depressed once or twice.
Braking effect is not reduced, but
braking requires significantly greater
force. It is especially important to bear
this in mind when being towed.
Control indicator R 3 98.
Antilock brake system
Antilock brake system (ABS)
prevents the wheels from locking.
242 Driving and operating
ABS starts to regulate brake pressure
as soon as a wheel shows a tendency
to lock. The vehicle remains
steerable, even during hard braking.
ABS control is made apparent
through a pulse in the brake pedal
and the noise of the regulation
process.
For optimum braking, keep the brake
pedal fully depressed throughout the
braking process, despite the fact that
the pedal is pulsating. Do not reduce
the pressure on the pedal.
Control indicator u 3 98.
Fault
If control indicators u and j
illuminate with a message in the
Driver Information Centre, there is a
fault in the ABS. The brake system
remains operational but without ABS
regulation.
9Warning
If there is a fault in the ABS, the
wheels may be liable to lock due
to braking that is heavier than
normal. The advantages of ABS
are no longer available. During
hard braking, the vehicle can no
longer be steered and may
swerve.
If control indicators u, j, R and
C illuminate, the ABS and ESC are
deactivated and a message is shown
in the Driver Information Centre.
Have the cause of the fault remedied
by a workshop.
Parking brake
9Warning
Always apply parking brake firmly
without operating the release
button, and apply as firmly as
possible on a downhill or uphill
slope.
To release the parking brake, pull
the lever up slightly, press the
release button and fully lower the
lever.
To reduce the operating forces of
the parking brake, depress the
brake pedal at the same time.
Control indicator j 3 98.
Parking 3 228.
Driving and operating 243
Retractable parking brake
Depending on vehicle, the parking
brake lever retracts to the horizontal
position even with the parking brake
applied.
To release the parking brake, press
the release button and pull the lever
up slightly, then return the lever to the
horizontal position.
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up then release it. The lever
returns to the horizontal position.
Brake assist
If the brake pedal is depressed
quickly and forcefully, maximum
brake force is automatically applied
(full braking).
Maintain steady pressure on the
brake pedal for as long as full braking
is required. Maximum brake force is
automatically reduced when the
brake pedal is released.
Brake assist is not available during an
Autostop.
Stop-start system 3 225.
Hill start assist
The system helps prevent unintended
movement when driving away on
inclines, depending on the steepness.
When releasing the brake pedal after
stopping on an incline (with the
selector lever in a forward gear or
reverse gear), the brakes remain on
for a further 2 seconds. The brakes
release automatically as soon as the
vehicle begins to accelerate.
Caution
The hill start assist cannot
completely prevent vehicle
movement in all situations
(extremely steep gradients, etc.).
If necessary, depress the brake
pedal to prevent the vehicle from
rolling backwards.
The hill start assist is not active during
an Autostop.
Stop-start system 3 225.
244 Driving and operating
Ride control systems
Traction Control system
The traction control system is a
component part of the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) which
improves driving stability when
necessary, regardless of the type of
road surface or tyre grip, by
preventing the drive wheels from
spinning.
As soon as the drive wheels start to
spin, engine output is reduced and
the wheel spinning the most is braked
individually. This considerably
improves the driving stability of the
vehicle on slippery road surfaces.
Traction control system is operational
as soon as the ignition is switched on
and control indicator b extinguishes
in the instrument cluster.
When traction control system is active
b flashes.
9Warning
Do not let this special safety
feature tempt you into taking risks
when driving.
Adapt speed to the road
conditions.
Control indicator b 3 99.
Trailer stability assist 3 263.
Enhanced traction function
If necessary, in the event of soft
ground, mud or snow-covered road
surfaces, the traction control system
can be deactivated to enhance
traction:
Press Ø.
A message appears in the Driver
Information Centre.
When vehicle speed reaches
30 mph, the system switches
automatically to standard traction
control system operation. A message
appears in the Driver Information
Centre.
Traction control system is reactivated
by pressing Ø again.
A message appears in the Driver
Information Centre.
Fault
If the system detects a fault, control
indicator b 3 99 illuminates together
with j 3 98 in the instrument cluster
and a corresponding message
appears in the Driver Information
Centre.
Driving and operating 245
The traction control system is not
operational. Have the cause of the
fault remedied by a workshop.
Vehicle messages 3 104.
Driver Information Centre 3 103.
Electronic Stability Control
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
improves driving stability when
necessary, regardless of the type of
road surface or tyre grip. It also
prevents the drive wheels from
spinning.
As soon as the vehicle starts to
swerve (understeer / oversteer),
engine output is reduced and the
wheels are braked individually. This
considerably improves the driving
stability of the vehicle on slippery road
surfaces.
ESC is operational as soon as the
ignition is switched on and control
indicator b extinguishes in the
instrument cluster.
When ESC comes into action b
flashes.
9Warning
Do not let this special safety
feature tempt you into taking risks
when driving.
Adapt speed to the road
conditions.
Control indicator b 3 99.
Trailer stability assist 3 263.
Enhanced traction function
If necessary, in the event of soft
ground, mud or snow-covered road
surfaces, ESC can be deactivated to
enhance traction:
Press Ø.
A message appears in the Driver
Information Centre.
When vehicle speed reaches
30 mph, the system switches
automatically to standard ESC
operation. A message appears in the
Driver Information Centre.
ESC is reactivated by pressing Ø
again.
ESC is also reactivated the next time
the ignition is switched on.
Engine drag torque control
The engine drag torque control
system is an integral feature of ESC.
When downshifting under slippery
road conditions, the engine speed
and torque increases to help prevent
locking of the drive wheels during
sudden deceleration.
Side wind assist
The side wind assist is an integral
feature of ESC and maintaines the
vehicle's path. When the system
comes into action " appears in the
Driver Information Centre.
246 Driving and operating
Fault
If the system detects a fault, control
indicator b 3 99 illuminates together
with j 3 98 in the instrument cluster
and a corresponding message
appears in the Driver Information
Centre 3 103.
The ESC is not operational. Have the
cause of the fault remedied by a
workshop.
Vehicle messages 3 104.
Driver Information Centre 3 103.
Limited-slip rear axle
Rear-wheel drive vehicles may be
equipped with an automatic locking
rear differential which automatically
controls the torque transmitted to
each rear wheel, enhancing traction
in the event of soft ground, mud or
snow-covered road surfaces.
9Warning
Do not let this special safety
feature tempt you into taking risks
when driving.
Adapt speed to the road
conditions.
When vehicle speed reaches
20 mph, or once the rear wheels
return to surfaces with normal grip,
e.g. paved roads, the system
automatically deactivates,
sometimes accompanied by a noise
(with no consequence to vehicle
behaviour).
The system can also be deactivated
manually once normal grip conditions
have resumed by briefly releasing the
accelerator.
Driver assistance
systems
9Warning
Driver assistance systems are
developed to support the driver
and not to replace the driver's
attention.
The driver accepts full
responsibility when driving the
vehicle.
When using driver assistance
systems, always take care
regarding the current traffic
situation.
Cruise control
The cruise control can store and
maintain speeds of 20 mph and
above. Deviations from the stored
speeds may occur when driving uphill
or downhill. The stored speed will
flash in the Driver Information Centre
3 103.
Driving and operating 247
For safety reasons the cruise control
cannot be activated until the brake
pedal has been operated once.
Do not use the cruise control if it is not
advisable to maintain a constant
speed.
With manual transmission
automated, only activate cruise
control in automatic mode.
Control indicators m and U 3 101.
Switching on the system
Press m, control indicator U
illuminates green in the instrument
cluster.
Cruise control is now in standby mode
and a corresponding message
appears in the Driver Information
Centre.
Accelerate to the desired speed and
press < or ]. The current speed is
now stored and maintained and the
accelerator pedal can be released.
Control indicator m illuminates green
in the instrument cluster together with
U and a corresponding message
appears in the Driver Information
Centre.
Vehicle speed can be increased by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
The stored speed flashes in the
instrument cluster. When the
accelerator pedal is released, the
previously stored speed is resumed.
Cruise control remains activated
while gearshifting.
The speed is saved until the ignition
is switched off.
248 Driving and operating
Increase speed
With cruise control active, the vehicle
speed can be increased continuously
or in small increments by holding
down or tapping < repeatedly.
When the switch is released the
current speed is stored and
maintained.
Alternatively, accelerate to the
desired speed and store by pressing
<.
Reduce speed
With cruise control active, the vehicle
speed can be decreased
continuously or in small increments
by holding down or tapping ]
repeatedly.
When the switch is released the
current speed is stored and
maintained.
Deactivation of the functionality
Press $: cruise control is deactivated
and the green control indicator m
extinguishes in the instrument cluster.
Automatic deactivation:
vehicle speed drops below
20 mph
the brake pedal is depressed
the clutch pedal is depressed
selector lever in N
The speed is stored and a
corresponding message appears in
the Driver Information Centre.
Activation of the functionality
Press R at a speed above 20 mph.
If the stored speed is much higher
than the current speed, the vehicle
will accelerate powerfully until the
stored speed is obtained.
Pressing < will also reactivate the
cruise control function, but at the
current vehicle speed only, not the
stored speed.
Switching off the system
Press m, green control indicators U
and m extinguish in the instrument
cluster.
Speed limiter
The speed limiter prevents the
vehicle exceeding a preset maximum
speed above 20 mph.
Driving and operating 249
Switching on the system
Press U, control indicator U
illuminates yellow in the instrument
cluster.
Speed limiter function is now in
standby mode and a corresponding
message appears in the Driver
Information Centre.
Accelerate to the desired speed and
press < or ]. The current speed is
recorded.
The vehicle can be driven normally
but it will not be possible to exceed the
programmed speed limit except in an
emergency.
Where the limit speed cannot be
maintained, e.g. when driving on a
steep decline, the limit speed will
flash in the Driver Information Centre.
Increase limit speed
The limit speed can be increased
continuously or in small increments
by holding down or tapping <
repeatedly.
Reduce limit speed
The limit speed can be decreased
continuously or in small increments
by holding down or tapping ]
repeatedly.
Exceeding the limit speed
In the event of an emergency it is
possible to exceed the limit speed by
depressing the accelerator pedal
firmly beyond the point of resistance.
The limit speed will flash in the Driver
Information Centre during this period.
Release the accelerator pedal and
the speed limiter function is
reactivated once a speed lower than
the limit speed is obtained.
Speed warning 3 102.
250 Driving and operating
Deactivation of the functionality
Press $: speed limiter is deactivated
and the vehicle can be driven
normally.
The limit speed is stored and a
corresponding message appears in
the Driver Information Centre.
Activation of the functionality
Press R. The speed limiter function is
reactivated.
Pressing < will also reactivate the
speed limiter function, but at the
current vehicle speed only, not the
stored speed.
Switching off the system
Press U.
Yellow control indicator U
extinguishes in the instrument cluster.
Active emergency braking
Active emergency braking can help to
reduce the damage and injury from
crashes with vehicles directly ahead,
when a collision can no longer be
avoided either by manual braking or
by steering. The feature uses various
inputs (e.g. camera sensor, radar
sensor, brake pressure, vehicle
speed) to calculate the probability of
a frontal collision.
9Warning
This system is not intended to
replace the driver responsibility for
driving the vehicle and looking
ahead. Its function is limited to
supplemental use only to reduce
the vehicle speed before a
collision.
The system only detects vehicles
driving in the same direction of
traffic.
After a sudden lane change, the
system needs a certain time to
detect the next preceding vehicle.
The driver must always be ready
to take action and apply the brakes
and steer to avoid collisions.
Operation conditions
The system is operational at a vehicle
speed between 3 mph and 87 mph,
stationary vehicles are detected up to
62 mph.
Activation
The system is automatically active
when the ignition is switched on.
Functionality
When driving in the speed range
mentioned above and a risk of
collision with the vehicle ahead is
imminent, l will flash and a warning
chime sounds.
Driving and operating 251
The indicator light l and the chimes
stop when the system detects that a
collision is not imminent anymore.
Just before the imminent collision, the
system brakes automatically to
reduce the impact speed of the
collision or prohibit a crash.
9Warning
Do not rely on the system to brake
the vehicle. Active emergency
braking will not brake outside of its
operating speed range and only
responds to detected vehicles.
Deactivation and re-activation
Active emergency braking can be
deactivated with the vehicle
stationary and the ignition switched
on:
Toggle through the Driver Information
Centre with the buttons on the right
lever until message Active braking
appears.
To deactivate the system, press and
hold one of the two buttons for
approx. 3 seconds. l illuminates in
the instrument cluster until system is
re-activated again.
To re-activate the system, press and
hold one of the two buttons for
approx. 3 seconds. l disappears.
We recommend to deactivate the
system in the vehicle personalisation
in the following cases:
when the vehicle is being towed
before using an automatic car
wash with ignition switched on
if the windscreen has been
damaged close to the camera
if the front bumper has been
damaged
Conditions for re-activation
The Active emergency brake system
can only be re-activated if:
the gear lever is not in neutral
parking brake is not activated
vehicle is not cornering
System limitations
In some cases, the active emergency
braking system may provide an
automatic braking in situations that
seem to be unnecessary, for instance
in parking garages, due to traffic signs
in a curve or due to vehicles in
another lane. This is normal
operation, the vehicle does not need
service. Firmly apply the accelerator
252 Driving and operating
pedal to override the automatic
braking if the situation and the
surroundings permit.
In the following cases, active
emergency braking performance is
limited:
driving on winding or hilly roads
detecting all vehicles, especially
vehicles with a trailer, tractors,
muddy vehicles, etc.
detecting a vehicle when weather
limits visibility, such as in fog,
rain, or snow
driving during nighttime
sensor in the windscreen or radar
unit behind the front bumper
blocked by snow, ice, slush, mud,
dirt, etc.
windscreen damaged or affected
by foreign objects, e.g. stickers
Complete attention is always required
while driving, and you should be
ready to take action and apply the
brakes and / or steer the vehicle to
avoid crashes.
Fault
In case the system requires a service,
a message is displayed in the Driver
Information Centre.
Additionally, warning lights l and
j illuminate at the same time.
When the system detects that its
function is not available, warning light
l or j illuminates and stays on.
Additionally, a message in the Driver
Information Centre appears. The
system may be temporarily disrupted
(for example: radar or camera
obscured by dirt, mud, snow etc.). In
this case, park the vehicle and switch
off the engine. Clean the windscreen
area around the camera and the
detection zone of the radar in the front
bumper. When the warning lights and
messages still appear after starting
the vehicle again, seek the
assistance of a workshop.
Parking assist
9Warning
It is the driver who bears full
responsibility for the parking
manoeuvre.
Always check the surrounding
area while reversing and using the
rear parking assist system.
The parking assist measures the
distance between the vehicle and
obstacles behind and, if available, in
front of the vehicle. It informs and
warns the driver by giving acoustic
signals.
The system consists of four ultrasonic
parking sensors in the rear bumper
and, if available, four ultrasonic
parking sensors in the front bumper.
Driving and operating 253
The ultrasonic parking sensors can
be activated or deactivated in the
settings menu in the Info Display.
Notice
Attached parts in the detection area
cause system malfunction.
Activation
The rear parking assist is activated
when reverse gear is engaged. The
front-rear parking assist is activated
when a gear is engaged. Readiness
for operation is indicated by a brief
acoustic signal.
Indication
The interval between the acoustic
signals becomes shorter as the
vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
When the distance is less than
30 cm, the signal is continuous.
Additionally, the distance to obstacles
is displayed by changing distance
lines in the Info Display.
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated by
pressing =. The LED in the button
illuminates when deactivated.
Depending on version, the system
can also be deactivated in the
settings menu in the Info Display.
Manual deactivation
The system must be deactivated
before towing or if the sensors are
damaged.
Automatic deactivation
The system will automatically be
deactivated when:
the vehicle speed is above
6 mph
selector lever in N
depending on version, when the
vehicle is stationary for more than
approx. 5 seconds and an
obstacle is detected
Fault
If the system detects an operating
fault, a continuous acoustic alarm will
sound for approx. 3 seconds. Consult
a workshop to have the cause of the
fault remedied.
254 Driving and operating
Caution
When reversing, the area should
be free from obstacles which could
impact on the underside of the
vehicle.
Impact to the rear axle, which may
not be visible, could lead to
uncharacteristic changes in the
vehicle handling. In the event of
such an impact, consult a
workshop.
Basic notes on parking assist
system
9Warning
Under certain circumstances,
various reflective surfaces on
objects or clothing as well as
external noise sources may cause
the system to fail to detect
obstacles.
Special attention must be paid to
low obstacles which can damage
the lower part of the bumper.
Caution
Performance of the sensors can
be reduced when sensors are
covered, e.g. by ice or snow.
Performance of the parking assist
system can be reduced due to
heavy loading.
Special conditions apply if there
are taller vehicles involved (e.g.
off-road vehicles, mini vans,
vans). Object identification in the
upper part of these vehicles
cannot be guaranteed.
Objects with a very small reflection
cross-section, e.g. objects of
narrow size or soft materials, may
not be detected by the system.
The parking assist system will not
detect objects which are out of the
detection range of the sensors.
Side blind spot alert
The side blind spot alert system
detects and reports objects on either
side of the vehicle, within a specified
blind spot zone. The system displays
a visual alert in each exterior mirror,
when detecting objects that may not
be visible in the interior and exterior
mirrors.
Side blind spot alert uses some of the
parking assist sensors which are
located in the front and rear bumper
on both sides of the vehicle.
9Warning
Side blind spot alert does not
replace driver vision.
The system does not detect:
vehicles outside the side blind
zones which may be rapidly
approaching
pedestrians, cyclists or animals
Before changing a lane, always
check all mirrors, look over the
shoulder and use the turn signal.
Activation
The system is activated when the
speed of the vehicle is between
approx. 19 mph and 87 mph.
Driving and operating 255
Deactivation
To deactivate the system, press .
with the ignition on. The LED in the
button illuminates when deactivated.
To reactivate the system, press .
again. The LED in the button
extinguishes.
Functionality
When the system detects a vehicle in
the side blind zone while driving
forwards, an LED will illuminate in the
relevant exterior mirror.
The LED comes on immediately when
being passed.
The LED comes on after a delay when
passing another vehicle slowly.
The LED flashes when the turn lights
are activated and a vehicle is
detected.
Operation conditions
The following conditions must be
fulfilled for proper operation:
all vehicles are moving in the
same direction and in adjacent
lanes
the speed of your vehicle is
between 19 mph and 87 mph
the traffic flow is normal
driving on a straight or slightly
curved road
the vehicle is not pulling a trailer
the sensors are not covered by
mud, ice or snow
the warning zones in the exterior
mirrors or the detection zones in
front and rear bumper are not
covered
No alert will be given in the following
situations:
in the presence of non-moving
objects, e.g. parked vehicles,
barriers, street lamps, road signs
in very dense traffic, when
moving vehicles might be
confused with a stationary object
256 Driving and operating
with vehicles moving in the
opposite direction
driving on a winding road or a
sharp corner
when passing or being passed by
a very long vehicle, e.g. lorry,
coach, which is at the same time
detected at the rear in the blind
spot angle and present in the
driver's forward field of vision
when passing too quickly
Fault
In the event of a fault, a
corresponding message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Have the cause of the fault remedied
by a workshop.
Rear view camera
The rear view camera assists the
driver when reversing by displaying a
view of the area behind the vehicle in
either the interior mirror or the Info
Display.
9Warning
The rear view camera does not
replace driver vision. Note that
objects that are outside the
camera's field of view, e.g. below
the bumper or underneath the
vehicle, are not displayed.
Do not reverse the vehicle by only
looking at the display and check
the surrounding area behind and
around the vehicle before
reversing.
The camera is typically installed on
the rear doors, beneath the number
plate moulding.
The area displayed by the camera is
limited. The distance of the image that
appears on the display differs from
the actual distance.
Rear view display 3 40.
Notice
To achieve the optimum visibility, the
rear view camera must not be
obscured by dirt, snow or ice.
Activation
Interior mirror display
The interior mirror display is
automatically activated when reverse
gear is engaged. An audible signal
confirms activation.
Driving and operating 257
Info Display
In vehicles without interior mirror
display, the rear view camera screen
is shown on the Info Display.
Trajectory lane display image (1)
Depending on version, the trajectory
lane (1) of the vehicle is shown in blue
on the Info Display. It shows the path
of the vehicle in accordance with the
steering angle.
Fixed lane display image (2)
The fixed lane display (2) shows the
path of the vehicle if the wheels are
kept straight.
Guide lines (3, 4, 5) are used together
with the fixed lane display (2) and
indicate the distance behind the
vehicle.
The guide line intervals are as
follows:
3 (red) : 30 cm
4 (yellow) : 70 cm
5 (green) : 150 cm
Settings
Settings, e.g. brightness, can be set
via the Infotainment system. Refer to
Infotainment manual for further
information.
Deactivation
The camera is deactivated after a
delay if reverse gear is not engaged.
Fault
The rear view camera may not
operate properly when:
the surrounding is dark
the sun or the beam of headlights
is shining directly into the camera
lens
ice, snow, mud, or anything else
covers the camera lens. Clean
the lens, rinse it with water, and
wipe it with a soft cloth
258 Driving and operating
the rear doors are not closed
correctly
the vehicle had a rear-end
accident
there are extreme temperature
changes
Lane departure warning
The lane departure warning system
uses a front camera to observe the
lane markings between which the
vehicle is driving. The system detects
lane changes and warns the driver in
the event of an unintended lane
change via visual and acoustic
signals.
Criteria for the detection of an
unintended lane change are:
no operation of turn lights
no active steering
If the driver is performing these
actions, no warning will be issued.
Activation
The lane departure warning system is
activated by pressing Q in the centre
console. A corresponding message
appears in the Driver Information
Centre to indicate that the system is
switched on.
When Q 3 99 illuminates in the Driver
Information Centre, the system is
ready to operate 3 103.
Q extinguishes when the system is
not ready to warn the driver.
The system is only operable at
vehicle speeds above approx.
37 mph and if lane markings are
available and detected.
If the turn lights are not operated
when changing lanes, i.e. an
unintended lane change is detected,
control indicator Q flashes together
with a warning chime to alert the
driver.
Driving and operating 259
Deactivation
The system is deactivated by
pressing Q. A corresponding
message appears in the Driver
Information Centre to indicate that the
system is switched off.
At speeds below approx. 37 mph the
system is inoperable.
Operation hints
The lane departure warning system
may not operate properly when:
The windscreen is not clean.
There are adverse environmental
conditions like heavy rain, snow,
direct sunlight or shadows.
Lane departure is very fast.
Acceleration is very strong.
Bends are tight.
Driving continuously on a line.
The system cannot operate when no
lane marking is detected.
Fault
In the event of a fault in the system, a
warning message appears in the
Driver Information Centre (possibly in
combination with control indicator
j).
Seek the assistance of a workshop.
Driver Information Centre 3 103.
Fuel
Fuel for diesel engines
The Diesel engines are compatible
with bio-fuels that conform to current
and future European standards and
can be obtained from filling stations:
Diesel fuel that meets standard
EN590 mixed with a biofuel that
meets standard EN14214 (possibly
containing up to 7% Fatty Acid Methyl
Ester).
260 Driving and operating
Diesel fuel that meets standard
EN16734 mixed with a biofuel that
meets standard EN14214 (possibly
containing up to 10% Fatty Acid
Methyl Ester).
Paraffinic Diesel fuel that meets
standard EN15940 mixed with a
biofuel that meets standard
EN14214 (possibly containing up to
7% Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
If travelling in countries outside the
European Union, occasional use of
Euro-Diesel fuel with a sulphur
concentration below 50 ppm is
possible.
Caution
Frequent usage of diesel fuel
containing more than 15 ppm
sulphur will cause severe engine
damage.
Caution
Use of fuel that does not comply to
EN 590 or similar can lead to
engine powerloss, increased wear
or engine damage and may affect
your warranty.
Do not use marine diesel oils, heating
oils, Aquazole and similar diesel-
water emulsions. Diesel fuels must
not be diluted with fuels for petrol
engines. Do not use additives.
The flow and filterability of diesel fuels
are temperature-dependent. When
temperatures are low, refuel with
diesel fuel with guaranteed winter
properties.
Diesel fuel system bleeding 3 273.
Low temperature operation
At temperatures below 0 °C, some
diesel products with biodiesel blends
may clog, freeze or gel, which may
affect the fuel supply system. Starting
and engine operation may not work
properly. Make sure to fill winter
grade diesel fuel at ambient
temperatures below 0 °C.
Arctic grade diesel fuel can be used
at extremely low temperatures below
-20 °C. Using this fuel grade in warm
or hot climates is not recommended
and may cause engine stalling, poor
starting or damage to the fuel
injection system.
Refuelling
9Danger
Before refuelling, switch off engine
and any external heaters with
combustion chambers. Switch off
any mobile phones.
Follow the operating and safety
instructions of the filling station
when refuelling.
Driving and operating 261
9Danger
Fuel is flammable and explosive.
No smoking. No naked flames or
sparks.
If you can smell fuel in your
vehicle, have the cause of this
remedied immediately by a
workshop.
A label with symbols at the fuel filler
flap is indicating the allowed fuel
types. In Europe the pump nozzles of
the filling stations are marked with
these symbols. Refuel only the
allowed fuel type.
Caution
In case of misfuelling, do not
switch on ignition.
The fuel tank filler neck with bayonet
cap is located on the left front side of
the vehicle.
The fuel filler flap can only be opened
if the vehicle is unlocked and the door
is opened. Open the fuel filler flap by
hand.
9Danger
Vehicles with stop-start system:
The engine must be switched off
and the ignition key removed, to
avoid risk of engine being
restarted automatically by the
system.
Capacities 3 314.
Depending on vehicle, unlock fuel
filler cap using the key.
To open, turn the cap slowly
anticlockwise.
The fuel filler cap can be hung on the
lower hook of the fuel filler flap.
Place the nozzle in straight position to
the filler neck and press with slight
force to insert.
After the automatic cut-off, the tank
can be topped up by operating the
pump nozzle a maximum of two more
times.
Caution
Wipe off any overflowing fuel
immediately.
To close, turn the fuel filler cap
clockwise.
Close the fuel filler flap.
Fuel filler cap
Only use genuine fuel filler caps.
Diesel-engined vehicles have special
fuel filler caps.
262 Driving and operating
Trailer hitch
General information
Only use towing equipment that has
been approved for your vehicle.
Entrust fitting of towing equipment at
a later date to a workshop. It may be
necessary to make changes that
affect the cooling system, heat
shields or other equipment.
Driving characteristics and
towing tips
In the case of trailers with brakes,
attach the breakaway stopping cable.
Before attaching a trailer, lubricate
the coupling ball. However, do not do
so if a stabiliser, which acts on the
coupling ball, is being used to reduce
snaking movements. For trailers with
low driving stability the use of a
stabiliser is recommended.
A maximum speed of 50 mph must
not be exceeded, even in countries
where higher speeds are permitted.
If the trailer starts snaking, drive more
slowly, do not attempt to correct the
steering and brake sharply if
necessary.
When driving downhill, drive in the
same gear as if driving uphill and
drive at a similar speed.
Adjust tyre pressure to the value
specified for full load 3 314.
Trailer towing
Trailer loads
The permissible trailer loads are
vehicle-dependent and engine-
dependent maximum values which
must not be exceeded. The actual
trailer load is the difference between
the actual gross weight of the trailer
and the actual coupling socket load
with the trailer coupled.
The permissible trailer loads are
specified in the vehicle documents. In
general, they are valid for gradients
up to max. 12%.
The permitted trailer load applies up
to the specified incline and up to an
altitude of 1000 m above sea level.
Since engine power decreases as
altitude increases due to the air
becoming thinner, therefore reducing
climbing ability, the permissible gross
train weight also decreases by 10%
for every 1000 m of additional
altitude. The gross train weight does
not have to be reduced when driving
on roads with slight inclines (less than
8%, e.g. motorways).
The permissible gross train weight
must not be exceeded. This weight is
specified on the identification plate
3 313.
Vertical coupling load
The vertical coupling load is the load
exerted by the trailer on the coupling
ball. It can be varied by changing the
weight distribution when loading the
trailer.
The maximum permissible vertical
coupling load is specified on the
towing equipment identification plate
and in the vehicle documents. Always
aim for the maximum load, especially
in the case of heavy trailers. The
vertical coupling load should never
fall below 25 kg.
Driving and operating 263
In the case of trailer loads of
1200 kg or more, the vertical coupling
load should not be less than 50 kg.
Rear axle load
When the trailer is coupled and the
towing vehicle fully loaded (including
all occupants), the permissible rear
axle load (see identification plate or
vehicle documents) can be exceeded
by 15%. If the permissible rear axle
load is exceeded, a maximum speed
of 48 mph applies and the tyre
pressure must be increased by 20
kPA / 3 psi.
Tyre pressure 3 289.
Towing equipment
For vehicles fitted with towing
equipment, when connected to a
trailer the pitch of the audible warning
changes upon operation of the turn
lights.
The pitch of the audible warning will
change if a turn light on the trailer or
the towing vehicle fails.
Trailer stability assist
If the system detects snaking
movements, engine power is reduced
and the vehicle / trailer combination is
selectively braked until the snaking
ceases. While the system is working,
keep steering wheel as still as
possible.
Trailer stability assist is a function of
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
3 245.
Auxiliary features
Power take-off
Activation
To activate the power take-off, with
the vehicle stationary and the engine
idling:
Set the gearshift lever to neutral
(vehicles with manual
transmission automated:
selector lever in position N).
Depress the clutch pedal.
264 Driving and operating
Press switch on the instrument
panel; LED in switch illuminates
after approx. 2 seconds.
Release the clutch pedal.
The engine idle speed increases to
1,200 rpm.
Caution
During operation of the power
take-off, never move the selector
lever out of neutral (vehicles with
manual transmission automated:
selector lever in position N), to
avoid damage to the transmission.
If a gear change becomes
necessary, i.e. to adjust the driving
speed, the power take-off must
always be deactivated first.
Deactivation
To deactivate the power take-off:
Depress the clutch pedal.
Press switch on the instrument
panel; LED in switch
extinguishes after approx.
2 seconds.
Release the clutch pedal.
Fault
If the LED in the switch does not
illuminate when attempting to activate
the power take-off and / or the system
does not operate:
Gradually release the clutch pedal.
- or -
Set the gearshift lever to neutral
(vehicles with manual
transmission automated:
selector lever in position N).
Depress the clutch pedal.
Press switch on the instrument
panel. The LED in switch
illuminates after approx.
2 seconds.
Release the clutch pedal.
Then repeat the above procedure.
Notice
The power take-off function is not
available when control indicator j
3 98, C 3 98 or W 3 99 is
illuminated.
Vehicle care 265
Vehicle care
General Information ................... 266
Accessories and vehicle
modifications .......................... 266
Vehicle storage ........................ 266
End-of-life vehicle recovery ..... 267
Vehicle checks ........................... 267
Performing work ...................... 267
Bonnet ..................................... 267
Engine oil ................................. 268
Engine coolant ......................... 270
Power steering fluid ................. 270
Washer fluid ............................ 270
Brakes ..................................... 271
Brake fluid ............................... 271
Vehicle battery ......................... 271
Diesel fuel system bleeding ..... 273
Wiper blade replacement ........ 274
Bulb replacement ....................... 274
Headlights ............................... 275
Front fog lights ......................... 276
Front turn lights ....................... 276
Tail lights ................................. 277
Side turn lights ......................... 279
Centre high-mounted brake
light ......................................... 279
Number plate light ................... 280
Interior lights ............................ 281
Instrument panel illumination ... 282
Electrical system ........................ 282
Fuses ....................................... 282
Engine compartment fuse box . 284
Instrument panel fuse box ....... 284
Load compartment fuse box .... 285
Vehicle tools .............................. 287
Tools ........................................ 287
Wheels and tyres ....................... 288
Tyres ....................................... 288
Winter tyres ............................. 288
Tyre designations .................... 288
Tyre pressure .......................... 289
Tyre pressure monitoring
system .................................... 290
Tread depth ............................. 292
Changing tyre and wheel size . 292
Wheel covers ........................... 292
Tyre chains .............................. 293
Tyre repair kit .......................... 293
Wheel changing ....................... 296
Spare wheel ............................ 299
Jump starting ............................. 301
Towing ....................................... 304
Towing the vehicle ................... 304
Towing another vehicle ........... 305
Appearance care ....................... 305
Exterior care ............................ 305
Interior care ............................. 307
266 Vehicle care
General Information
Accessories and vehicle
modifications
We recommend the use of genuine
parts and accessories and factory
approved parts specific for your
vehicle type. We cannot assess or
guarantee reliability of other products
- even if they have a regulatory or
otherwise granted approval.
Any modification, conversion or other
changes made to standard vehicle
specifications (including, without
limitation, software modifications,
modifications of the electronic control
units) may invalidate the warranty
offered by Vauxhall. Furthermore,
such changes may affect driver
assistance systems, fuel
consumption, CO2 emissions and
other emissions of the vehicle. They
may also invalidate the vehicle
operating permit.
Caution
When transporting the vehicle on
a train or on a recovery vehicle, the
mud flaps might be damaged.
Vehicle storage
Storage for a long period of time
If the vehicle is to be stored for several
months:
Wash and wax the vehicle.
Have the wax in the engine
compartment and underbody
checked.
Clean and preserve rubber seals.
Change engine oil.
Drain washer fluid reservoir.
Check coolant antifreeze and
corrosion protection.
Adjust tyre pressure to the value
specified for full load.
Park vehicle in a dry, well
ventilated place. Engage first or
reverse gear. Prevent the vehicle
from rolling.
Do not apply parking brake.
Close all doors except front left-
hand door and lock the vehicle.
Disconnect the clamp from the
negative terminal of the vehicle
battery. Note that all systems are
not functional, e.g. anti-theft
alarm system.
Close and lock front left-hand
door.
Putting back into operation
When the vehicle is to be put back into
operation:
Connect the clamp to the
negative terminal of the vehicle
battery. Initialize the power
windows 3 41.
Check tyre pressure.
Fill up the washer fluid reservoir.
Check the engine oil level.
Check the coolant level.
Fit the number plate, if
necessary.
Vehicle care 267
End-of-life vehicle recovery
Information on end-of-life vehicle
recovery centres and the recycling of
end-of-life vehicles is available on our
website, where legally required. Only
entrust this work to an authorised
recycling centre.
Vehicle checks
Performing work
9Warning
Only perform engine compartment
checks when the ignition is off.
The vehicle must not be in an
Autostop 3 225.
The cooling fan may start
operating even if the ignition is off.
9Danger
The ignition system generates
extremely high voltages. Do not
touch.
The caps for topping up the engine oil,
the coolant, the washer fluid and the
oil dipstick handle are yellow for ease
of identification.
Bonnet
Opening
Pull the release lever and return it to
its original position.
268 Vehicle care
Push the safety catch to the side and
open the bonnet.
Depending on version, pull the safety
catch, located slightly beside the
centre, and open the bonnet.
Pull up the support rod from its holder,
then secure it in the hook on the
underside of the bonnet.
If the bonnet is opened during an
Autostop, the engine will be restarted
automatically for safety reasons.
Stop-start system 3 225.
Caution
Ensure the windscreen wiper is
switched off before opening the
bonnet 3 84.
Closing
Before closing the bonnet, press the
support into the holder.
Lower the bonnet and allow it to drop
into the catch from a low height
(20-25 cm). Check that the bonnet is
engaged.
Caution
Do not press the bonnet into the
latch, to avoid dents.
9Warning
In the event of even a minor head-
on collision, have the bonnet
safety catch checked by a
workshop.
Engine oil
Check the engine oil level manually
on a regular basis to prevent damage
to the engine.
Ensure that the correct specification
of engine oil is used.
Recommended fluids and lubricants
3 310.
The maximum engine oil
consumption is 0.6 l per 600 miles.
Check with the vehicle on a level
surface. The engine must be at
operating temperature and switched
off for at least 10 minutes.
Vehicle care 269
Caution
It is the owner's responsibility to
maintain the proper level of an
appropriate quality oil in the
engine.
Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean,
reinsert fully, pull out and read the
engine oil level.
When the engine oil level has
dropped to the MIN mark, top-up
engine oil.
Caution
Do not allow the engine oil level to
drop below the minimum level!
We recommend the use of the same
type of engine oil that was used at the
last change.
Between the MIN and MAX marks a
volume of approx. 1.5 - 2.0 l can be
filled in.
The engine oil level must not exceed
the maximum mark MAX on the
dipstick.
Caution
Overfilled engine oil must be
drained or suctioned out. If the oil
exceeds the maximum level, do
not start the vehicle and contact a
workshop.
To prevent spillage when
replenishing the engine oil, we
recommend using a funnel. Ensure
funnel is securely located onto the
filler pipe.
A stabilisation of the engine oil
consumption will not take place until
the vehicle has been driven several
thousand miles. Only then can the
actual degree of consumption be
established.
If consumption exceeds more than
0.6 l every 600 miles after this
running-in period, consult a
workshop.
Fit the cap on straight and tighten it.
270 Vehicle care
Engine coolant
The factory filled coolant provides
freeze protection down to approx.
-28 °C.
Caution
Only use approved antifreeze.
Coolant level
Caution
Too low a coolant level can cause
engine damage.
If the cooling system is cold, the
coolant level should be just above the
MINI mark. Top up if the level is low.
9Warning
Allow the engine to cool before
opening the cap. Carefully open
the cap, relieving the pressure
slowly.
Top up with antifreeze. If no
antifreeze is available, use clean tap
water or distilled water. Install the cap
tightly. Have the antifreeze
concentration checked and have the
cause of the coolant loss remedied by
a workshop.
If a substantial amount of coolant is
required, it will be necessary to bleed
any trapped air from the cooling
system. Seek the assistance of a
workshop.
Power steering fluid
If an unusual noise is heard during
steering or if the power steering
reacts conspicuously, seek the
assistance of a workshop.
The power steering fluid reservoir is
located below the front left wheel
arch, behind a trim panel. Access is
only possible for a workshop.
Washer fluid
Fill with clean water mixed with a
suitable quantity of windscreen
washer fluid which contains
antifreeze.
Vehicle care 271
Caution
Only washer fluid with a sufficient
antifreeze concentration provides
protection at low temperatures or
a sudden drop in temperature.
Use of washer fluid containing
isopropanol can damage exterior
lamps.
Brakes
In the event of minimum thickness of
the brake lining, a squealing noise
sounds during braking.
Continued driving is possible but
have the brake linings replaced as
soon as possible.
Once new brake linings are installed,
do not brake unnecessarily hard for
the first few journeys.
Brake fluid
9Warning
Brake fluid is poisonous and
corrosive. Avoid contact with eyes,
skin, fabrics and painted surfaces.
The brake fluid level must be between
the MIN and MAX marks.
When topping up, ensure maximum
cleanliness as contamination of the
brake fluid can lead to brake system
malfunctions. Have the cause of the
loss of brake fluid remedied by a
workshop.
Only use brake fluid approved for
your vehicle.
Brake and clutch fluid 3 310.
Vehicle battery
The jump start terminal is located in
the engine compartment.
Jump starting 3 301.
The vehicle battery is maintenance-
free provided that the driving profile
allows sufficient charging of the
battery. Short-distance-driving and
frequent engine starts can discharge
the battery. Avoid the use of
unnecessary electrical consumers.
Control indicator p illuminates if
there is a fault with the charging
system. Stop, switch off engine and
seek the assistance of a workshop.
Charging system 3 97.
272 Vehicle care
Batteries do not belong in household
waste. They must be disposed of at
an appropriate recycling collection
point.
Laying up the vehicle for more than
four weeks can lead to battery
discharge. Disconnect the clamp from
the negative terminal of the vehicle
battery.
9Danger
Ensure the ignition is switched off
completely (the vehicle must not
be in an Autostop) before
connecting or disconnecting the
vehicle battery.
Stop-start system 3 225.
The anti-theft alarm siren must be
deactivated as follows: Switch the
ignition on then off, disconnect the
vehicle's battery within 15 seconds.
Battery discharge protection 3 115.
Battery access
The battery is located behind a panel
in the front left-hand door step.
Remove the panel to access the
battery.
Replacing the vehicle battery
Ensure that the battery is always
replaced by the same type of battery.
Seek the assistance of a workshop to
have the vehicle battery replaced.
Stop-start system 3 225.
Charging the vehicle battery
9Warning
On vehicles with stop-start
system, ensure that the charging
potential does not exceed 14.6 V
when using a battery charger.
Otherwise the vehicle battery may
be damaged.
9Danger
Ensure adequate ventilation when
charging the battery. There is a
risk of explosion if gases
generated during charging are
allowed to accumulate!
Jump starting 3 301.
Vehicle care 273
Warning label
Meaning of symbols:
No sparks, naked flames or
smoking.
Always shield eyes. Explosive
gases can cause blindness or
injury.
Keep the vehicle battery out of
reach of children.
The vehicle battery contains
sulfuric acid which could cause
blindness or serious burn
injuries.
See the Owner's Manual for
further information.
Explosive gas may be present in
the vicinity of the battery.
Additional battery
Depending on the vehicle's auxiliary
equipment, certain models may have
an additional battery mounted under
the right-hand front seat.
Notice
The additional battery is
automatically connected to the main
vehicle battery only when the engine
is running. It does not need to be
manually disconnected before
disconnecting the main vehicle
battery or before jump starting the
vehicle.
The terminals are designed for
additional electrical consumers up to
a maximum of 50 A.
Jump starting 3 301.
Diesel fuel system bleeding
If the fuel tank has been run dry, it will
be necessary to air vent or bleed the
diesel fuel system.
Fill the tank with fuel and proceed as
follows:
Caution
Do not turn ignition key to position
3 before beginning the bleeding
procedure.
Ignition switch positions 3 223.
1. Turn ignition key to position 2 and
wait for a few minutes.
2. Turn key back to position 1 and
wait for 3 seconds.
3. Turn key to position 3.
274 Vehicle care
If the engine cannot be started after
several attempts to bleed the diesel
fuel system, seek the assistance of a
workshop.
Wiper blade replacement
Wiper blades on the windscreen
If required, use the step located below
the headlights to reach the
windscreen wiper.
Lift wiper arm, press retaining clip
towards wiper arm and detach wiper
blade.
Attach the wiper blade slightly angled
to the wiper arm and push until it
engages.
Lower wiper arm carefully.
Bulb replacement
Ensure the ignition is switched off
completely (the vehicle must not be in
an Autostop 3 225) and turn off the
relevant switch or close the doors.
Only hold a new bulb at the base. Do
not touch the bulb glass with bare
hands.
Use only the same bulb type for
replacement.
Have additional lighting bulbs of the
body conversions replaced by a
workshop.
Bulb check
After a bulb replacement, switch on
the ignition, operate and check the
lights.
Performing work 3 267.
Vehicle care 275
Headlights
Headlights have separate systems for
high beam 1 and low beam 2.
High beam
1. Remove the protective cover by
pulling the tab.
2. Press retaining clip downwards
and pull the bulb socket toward
the rear.
3. Detach the bulb from the bulb
socket and replace the bulb.
4. Insert the bulb socket into the
reflector housing.
5. Fit the cap on.
276 Vehicle care
Low beam
1. Remove the protective cover by
pulling the tab.
2. Press retaining clip upwards and
pull the bulb socket toward the
rear.
3. Detach the bulb from the bulb
socket and replace the bulb.
4. Insert the bulb socket into the
reflector housing.
5. Fit the cap on.
Sidelights
Have lights repaired by a workshop in
case of failure.
Front fog lights
Have the front fog light bulbs replaced
by a workshop.
Front turn lights
1. Rotate bulb holder anticlockwise
to disengage.
2. Withdraw bulb holder from
reflector housing.
Vehicle care 277
3. Detach bulb from bulb holder and
renew the bulb.
4. Insert the bulb holder and rotate
clockwise to secure.
Tail lights
Turn light, tail and brake light,
reversing light, rear fog light
1. Remove the upper and lower trim
panels from the rear pillar.
2. Unscrew the two nuts from the
locating pins on the rear of the
lamp assembly.
3. Withdraw the lamp assembly
rearwards from the outer side.
4. Detach wiring connector from
lamp assembly.
5. Remove the three screws from
the rear of the lamp assembly.
6. Remove bulb holder from the
lamp assembly.
278 Vehicle care
7. Push bulb into socket slightly,
rotate anticlockwise, remove and
renew bulb.
Turn light (1)
Tail and brake light (2)
Reversing light (3)
Rear fog light, may be on one side
only (4)
8. Replace bulb holder in lamp
assembly.
9. Replace the three screws on the
rear of the lamp assembly.
10. Reattach wiring connector to lamp
assembly.
11. Replace lamp assembly from the
outer side into original position,
ensuring that it is seated correctly.
12. Replace the two nuts onto the
locating pins on the rear of the
lamp assembly.
13. Install the upper and lower trim
panels to the rear pillar.
Crew Cab, Chassis Cab
Turn light, tail and brake light,
reversing light, rear fog light
1. Remove the four screws from the
lens.
2. Remove lens from the aperture.
3. Push bulb into socket slightly,
rotate anticlockwise, remove and
renew bulb.
Turn light (1)
Tail and brake light (2)
Reversing light (3)
Rear fog light, may be on one side
only (4)
4. Install lens in aperture and
replace the four screws.
Vehicle care 279
Side turn lights
1. Push the lamp assembly to the
right and pull at the left-hand side
of the lamp assembly to release
from the aperture.
2. Detach wiring connector from
lamp assembly.
3. Remove bulb holder from lamp
assembly by rotating 90° and
renew bulb.
4. Install bulb holder in lamp
assembly.
5. Attach wiring connector to lamp
assembly.
6. Insert lamp assembly into
aperture and push to the left to
secure.
Mirror turn lights
1. Move the lower mirror assembly
from the front to access the screw.
2. Remove the screw using a torx
screwdriver.
3. Remove bulb holder from the rear
of the lower mirror assembly.
4. Renew bulb.
5. Install bulb holder in lower mirror
assembly.
6. Replace the screw.
Centre high-mounted brake
light
1. Remove cover from the inside of
the rear door.
2. Unscrew the nut from the locating
pin at the rear of the lamp
assembly.
280 Vehicle care
3. Remove the lamp assembly from
the aperture on the outer side.
4. Detach wiring connector from
lamp assembly.
5. Remove bulb holder from lamp
assembly and renew bulb.
6. Install bulb holder in lamp
assembly and reattach wiring
connector to lamp assembly.
7. Replace lamp assembly into
aperture, ensuring that it is seated
correctly.
8. Replace the nut onto the locating
pin on the rear of the lamp
assembly.
9. Install cover on the inside of the
rear door.
Number plate light
1. Unclip lamp assembly using a flat
blade screwdriver.
2. Detach wiring connector from
lamp assembly.
3. Remove lens cover and renew
bulb.
4. Install lens cover and attach
wiring connector to lamp
assembly.
5. Install lamp assembly.
Crew Cab, Chassis Cab
1. Remove the two screws from the
lens cover.
2. Remove lens cover and renew
bulb.
3. Install the lens cover and replace
the two screws.
Vehicle care 281
Interior lights
LED lights
Have lights repaired by a workshop in
case of failure.
Front courtesy light
1. Remove lamp assembly using a
flat blade screwdriver.
2. Renew bulb.
3. Install lamp assembly.
Load compartment light
1. Remove lamp assembly using a
flat blade screwdriver.
2. Detach wiring connector from
lamp assembly.
3. Remove lens cover and renew
bulb.
4. Install lens cover and attach
wiring connector to lamp
assembly.
5. Install lamp assembly.
Front door panel light
1. Remove lamp assembly using a
flat blade screwdriver.
2. Rotate bulb holder anticlockwise
to disengage.
3. Renew bulb and insert the bulb
holder.
4. Install lamp assembly.
Rear courtesy lights
Have bulbs replaced by a workshop.
Glovebox light
Have bulbs replaced by a workshop.
282 Vehicle care
Instrument panel
illumination
Have bulbs replaced by a workshop.
Electrical system
Fuses
Data on the replacement fuse must
match the data on the defective fuse.
There are two fuse boxes in the
vehicle:
on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel, behind the trim
panel
in the engine compartment
located below the coolant
expansion tank
Combi
An additional fuse box is located
behind a cover at the b-pillar in the
inside of the passenger compartment.
Using a suitable tool, e.g. a flat-blade
screwdriver, to unclip the cover and
remove.
Do not store any objects behind this
panel.
Vehicle care 283
No. Circuit
1Average speed: additional
evaporator (10 A)
2Minimum speed: additional
evaporator (7.5 A)
3Minimum speed: additional
evaporator (7.5 A)
4Maximum speed: additional
evaporator (15 A)
5Maximum speed: additional
evaporator (15 A)
6Average speed: additional
evaporator (10 A)
Bus
An additional fuse box is located on
the lower right-hand side of the load
compartment, below the step trim
panel.
Before replacing a fuse, turn off the
respective switch and the ignition.
A blown fuse can be recognised by its
melted wire.
Caution
Do not replace the fuse until the
cause of the fault has been
remedied.
It is advisable to carry a full set of
fuses. Consult a workshop.
Some functions are protected by
several fuses.
Fuses may also be inserted without
existence of a function.
Notice
Not all fuse box descriptions in this
manual may apply to your vehicle.
When inspecting the fuse box, refer
to the fuse box label.
Fuse extractor
A fuse extractor may be located in the
instrument panel fuse box. The
extractor has two sides, each side is
designed for a different type of fuses.
Grab the fuse with the fuse extractor
and withdraw the fuse.
284 Vehicle care
Engine compartment fuse
box
Located below the coolant expansion
tank.
Remove the screw to move the
coolant expansion tank to the side.
Unscrew the four screws to remove
the cover.
Disengage the fuse box cover and
remove it.
Some circuits may be protected by
several fuses.
Symbol Circuit
VHeated windscreen
nHeating and ventilation
system / Air conditioning
SRight side lights
TLeft side lights
WRight low beam
Symbol Circuit
aLeft low beam
>Front fog lights
LLeft high beam
NRight high beam
uABS
KWindscreen wiper
QPneumatic suspension
Instrument panel fuse box
Located behind the trim panel. Pull
upper part of trim panel to remove.
Vehicle care 285
Do not store any objects behind this
panel.
Some circuits may be protected by
several fuses.
Symbol Circuit
SRight-hand side light
TLeft-hand side light
xClimate control fan
&Tachograph
ÍPreheating
ZInfotainment system / Seat
heating / Driver Information
Centre / Audio connec‐
tions / Alarm
lHands-free connection
ADP Additional adaptations
PTO Power take-off
UHeated seats
MElectronic immobiliser
RWindscreen washer
Symbol Circuit
,Power windows / Body
control module
nRight heated rear window
mLeft heated rear window
IBody control module /
Power windows / Heating
and ventilation system / Air
conditioning
STOP Brake light
ZBody control module
dInterior lights / Brake lights
uABS / Electronic Stability
Control
jHorn
0Interior lights
OTurn lights / Rear fog light /
Body control module
UCentral locking
eInstrument panel / Diag‐
nostic connector
Symbol Circuit
dHeated exterior mirrors
?Power outlet
ÌCigarette lighter
Load compartment fuse box
Bus
Located below the step trim panel on
the lower right-hand side of the load
compartment.
286 Vehicle care
Using a suitable tool, e.g. a flat-blade
screwdriver, unclip the trim panel at
the three locations shown in the
illustration and remove.
Do not store any objects behind this
panel.
No. Circuit
1Stop-start
2Power sliding door lock electro‐
magnet
3Power sliding door lock chime
4Speed 2: right-hand evaporator
fan
5Speed 2: left-hand evaporator
fan
6Speed 1: left-hand evaporator
fan
7Left-hand heating
8Speed 3: left-hand evaporator
fan
9Condenser fan
10 Right-hand heating
11 Speed 3: right-hand evaporator
fan
12 Power sliding door
13 Corridor lighting
Vehicle care 287
No. Circuit
14 Power side step
15 Child safety warning chime
16 Speed 1: right-hand evaporator
fan
Some circuits may be protected by
several fuses.
Vehicle tools
Tools
Vehicles with spare wheel
The jack, wheel wrench, adapters (for
spare wheel removal), hub cap hook
and towing eye are contained in a
unit, stowed under the front seat.
Notice
Depending on vehicle, there may be
multiple adapters for spare wheel
removal.
Vehicles with Rear-wheel drive: A
hydraulic jack and a set of extension
pieces for use with the jack are also
included.
Separately supplied bolts must be
used for the temporary spare wheel.
These are allowed only for the
temporary spare wheel. Refer to a
label on the temporary spare wheel.
Wheel changing 3 296.
Spare wheel 3 299.
Towing the vehicle 3 304.
288 Vehicle care
Vehicles without spare wheel
Some vehicles are equipped with a
tyre repair kit instead of a spare
wheel.
To access this unit, slide the seat fully
forwards and fold down the backrest.
If cover is fitted, raise cover slightly
and slide it backwards to remove.
Notice
Do not attempt to remove the unit
from beneath the seat. Risk of injury.
Tyre repair kit 3 293.
Wheels and tyres
Tyre condition, wheel condition
Drive over edges slowly and at right
angles if possible. Driving over sharp
edges can cause tyre and wheel
damage. Do not trap tyres on the kerb
when parking.
Regularly check the wheels for
damage. Seek the assistance of a
workshop in the event of damage or
unusual wear.
We recommend not swapping the
front wheels with the rear wheels and
vice versa, as this can affect vehicle
stability. Always use less worn tyres
on the rear axle.
Tyres
Factory-fitted tyres are matched to
the chassis and offer optimum driving
comfort and safety.
Winter tyres
Winter tyres improve driving safety at
temperatures below 7 °C and should
therefore be fitted on all wheels.
In accordance with country-specific
regulations, affix the maximum speed
sticker in the driver's field of view.
Tyre designations
E.g. 215/65 R 16 C 109 R
215 : tyre width, mm
65 : cross-section ratio (tyre height
to tyre width), %
R: belt type: Radial
RF : type: RunFlat
16 : wheel diameter, inches
C: cargo or commercial use
109 : load index e.g. 109 is
equivalent to approx. 1030 kg
R: speed code letter
Speed code letter:
Q: up to 100 mph
S: up to 112 mph
T: up to 118 mph
H: up to 130 mph
V: up to 150 mph
W: up to 168 mph
Vehicle care 289
Choose a tyre appropriate for the
maximum speed of your vehicle.
The maximum speed is achievable at
kerb weight with driver (75 kg) plus
125 kg payload. Optional equipment
could reduce the maximum speed of
the vehicle.
Directional tyres
Fit directional tyres such that they roll
in the direction of travel. The rolling
direction is indicated by a symbol
(e.g. an arrow) on the sidewall.
Tyre pressure
Check the pressure of cold tyres at
least every 14 days and before any
long journey. Do not forget the spare
wheel. This also applies to vehicles
with tyre pressure monitoring system.
The tyre pressure information label
on the driver's door frame indicates
the original equipment tyres and the
correspondent tyre pressures.
Always inflate tyres to the pressures
shown on the label.
Tyre pressures 3 314.
The tyre pressure data refers to cold
tyres. It applies to summer and winter
tyres.
Always inflate the spare tyre to the
highest pressure specified for this
tyre size.
Incorrect tyre pressures will impair
safety, vehicle handling, comfort and
fuel economy and will increase tyre
wear.
Tyre pressures differ depending on
various options. For the correct tyre
pressure value, follow the procedure
below:
1. Identify the type of drive.
2. Identify the gross vehicle weight.
3. Identify the respective tyre.
The tyre pressure tables show all
possible tyre combinations 3 314.
For the tyres approved for your
vehicle, refer to the EEC Certificate of
Conformity provided with your vehicle
or other national registration
documents.
The driver is responsible for correct
adjustment of tyre pressure.
9Warning
If the pressure is too low, this can
result in considerable tyre warm-
up and internal damage, leading to
tread separation and even to tyre
blow-out at high speeds.
9Warning
For specific tyres the
recommended tyre pressure as
shown in the tyre pressure table
may exceed the maximum tyre
pressure as indicated on the tyre.
Never exceed the maximum tyre
pressure as indicated on the tyre.
Temperature dependency
Tyre pressure depends on the
temperature of the tyre. During
driving, tyre temperature and
pressure increase.
Tyre pressure values provided on the
tyre information label and tyre
pressure chart are valid for cold tyres,
which means at 20 °C. The pressure
increases by nearly 1.5 psi (10 kPa /
290 Vehicle care
0.1 bar) for a 10 °C temperature
increase. This must be considered
when warm tyres are checked.
Trailer towing
When towing a trailer with a fully
laden vehicle, the tyre pressure must
be increased by 20 kPa / 0.2 bar
(3.0 psi) and the maximum speed
limited to 60 mph.
Trailer towing 3 262.
Rear-wheel drive, with twin rear
wheels
When inflating the outer tyre, the
inflation tube should be passed
between the two wheels.
Tyre pressure monitoring
system
The tyre pressure monitoring system
uses radio and sensor technology to
check tyre pressure levels.
Caution
Tyre pressure monitoring system
warns only about low tyre pressure
condition and does not replace
regular tyre maintenance by the
driver.
All wheels must be equipped with
pressure sensors and the tyres must
have the prescribed pressure.
Notice
In countries where the tyre pressure
monitoring system is legally
required, the use of wheels without
pressure sensors will invalidate the
vehicle operating permit.
The tyre pressure monitoring system
sensors monitor the tyre pressure
and transmit tyre pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Tyre pressure chart 3 314.
Low tyre pressure condition
A detected low tyre pressure
condition is indicated by illumination
of control indicator w 3 100 and a
corresponding message appears in
the Driver Information Centre.
If w illuminates, stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tyres as
recommended 3 314.
After inflating, some driving may be
required to update the tyre pressure
values in the system. During this time
w may illuminate.
If w illuminates at lower temperatures
and extinguishes after some driving,
this could be an indicator for
Vehicle care 291
approaching a low tyre pressure
condition. Check tyre pressure of all
tyres.
If the tyre pressure must be reduced
or increased, switch off ignition.
Only mount wheels with pressure
sensors, otherwise w flashes for
several seconds then illuminates
continuously together with control
indicator j 3 98 and a
corresponding message appears in
the Driver Information Centre.
A spare wheel or temporary spare
wheel is not equipped with pressure
sensors. The tyre pressure
monitoring system is not operational
for these wheels. For the other
wheels, the tyre pressure monitoring
system remains operational.
Control indicator w and the
corresponding message appears at
each ignition cycle until the tyres are
inflated to the correct tyre pressure.
Driver Information Centre 3 103.
Vehicle messages 3 104.
Puncture
A puncture or severely under-inflated
tyre is indicated by illumination of
control indicator w together with C
3 98 and a corresponding message
appears in the Driver Information
Centre. Stop vehicle and switch off
engine.
Tyre pressure 3 314.
Tyre repair kit 3 293.
Spare wheel 3 299.
Wheel changing 3 296.
Relearn function
After a puncture has been repaired
and the driver has inflated the tyres to
the correct tyre pressure, the tyre
pressure monitoring system needs to
recalculate.
Tyre pressure 3 314.
Tyre repair kit 3 293.
During driving, select the tyre
pressure menu in the Driver
Information Centre by pressing button
on end of wiper lever. Press and hold
button for approx. five seconds to
initialise recalculation. A
corresponding message appears in
the Driver Information Centre.
Several minutes of driving at a speed
above 25 mph may be required to
complete the relearn process. The
system can only provide limited
information during this time.
If problems occur during the relearn
process, control indicator w remains
illuminated and a warning message is
displayed in the Driver Information
Centre.
Driver Information Centre 3 103.
Vehicle messages 3 104.
292 Vehicle care
General information
The use of tyre chains or
commercially available liquid tyre
repair kits can impair the function of
the system. Factory-approved tyre
repair kits can be used.
Tyre repair kit 3 293.
Tyre chains 3 293.
External high-power radio equipment
could disrupt the tyre pressure
monitoring system.
Each time the tyres are replaced, the
tyre pressure monitoring system
sensors must be dismounted and
serviced by a workshop.
Tread depth
Check tread depth at regular
intervals.
For safety reasons it is recommended
that the tread depth of the tyres on
one axle should not vary by more than
2 mm.
The legally permissible minimum
tread depth (1.6 mm) has been
reached when the tread has worn
down as far as one of the tread wear
indicators (TWI). Their position is
indicated by markings on the
sidewall.
Tyres age, even if they are not used.
We recommend tyre replacement
every 6 years.
Changing tyre and wheel
size
If tyres of a different size than those
fitted at the factory are used, it may be
necessary to reprogramme the
nominal tyre pressure and make
other vehicle modifications.
After converting to a different tyre
size, have the label with tyre
pressures replaced.
Tyre pressure monitoring system
3 290.
9Warning
The use of unsuitable tyres or
wheels may lead to accidents and
will invalidate the vehicle
operating permit.
Wheel covers
Wheel covers and tyres that are
factory approved for the respective
vehicle and comply with all of the
relevant wheel and tyre combination
requirements must be used.
Vehicle care 293
If the wheel covers and tyres used are
not factory approved, the tyres must
not have a rim protection ridge.
Wheel covers must not impair brake
cooling.
9Warning
Use of unsuitable tyres or wheel
covers could lead to sudden
pressure loss and thereby
accidents.
Tyre chains
Tyre chains are only permitted on the
drive wheels.
On vehicles with twin rear wheels,
tyre chains are only permitted on the
outer wheels.
Always use fine mesh chains that add
no more than 15 mm to the tyre tread
and the inboard sides (including chain
lock).
9Warning
Damage may lead to tyre blowout.
Wheel covers on steel wheels may
come into contact with parts of the
chains. In such cases, remove the
wheel covers.
Tyre chains may only be used at
speeds up to 30 mph and, when
travelling on roads that are free of
snow, they may only be used for brief
periods since they are subject to rapid
wear on a hard road and may snap.
The use of tyre chains is not permitted
on the temporary spare wheel or on
wheels of a different size than those
fitted at the factory.
Tyre repair kit
Minor damage to the tyre tread can be
repaired with the tyre repair kit.
Do not remove foreign bodies from
the tyres.
Tyre damage exceeding 4 mm or that
is at the tyre's sidewall near the rim
cannot be repaired with the tyre repair
kit.
9Warning
Do not drive faster than 50 mph.
Do not use for a lengthy period.
Steering and handling may be
affected.
If the vehicle has a flat tyre:
Apply the parking brake and engage
neutral (manual transmission) or N
(manual transmission automated).
The tyre repair kit is located under the
front seat. Slide seat forwards fully
and fold backrest down to access kit.
1. Take the tyre repair kit out from
under the front seat.
2. Remove the compressor.
294 Vehicle care
3. Remove the power supply lead(s)
and air hose from the stowage
compartments on the underside
of the compressor.
4. Screw the compressor air hose to
the connection on the sealant
bottle.
5. Fit the sealant bottle into the
retainer on the compressor.
Set the compressor near the tyre
in such a way that the sealant
bottle is upright.
6. Unscrew valve cap from defective
tyre.
7. Screw the sealant filler hose to the
tyre valve.
8. The rocker switch on the
compressor must be set to
position O.
9. Connect the red < power supply
lead on the compressor to the
jump start terminal 3 301.
Notice
Depending on model, the jump start
terminal may be located at the left-
hand or right-hand side of the engine
compartment.
10. Connect the black ] power
supply lead to a vehicle grounding
point, e.g. the engine block or an
engine mounting bolt.
Notice
Depending on tyre repair kit type, it
may be necessary to connect the
single power supply lead to the
Vehicle care 295
power outlet or cigarette lighter
socket.
For this type, the red < and
black ] power supply leads will not
be present.
To avoid discharging the battery,
we recommend running the
engine.
11. Set the rocker switch on the
compressor to position I. The tyre
is filled with sealant.
12. The compressor pressure gauge
briefly indicates up to 6 bar. Then
the pressure starts to drop.
13. All of the sealant is pumped into
the tyre. Then the tyre is inflated.
14. The prescribed tyre pressure
should be obtained within
10 minutes.
Tyre pressure 3 314.
When the correct pressure is
obtained, turn off the compressor
by setting rocker switch to position
O.
If the prescribed tyre pressure is
not obtained within 10 minutes,
remove the tyre repair kit. Move
the vehicle one tyre rotation
(approx. 2 m). Reattach the tyre
repair kit and continue the filling
procedure for 10 minutes. If the
prescribed tyre pressure is still not
obtained, the tyre is too badly
damaged. Seek the assistance of
a workshop.
Drain excess tyre pressure with
the button beside the pressure
indicator.
Do not run the compressor for
longer than 10 minutes.
15. Detach the tyre repair kit.
16. Remove any excess sealant
using a cloth.
17. Take the label indicating
maximum permitted speed from
the tyre repair kit and affix in the
driver's field of view.
18. Screw the sealant filler hose to the
free connection on the sealant
bottle. This prevents sealant from
escaping. Store the sealant bottle
in the plastic bag. Stow tyre repair
kit under the front seat.
296 Vehicle care
19. Continue driving immediately so
that the sealant is evenly
distributed throughout the tyre.
After driving approx. 6 miles, but
no more than 10 minutes, stop
and check tyre pressure using the
compressor. Screw compressor
air hose directly onto tyre valve
and compressor when doing this.
20. If the tyre pressure is more than
3.1 bar, set it to the correct value.
Repeat the procedure until there
is no more loss of pressure.
If the tyre pressure has fallen
below 3.1 bar, the vehicle must
not be driven. Seek the
assistance of a workshop.
21. Stow tyre repair kit under the front
seat.
Notice
The driving characteristics of the
repaired tyre are severely affected,
therefore have this tyre replaced.
If unusual noise is heard or the
compressor becomes hot, turn
compressor off for at least
30 minutes.
The built-in safety valve opens at a
pressure of 7 bar (102 psi).
Note the expiry date of the kit. After
this date its sealing capability is no
longer guaranteed. Pay attention to
storage information on sealant
bottle.
Replace the used sealant bottle.
Dispose of the bottle as prescribed
by applicable laws.
The compressor and sealant can be
used from approx. -30 °C.
Wheel changing
Make the following preparations and
observe the following information:
Park the vehicle on a level, firm
and non-slippery surface. The
front wheels must be in the
straight-ahead position.
Apply the parking brake and
engage first gear or reverse gear
(manual transmission) or N
(manual transmission
automated).
Switch off the air suspension
system 3 228.
Remove the spare wheel 3 299.
Never change more than one
wheel at a time.
Use the jack only to change
wheels in case of puncture, not
for seasonal winter or summer
tyre change.
The jack is maintenance-free.
If the ground on which the vehicle
is standing is soft, a solid board
(max. 1 cm thick) should be
placed under the jack.
Vehicle care 297
No people or animals may be in
the vehicle when it is jacked-up.
Never crawl under a jacked-up
vehicle.
Do not start the engine when the
vehicle is raised on the jack.
Clean wheel bolts / nuts and their
threads before mounting the
wheel.
9Warning
Do not grease wheel bolt, wheel
nut and wheel nut cone.
1. Remove the wheel cover using
the hook supplied.
Vehicle tools 3 287.
Depending on vehicle, first
remove the bolt / nut covers by
hand then remove the wheel
cover, or press wheel cover at the
points indicated by the arrows and
turn to release.
Rear-wheel drive, with twin rear
wheels: Remove the tyre valve
extender from the inner rear
wheel.
2. Install the wheel wrench
(depending on vehicle, attach
wheel wrench to adapters)
ensuring that it is located securely
and loosen each wheel bolt / nut
by half a turn.
3. Vehicles with Front-wheel drive:
If equipped, attached heightener
to lifting pad when changing a
front wheel.
Raise vehicle by placing lifting
pad spigot of the jack (vehicle
tools 3 287) under the jacking
hole located nearest the wheel
concerned.
Ensure the jack is positioned
correctly. The jack base must be
on the ground directly below the
jacking hole in a manner that
prevents it from slipping.
Attach wheel wrench onto the jack
and raise the vehicle by turning
298 Vehicle care
the wrench until the wheel is clear
of the ground.
Vehicles with Rear-wheel drive:
Pay attention to the operating
instructions supplied with the
hydraulic jack (vehicle tools
3 287) and assemble the parts
required as specified.
Position the adapter at the jacking
hole located nearest the wheel
concerned.
Ensure the jack is positioned
correctly. The jack head must be
level with the jacking hole. Pump
the jack by pressing the wheel
wrench / adapters, to position the
base plate correctly.
Raise the vehicle by pressing the
wheel wrench until the wheel is
clear of the ground.
4. Unscrew wheel bolts / nuts
completely and wipe clean with a
cloth.
Put wheel bolts / nuts somewhere
where the threads will not be
soiled.
5. Change the wheel.
6. Screw in the wheel bolts / nuts.
Separately supplied bolts must be
used for the temporary spare
wheel. These are allowed only for
the temporary spare wheel. Refer
to a label on the temporary spare
wheel.
7. Lower vehicle.
8. Install the wheel wrench
(depending on vehicle, attach
wheel wrench to adapters)
ensuring that it is securely located
and tighten each wheel bolt / nut
in a crosswise sequence.
Tightening torque is: 172 Nm
(Front-wheel drive), 235 Nm
(Rear-wheel drive with twin rear
wheels), 264 Nm (Rear-wheel
drive with single rear wheels).
9. Refit wheel cover.
Rear-wheel drive, with twin rear
wheels: Install the tyre valve
extender to the inner rear wheel
before refitting the wheel cover.
Notice
If applicable, fit anti-theft bolts
nearest the tyre valve (otherwise it
may not be possible to refit the wheel
cover).
10. Stow the replaced wheel 3 299
and the vehicle tools 3 287.
11. Have the new wheel balanced on
the vehicle. Check the tyre
pressure of the installed tyre
3 314 and also the wheel bolt /
nut torque as soon as possible.
Have the defective tyre renewed or
repaired.
Vehicle care 299
Spare wheel
The spare wheel can be classified as
a temporary spare wheel depending
on the size compared to the other
mounted wheels and country
regulations. In this case a permissible
maximum speed applies, even
though no label at the spare wheel
indicates this.
Caution
The use of a spare wheel that is
smaller than the other wheels or in
combination with winter tyres
could affect driveability. Have the
defective tyre replaced as soon as
possible.
The spare wheel is held under the
vehicle frame using a winch and
secured by tightening a cable using
the wheel wrench and adapters
(depending on vehicle).
It may be necessary to jack the
vehicle up to gain access to the spare
wheel on a fully loaded vehicle with a
flat rear tyre.
To release the spare wheel, loosen
cable by connecting the wheel
wrench and adapters (depending on
vehicle) to the slot position illustrated
and lower the wheel fully by turning
wrench clockwise.
Caution
Only use the wheel wrench and
adapters (depending on vehicle)
to lower the spare wheel.
The use of pneumatic tools is
prohibited. This may result in
damage to the winch cable and
equipment.
Place wheel upright, unclip retainer
from wheel rim and release the wheel
from the cable and connected
retainer by routing these components
through the centre of the wheel.
Twin rear wheel vehicles have an
additional mounting plate attached to
the spare wheel. Before using the
wheel, undo the nut and remove the
mounting plate.
300 Vehicle care
When reinstalling a spare wheel, first
attach the mounting plate (twin rear
wheel vehicles) and secure with the
nut.
Place wheel upright, then route the
cable and connected retainer from
the front of the wheel (side with tyre
valve) and through the centre of the
wheel. Attach the retainer and clip it
into place, ensuring it is correctly
positioned and that the front of the
wheel (side with tyre valve) will be
facing upwards when reinstalled.
Place wheel below the vehicle frame,
directly beneath the winch
mechanism.
Then tighten cable using the wheel
wrench and adapters by connecting
to the slot position illustrated above
and turning wrench anticlockwise
until the wheel is secured in the fully
raised position.
Notice
Do not place a wheel with aluminium
rim under the vehicle frame.
9Warning
Ensure the front of the wheel (side
with tyre valve) is facing upwards
when the spare wheel is
reinstalled below the vehicle
frame.
Temporary spare wheel
Caution
The use of a spare wheel that is
smaller than the other wheels or in
combination with winter tyres
could affect driveability. Have the
defective tyre replaced as soon as
possible.
Vehicle care 301
Only mount one temporary spare
wheel. Do not drive faster than
50 mph. Take curves slowly. Do not
use for a long period of time.
Separately supplied bolts must be
used for the temporary spare wheel.
These are allowed only for the
temporary spare wheel. Refer to a
label on the temporary spare wheel.
Tyre chains 3 293.
Summer and winter tyres
If you use winter tyres, the spare
wheel may still be fitted with a
summer tyre.
If you use the spare wheel when it is
fitted with a summer tyre the vehicle's
driveability may be affected,
especially on slippery road surfaces.
Directional tyres
Fit directional tyres such that they roll
in the direction of travel. The rolling
direction is indicated by a symbol
(e.g. an arrow) on the sidewall.
The following applies to tyres fitted
opposing the rolling direction:
Driveability may be affected.
Have the defective tyre renewed
or repaired as soon as possible
and fit it instead of the spare
wheel.
Do not drive faster than 50 mph.
Drive particularly carefully on wet
and snow-covered road
surfaces.
Jump starting
The jump start terminal is located in
the engine compartment.
A vehicle with a discharged vehicle
battery can be started using jump
leads and the vehicle battery of
another vehicle.
Do not start with a quick charger.
9Warning
Be extremely careful when starting
with jump leads. Any deviation
from the following instructions can
lead to injuries or damage caused
by battery explosion or damage to
the electrical systems of both
vehicles.
9Warning
Avoid contact of the battery with
eyes, skin, fabrics and painted
surfaces. The fluid contains
sulphuric acid which can cause
injuries and damage in the event
of direct contact.
302 Vehicle care
Caution
The air suspension system must
be switched off prior to jump
starting.
Air suspension 3 228.
Never expose the vehicle battery
to naked flames or sparks.
A discharged vehicle battery can
already freeze at a temperature
of 0 °C. Defrost the frozen vehicle
battery before connecting jump
leads.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when
handling a vehicle battery.
Use a booster battery with the
same voltage (12 V). Its capacity
(Ah) must not be much less than
that of the discharged vehicle
battery.
Use jump leads with insulated
terminals and a cross section of
at least 25 mm2.
Do not disconnect the discharged
battery from the vehicle.
Switch off all unnecessary
electrical consumers.
Switch off the air suspension
system 3 228.
Do not lean over the vehicle
battery during jump starting.
Do not allow the terminals of one
lead to touch those of the other
lead.
The vehicles must not come into
contact with each other during
the jump starting process.
Apply the parking brake and
engage neutral (manual
transmission) or N (manual
transmission automated).
Jump start terminal
In the event of a discharged vehicle
battery, the jump start terminal
enables the vehicle to be started
without the need to access the battery
inside the vehicle.
The jump start terminal is located in
the engine compartment and
identified by a "<" sign on the red
insulating cover. Lift the red insulating
cover to access the terminal
connector.
Ensure the red insulating cover is
latched back into position when not in
use.
Vehicle care 303
Jump starting procedure
Depending on model, the jump start
terminal may be located at the left-
hand or right-hand side of the engine
compartment.
Lead connection order:
1. Connect the red lead to the
positive terminal (1) of the booster
battery.
2. Connect the other end of the red
lead to the jump start terminal (2)
of the vehicle with the discharged
vehicle battery.
3. Connect the black lead to the
negative terminal (3) of the
booster battery.
4. Connect the other end of the black
lead to a vehicle grounding point
(4), such as the engine block or an
engine mounting bolt. Connect as
far away from the discharged
vehicle battery as possible,
however at least 60 cm.
Route the leads so that they cannot
catch on rotating parts in the engine
compartment.
To start the engine:
1. Start the engine of the vehicle
providing the jump start.
2. After 5 minutes, start the other
engine. Start attempts should be
made for no longer than
15 seconds at an interval of
1 minute.
3. Allow both engines to idle for
approx. 3 minutes with the leads
connected.
4. Switch on electrical consumers
(e.g. headlights, heated rear
window) of the vehicle receiving
the jump start.
5. Reverse above sequence exactly
when removing leads.
304 Vehicle care
Towing
Towing the vehicle
The towing eye and wheel wrench are
stowed with the vehicle tools 3 287.
Disengage the cover using a suitable
tool and remove.
Screw the towing eye clockwise into
the front towing point and tighten fully
using the wheel wrench.
Attach a tow rope or better still a tow
rod – to the towing eye, never to the
bumper or front suspension units.
Caution
Do not tow the vehicle from the
rear. The front towing eye must
only be used for towing and not
recovering a vehicle.
Switch on ignition to permit operation
of brake lights, horn and windscreen
wipers, and move the steering wheel
slightly to release the steering wheel
lock.
Switch off the air suspension system
3 228.
Caution
Deactivate the driver assistance
systems like active emergency
braking 3 250, otherwise the
vehicle may automatically brake
during towing.
Move the selector lever to neutral.
Release the parking brake.
Caution
Vehicles with manual
transmission automated: If neutral
cannot be selected, the vehicle
must only be towed with the drive
wheels raised off the ground.
The vehicle should always be
towed with the ignition switched
off.
Manual transmission automated
3 238.
Caution
Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily.
Excessive tractive force can
damage the vehicle.
When the engine is not running,
considerably more force is needed to
brake and steer.
To prevent the entry of exhaust fumes
from the towing vehicle, switch on the
air recirculation system 3 206 and
close the windows.
Seek the assistance of a workshop.
Vehicle care 305
After towing, unscrew the towing eye
and refit the cover.
Towing another vehicle
Attach a tow rope or better still a tow
rod – to the rear towing eye, never to
the rear axle and suspension units.
Caution
The rear towing eye must only be
used for towing and not recovering
a vehicle.
Caution
Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily.
Excessive tractive force can
damage the vehicle.
Appearance care
Exterior care
Locks
The locks are lubricated at the factory
using a high quality lock cylinder
grease. Use de-icing agent only when
absolutely necessary, as this has a
degreasing effect and impairs lock
function. After using a de-icing agent,
have the locks regreased by a
workshop.
Washing
The paintwork of your vehicle is
exposed to environmental influences.
Restrictions for filmed or matt painted
body parts or decor tapes, see
"Polishing and waxing".
Bird droppings, dead insects, resin,
pollen and the like should be cleaned
off immediately, as they contain
aggressive constituents which can
cause paint damage.
If using a vehicle wash, comply with
the vehicle wash manufacturer's
instructions. The windscreen wipers
306 Vehicle care
must be switched off and the exterior
mirrors must be folded in. Remove
antenna and external accessories
such as roof racks etc.
If you wash your vehicle by hand,
make sure that the insides of the
wheel housings are also thoroughly
rinsed out.
Clean edges and folds on opened
doors and the bonnet as well as the
areas they cover.
Clean bright metal mouldings with a
cleaning solution approved for
aluminium to avoid damages.
Caution
Always use a cleaning agent with
a pH value of four to nine.
Do not use cleaning agents on hot
surfaces.
Have the door hinges of all doors
greased by a workshop.
Do not clean the engine compartment
with a steam-jet or high-pressure jet
cleaner.
Thoroughly rinse and leather-off the
vehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Use
separate leathers for painted and
glass surfaces: remnants of wax on
the windows will impair vision.
Exterior lights
Headlight and other light covers are
made of plastic. Do not use any
abrasive or caustic agents, do not use
an ice scraper, and do not clean them
dry.
Polishing and waxing
Polishing is necessary only if the paint
has become dull or if solid deposits
have become attached to it.
Paintwork polish with silicone forms a
protective film, making waxing
unnecessary.
Unpainted plastic body parts must not
be treated with wax or polishing
agents.
Matt filmed body parts or decor tapes
must not be polished, to avoid
gleaming. Do not use hot wax
programmes in automatic car washes
if the vehicle is equipped with these
parts.
Matt painted decor parts, e.g. mirror
housing cover, must not be polished.
Otherwise these parts would become
agleam or the colour would be
dissolved.
Windows and windscreen wiper
blades
Switch off wipers before handling in
their areas.
Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamois
leather together with window cleaner
and insect remover.
When cleaning the rear window from
inside, always wipe in parallel to the
heating element to prevent damage.
For mechanical removal of ice, use a
sharp-edged ice scraper. Press the
scraper firmly against the glass so
that no dirt can get under it and
scratch the glass.
Remove dirt residues from smearing
wiper blades by using a soft cloth and
window cleaner. Also make sure to
Vehicle care 307
remove any residues such as wax,
insect residues and similar from the
window.
Wheels and tyres
Do not use high-pressure jet
cleaners.
Clean rims with a pH-neutral wheel
cleaner.
Rims are painted and can be treated
with the same agents as the body.
Paintwork damage
Rectify minor paintwork damage with
a touch-up pen before rust forms.
Have more extensive damage or rust
areas repaired by a workshop.
Underbody
Some areas of the vehicle underbody
have a PVC undercoating while other
critical areas have a durable
protective wax coating.
After the underbody is washed, check
the underbody and have it waxed if
necessary.
Bitumen / rubber materials could
damage the PVC coating. Have
underbody work carried out by a
workshop.
Before and after winter, wash the
underbody and have the protective
wax coating checked.
Towing equipment
Do not clean the coupling ball bar with
a steam-jet or high-pressure jet
cleaner.
Interior care
Interior and upholstery
Only clean the vehicle interior,
including the instrument panel fascia
and panelling, with a dry cloth or
interior cleaner.
Clean leather upholstery with clear
water and a soft cloth. In case of
heavy soiling, use leather care.
The instrument cluster and the
displays should only be cleaned using
a soft damp cloth. If necessary use a
weak soap solution.
Clean fabric upholstery with a
vacuum cleaner and brush. Remove
stains with an upholstery cleaner.
Clothing fabrics may not be
colourfast. This could cause visible
discolourations, especially on light-
coloured upholstery. Removable
stains and discolourations should be
cleaned as soon as possible.
Clean seat belts with lukewarm water
or interior cleaner.
Caution
Close Velcro fasteners as open
Velcro fasteners on clothing could
damage seat upholstery.
The same applies to clothing with
sharp-edged objects, like zips or
belts or studded jeans.
308 Vehicle care
Plastic and rubber parts
Plastic and rubber parts can be
cleaned with the same cleaner as
used to clean the body. Use interior
cleaner if necessary. Do not use any
other agent. Avoid solvents and petrol
in particular. Do not use high-
pressure jet cleaners.
Service and maintenance 309
Service and
maintenance
General information ................... 309
Service information .................. 309
Recommended fluids, lubricants
and parts .................................... 310
Recommended fluids and
lubricants ................................ 310
General information
Service information
In order to ensure economical and
safe vehicle operation and to
maintain the value of your vehicle, it
is of vital importance that all
maintenance work is carried out at the
proper intervals as specified.
The detailed, up-to-date service
schedule for the vehicle is available at
the workshop.
Service display 3 92.
Engine identification 3 313.
European service intervals -
except Bus
Maintenance of your vehicle is
required every 25,000 miles or after
two years, whichever occurs first,
unless otherwise indicated by the
service display.
A shorter service interval can be valid
for severe driving behaviour, e.g. for
taxis and police vehicles.
European service intervals - Bus
only
Maintenance of your vehicle is
required every 20,000 miles or after
one year, whichever occurs first,
unless otherwise indicated by the
service display.
The European service intervals are
valid for the following countries:
Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Croatia,
Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia,
Finland, France, Germany, Greece,
Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy,
Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania,
Luxembourg, Netherlands, Norway,
Poland, Portugal, Slovakia, Slovenia,
Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, United
Kingdom.
Confirmations
Confirmation of service is recorded in
the Service and warranty booklet.
The date and mileage is completed
with the stamp and signature of the
servicing workshop.
Make sure that the Service and
warranty booklet is completed
correctly as continuous proof of
310 Service and maintenance
service is essential if any warranty or
goodwill claims are to be met, and is
also a benefit when selling the
vehicle.
Service display
The service interval is based on
several parameters depending on
usage.
The service display, located in the
Driver Information Centre, indicates
when the next service is due. Seek
the assistance of a workshop.
Service display 3 92.
Recommended fluids,
lubricants and parts
Recommended fluids and
lubricants
Only use products that meet the
recommended specifications.
9Warning
Operating materials are
hazardous and could be
poisonous. Handle with care. Pay
attention to information given on
the containers.
Engine oil
Engine oil is identified by its quality
and its viscosity. Quality is more
important than viscosity when
selecting which engine oil to use. The
oil quality ensures e.g. engine
cleanliness, wear protection and oil
aging control, whereas viscosity
grade gives information on the oil's
thickness over a temperature range.
Select the appropriate engine oil
based on its quality and on the
minimum ambient temperature
3 314.
Topping up engine oil
Caution
In case of any spilled oil, wipe it up
and dispose of it properly.
Engine oils of different manufacturers
and brands can be mixed as long as
they comply with the required engine
oil quality and viscosity.
Select the appropriate engine oil
based on its quality and on the
minimum ambient temperature
3 314.
Additional engine oil additives
The use of additional engine oil
additives could cause damage and
invalidate the warranty.
Engine oil viscosity grades
The SAE viscosity grade gives
information of the thickness of the oil.
Service and maintenance 311
Multigrade oil is indicated by two
figures, e.g. SAE 5W-30. The first
figure, followed by a W, indicates the
low temperature viscosity and the
second figure the high temperature
viscosity.
Select the appropriate viscosity grade
depending on the minimum ambient
temperature 3 314.
All of the recommended viscosity
grades are suitable for high ambient
temperatures.
Coolant and antifreeze
Use only silicate-free long life coolant
(LLC) antifreeze approved for the
vehicle. Consult a workshop.
The system is factory filled with
coolant designed for excellent
corrosion protection and frost
protection down to approx. -28 °C.
This concentration should be
maintained all year round. The use of
additional coolant additives that
intend to give additional corrosion
protection or seal against minor leaks
can cause function problems. Liability
for consequences resulting from the
use of additional coolant additives will
be rejected.
Washer fluid
Use only washer fluid approved for
the vehicle to prevent damage of
wiper blades, paintwork, plastic and
rubber parts. Consult a workshop.
Brake fluid
Over time, brake fluid absorbs
moisture which will reduce braking
effectiveness. The brake fluid should
therefore be replaced at the specified
interval.
AdBlue
Only use AdBlue to reduce the
nitrogen oxides in the exhaust
emission 3 231.
312 Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle identification .................. 312
Vehicle identification number ..312
Identification plate ................... 313
Engine identification ................ 313
Vehicle data ............................... 314
Recommended fluids and
lubricants ................................ 314
Capacities ................................ 314
Tyre pressures ........................ 315
Vehicle identification
Vehicle identification
number
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is visible through the
windscreen.
The vehicle identification number is
also displayed behind a removable
plastic cover on the front right hand
door step. Unclip the covers using a
flat blade screwdriver to access.
Technical data 313
Identification plate
The identification plate is located on
the right hand door pillar.
Information on identification plate:
1: manufacturer's name
2: type approval number
3: vehicle identification number
4: permissible gross vehicle
weight rating in kg
5: permissible gross train weight
in kg
6: maximum permissible front axle
load in kg
7: maximum permissible rear axle
load in kg
8: engine type
9: engine identification code
10 : fabrication number
11 : vehicle paint code
Notice
The identification plate on your
vehicle may differ from the
illustration shown.
The combined total of front and rear
axle loads must not exceed the
permissible gross vehicle weight.
Vehicle's kerb weight depends on the
specification of the vehicle, e.g.
optional equipment and accessories.
Refer to the EEC Certificate of
Conformity provided with your vehicle
or other national registration
documents.
The technical data is determined in
accordance with European
Community standards. We reserve
the right to make modifications.
Specifications in the vehicle
documents always have priority over
those given in this manual.
Engine identification
Movano has diesel engines with four
cylinders and a piston displacement
of 2298 cm3. The engine identifier
code starts with M9T and identifies
the power and the emission category.
It is part of the identification plate,
stamped on the engine cylinder block
and on a label attached to the timing
chain cover, depending on variant.
For further technical data, refer to the
EEC Certificate of Conformity
provided with your vehicle or other
national registration documents.
314 Technical data
Vehicle data
Recommended fluids and
lubricants
Required engine oil quality
Engine oil quality: Europe
dexos 2
For countries with International
service interval 3 309, you may use
the engine oil qualities listed below:
Engine oil quality: International
dexos 2
ACEA C3
engines with diesel particle filter
ACEA A3/B4
engines without diesel particle
filter
Engine oil viscosity grades
Ambient temperature
down to
-25 °C SAE 0W-30 or
SAE 0W-40
SAE 5W-30 or
SAE 5W-40
below
-25 °C SAE 0W-30 or
SAE 0W-40
Capacities
Fuel tank
Fuel tank, nominal capacity [l] 80 or 105
AdBlue tank
AdBlue, nominal capacity [l] 20 or 28
Technical data 315
Tyre pressures
Front-wheel drive Front Rear
Gross Vehicle Weight Tyre [kPa/bar] (psi) [kPa/bar] (psi)
2800 215/65 R16 C 109/107R 340/3.4 (49) 360/3.6 (52)
3300 215/65 R16 C 109/107R 360/3.6 (52) 430/4.3 (62)
3500 225/65 R16 C 112/110R 380/3.8 (55) 460/4.6 (68)
3900 225/65 R16 C 112/110R 380/3.8 (55) 460/4.6 (68)
Rear-wheel drive, with single rear wheels Front Rear
Gross Vehicle Weight Tyre [kPa/bar] (psi) [kPa/bar] (psi)
3500 235/65 R16 C 115/113R 360/3.6 (52) 450/4.5 (65)
Rear-wheel drive, with twin rear wheels Front Rear
Gross Vehicle Weight Tyre [kPa/bar] (psi) [kPa/bar] (psi)
3500 195/75 R16 C 107/105R 420/4.2 (61) 420/4.2 (61)
4500 195/75 R16 C 107/105R 420/4.2 (61) 420/4.2 (61)
316 Customer information
Customer
information
Customer information ................ 316
Declaration of conformity ......... 316
REACH .................................... 320
Registered trademarks ............ 320
Vehicle data recording and pri‐
vacy ........................................... 320
Event data recorders ............... 320
Radio Frequency Identification
(RFID) ..................................... 323
Customer information
Declaration of conformity
Radio transmission systems
This vehicle has systems that
transmit and / or receive radio waves
subject to Directive 2014/53/EU. The
manufacturers of the systems listed
below declare conformity with
Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of
the EU declaration of conformity for
each system is available at the
following internet address:
www.opel.com/conformity.
Importer is
Opel / Vauxhall, Bahnhofsplatz,
65423 Ruesselsheim am Main,
Germany.
Radio remote control receiver
Visteon Electronics
04 Rue Nelson Mandela, Zone
Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El
Bey, Tunisia
Operation frequency: 433 MHz
Maximum output: 10 mW ERP
Radio remote control transmitter
Visteon Electronics
04 Rue Nelson Mandela, Zone
Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El
Bey, Tunisia
Operation frequency: 433 MHz
Maximum output: 10 mW ERP
Electronic key transmitter
ALPS ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH
Ohmstrasse 4, 85716
Unterschleissheim, Germany
Operation frequency: 433 MHz
Maximum output: 10 mW ERP
Immobiliser
Visteon Electronics
04 Rue Nelson Mandela, Zone
Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El
Bey, Tunisia
Operation frequency: 125 kHz
Maximum output:
42 dBμA/m @ 10 m
Immobiliser
ALPS ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH
Customer information 317
Ohmstrasse 4, 85716
Unterschleissheim, Germany
Operation frequency: 125 kHz
Maximum output:
42 dBμA/m @ 10 m
Infotainment system NAVI 80
IntelliLink
TomTom Int’l BV
De Ruijterkade 154, 1011 AC
Amsterdam, The Netherlands
Operation frequency:
2400 - 2483.5 MHz
Maximum output: 100 mW EIRP
Infotainment system NAVI 50
IntelliLink
LG Electronics
LG Electronics European Shared
Service Center B.V., Krijgsman 1,
1186 DM Amstelveen, The
Netherlands
Operation frequency: 2.4 GHz
Maximum output: 100 mW EIRP
Infotainment system Radio 15
Visteon Automotive Electronics Co.,
Ltd.
Songjiang Country, 300 Minolta Rd.
201613 Shanghai PRC.
Operation frequency:
2400 – 2483.5 MHz
Maximum output: 4 dBm
Parking heater remote control
receiver
Eberspaecher Climate Control
Systems GmbH & Co. KG
Eberspaecherstrasse 24, 73730
Esslingen, Germany
Operation frequency: N/A
Maximum output: N/A
Parking heater remote control
transmitter
Eberspaecher Climate Control
Systems GmbH & Co. KG
Eberspaecherstrasse 24, 73730
Esslingen, Germany
Operation frequency: 434,6 MHz
Maximum output: 10dBm
Telematics control unit
Continental Automotive
1 Rue de Clairefontaine, 78120
Rambouillet, France
Operation frequency:
2400 – 2483,5 MHz
Maximum output: 100 mW EIRP
Telematics display
MASTERNAUT INTERNATIONAL
4 rue Charles Cros 27400 Louviers,
France
Operation
frequency (MHz) Maximum output
(dBm)
900 MHz 33 dBm
1800 MHz 30 dBm
Tyre pressure monitoring receiver
Schrader Electronics
Trooperslane Industrial Estate, 2
Meadowbank Rd, Carrickfergus
BT38 8YF, United Kingdom
Operation frequency: N/A
Maximum output: N/A
Tyre pressure sensors
Schrader Electronics
Trooperslane Industrial Estate, 2
Meadowbank Rd, Carrickfergus
BT38 8YF, United Kingdom
318 Customer information
Operation frequency:
433.05 – 434.79 MHz
Maximum output: 10 mW ERP
Tyre pressure sensors module
Visteon Electronics
04 Rue Nelson Mandela, Zone
Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El
Bey, Tunisia
Operation frequency: N/A
Maximum output: N/A
Radar systems
Country-specific Declarations of
Conformity for radar systems are
shown on the following page:
Customer information 319
320 Customer information
REACH
Registration, Evaluation,
Authorisation and Restriction of
Chemicals (REACH) is a European
Union regulation adopted to improve
the protection of human health and
the environment from the risks that
can be posed by chemicals. Visit
www.opel.com/reach for further
information and for access to the
Article 33 communication.
Registered trademarks
Apple Inc.
Apple CarPlay™ is a trademark of
Apple Inc.
App Store® and iTunes Store® are
registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
iPhone®, iPod®, iPod touch®, iPod
nano®, iPad® and Siri® are registered
trademarks of Apple Inc.
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark
of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
DivX, LLC
DivX® and DivX Certified® are
registered trademarks of DivX, LLC.
EnGIS Technologies, Inc.
BringGo® is a registered trademark of
EnGIS Technologies, Inc.
Google Inc.
Android™ and Google Play™ Store
are trademarks of Google Inc.
Stitcher Inc.
Stitcher™ is a trademark of Stitcher,
Inc.
Verband der Automobilindustrie e.V.
AdBlue® is a registered trademark of
the VDA.
Vehicle data recording
and privacy
Event data recorders
Electronic control units are installed in
your vehicle. Control units process
data which is received by vehicle
sensors, for example, or which they
generate themselves or exchange
amongst themselves. Some control
units are necessary for the safe
functioning of your vehicle, others
assist you while you drive (driver
assistance systems), while others
provide comfort or infotainment
functions.
The following contains general
information about data processing in
the vehicle. You will find additional
information as to which specific data
is uploaded, stored and passed on to
third parties and for what purpose in
your vehicle under the key word Data
Protection closely linked to the
references for the affected functional
characteristics in the relevant owner's
manual or in the general terms of
sale. These are also available online.
Customer information 321
Operating data in the vehicle
Control units process data for
operation of the vehicle.
This data includes, e.g.:
vehicle status information (e.g.
speed, movement delay, lateral
acceleration, wheel rotation rate,
"seat belts fastened" display)
ambient conditions (e.g.
temperature, rain sensor,
distance sensor)
As a rule such data is transient, not
stored for longer than an operational
cycle, and only processed on board
the vehicle itself. Control units often
include data storage (including the
vehicle key). This is used to allow
information to be documented
temporarily or permanently on vehicle
condition, component stress,
maintenance requirements and
technical events and errors.
Depending on technical equipment
level, the data stored is as follows:
system component operating
states (e.g. fill level, tyre
pressure, battery status)
faults and defects in important
system components (e.g. lights,
brakes)
system reactions in special
driving situations (e.g. triggering
of an airbag, actuation of the
stability control systems)
information on events damaging
the vehicle
for electric vehicles the amount of
charge in the high-voltage
battery, estimated range
In special cases (e.g. if the vehicle
has detected a malfunction), it may be
necessary to save data that would
otherwise just be volatile.
When you use services (e.g. repairs,
maintenance), the operating data
saved can be read together with the
vehicle identification number and
used when necessary. Staff working
for the service network (e.g. garages,
manufacturers) or third parties (e.g.
breakdown services) can read the
data from the vehicle. The same
applies to warranty work and quality
assurance measures.
Data is generally read via the OBD
(On-Board Diagnostics) port
prescribed by law in the vehicle. The
operating data which is read out,
documents the technical condition of
the vehicle or individual components
and assists with fault diagnosis,
compliance with warranty obligations
and quality improvement. This data,
in particular information on
component stress, technical events,
operator errors and other faults, is
transmitted to the manufacturer
where appropriate, together with the
vehicle identification number. The
manufacturer is also subject to
product liability. The manufacturer
potentially also uses operating data
from vehicles for product recalls. This
data can also be used to check
customer warranty and guarantee
claims.
Fault memories in the vehicle can be
reset by a service company when
carrying out servicing or repairs or at
your request.
322 Customer information
Comfort and infotainment
functions
Comfort settings and custom settings
can be stored in the vehicle and
changed or reset at any time.
Depending on the equipment level in
question, these include
seat and steering wheel position
settings
chassis and air conditioning
settings
custom settings such as interior
lighting
You can input your own data in the
infotainment functions for your
vehicle as part of the selected
features.
Depending on the equipment level in
question, these include
multimedia data such as music,
videos or photos for playback in
an integrated multimedia system
address book data for use with an
integrated hands-free system or
an integrated navigation system
input destinations
data on the use of online services
This data for comfort and
infotainment functions can be stored
locally in the vehicle or be kept on a
device that you have connected to the
vehicle (e.g. a smartphone, USB stick
or MP3 player). Data that you have
input yourself can be deleted at any
time.
This data can only be transmitted out
of the vehicle at your request,
particularly when using online
services in accordance with the
settings selected by you.
Smartphone integration, e.g.
Android Auto or Apple CarPlay
If your vehicle is equipped
accordingly, you can connect your
smartphone or another mobile device
to the vehicle so that you can control
it via the controls integrated in the
vehicle. The smartphone image and
sound can be output via the
multimedia system in this case. At the
same time, specific information is
transmitted to your smartphone.
Depending on the type of integration,
this includes data such as position
data, day / night mode and other
general vehicle information. For more
information, please see the operating
instructions for the vehicle /
infotainment system.
Integration allows selected
smartphone apps to be used, such as
navigation or music playback. No
further integration is possible
between smartphone and vehicle, in
particular active access to vehicle
data. The nature of further data
processing is determined by the
provider of the app used. Whether
you can define settings, and if so
which ones, is dependent on the app
in question and your smartphone's
operating system.
Customer information 323
Online services
If your vehicle has a radio network
connection, this allows data to be
exchanged between your vehicle and
other systems. The radio network
connection is made possible by
means of a transmitter device in your
vehicle or a mobile device provided
by you (e.g. a smartphone). Online
functions can be used via this radio
network connection. These include
online services and applications /
apps provided to you by the
manufacturer or other providers.
Proprietary services
In the case of the manufacturer's
online services, the relevant functions
are described by the manufacturer in
an appropriate location (e.g. Owner's
Manual, the manufacturer's website)
and the associated data protection
information is provided. Personal
data may be used to provide online
services. Data exchange for this
purpose takes place via a protected
connection, e.g. using the
manufacturer's IT systems provided
for the purpose. Collection,
processing and use of personal data
for the purposes of preparation of
services take place solely on the
basis of legal permission, e.g. in the
case of a legally prescribed
emergency communication system or
a contractual agreement, or by virtue
of consent.
You can activate or deactivate the
services and functions (which are
subject to charges to some extent)
and, in some cases, the vehicle's
entire radio network connection. This
does not include statutory functions
and services such as an emergency
communication system.
Third party services
If you make use of online services
from other providers (third parties),
these services are subject to the
liability and data protection and usage
conditions of the provider in question.
The manufacturer frequently has no
influence over the content exchanged
in this regard.
Therefore, please note the nature,
scope and purpose of the collection
and use of personal data within the
scope of third party services provided
by the service provider in question.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as tyre
pressure monitoring and immobiliser.
It is also used in connection with
conveniences such as radio remote
controls for door locking / unlocking
and starting. RFID technology in
Vauxhall vehicles does not use or
record personal information or link
with any other Vauxhall system
containing personal information.
324 Body conversions
Body conversions
Tipper and dropside ................... 324
Loading information ................. 324
Tailboard ................................. 325
Sideboards .............................. 326
Lashing eyes ........................... 327
Tipper operation ...................... 327
Safety prop .............................. 329
Hydraulic oil level .................... 330
Toolbox .................................... 331
Exterior lighting ........................ 331
Cleaning .................................. 331
Vehicle checks ........................ 331
Technical data ......................... 332
Declaration of conformity ......... 332
Box body .................................... 333
Keys ........................................ 333
Doors ....................................... 333
Roller shutter ........................... 334
Step ......................................... 334
Ladder ..................................... 335
Overcab storage ...................... 335
Load rails ................................. 335
Interior lighting ......................... 336
Crew van .................................... 336
Child restraint systems ............ 336
Storage .................................... 336
Tipper and dropside
Loading information
The tipper and dropside are not
designed for carrying people or
unsuitable / unsafe materials.
Load the vehicle evenly,
distributing the load across the
body.
Ensure the vehicle tailboard and
sideboards are securely closed
before loading.
Secure any solid loads with
additional lashing equipment.
Body conversions 325
Place loads from the minimum
practicable height. Do not drop
loads onto the body.
Do not overload the body.
Ensure the load will not fall out or
endanger other road users.
Do not drive with the body tipped.
Do not drive with the tailboard or
sideboards down.
Do not attempt to tip loads from
the body when body sides or
tailboard are closed.
Observe the safety warning
labels placed on the tipper and
dropside bodies.
Do not attempt to tip loads unless
the vehicle is on solid ground.
The isolation switch must be in
the OFF position when tipping
function is not in use.
Caution
Do not exceed the maximum
lateral load of 200 kg (dropside
body) and 400 kg (tipper body) as
stated on the head board.
When loading heavy or bulk items,
the lashing eyes must be flush with
the body floor to avoid causing any
damage.
Refer to the safety warning labels
located on the tipper or dropside
body.
The maximum loading on the
dropside body floor is 230 kg per
80 mm x 80 mm or 80 kg per 50
mm x 50 mm.
Tailboard
Opening
Pull up the release levers to
disengage the locks and lower the
tailboard fully.
Step
With the tailboard lowered, fold down
the step. Fold up when not required.
Closing
Raise the tailboard and push firmly
into position. Push down the release
levers ensuring locks engage fully.
326 Body conversions
Swinging
The tailboard lower hinges can be
released to allow the tailboard to
swing from its upper hinges during
tipping operations.
9Warning
To prevent the tailboard becoming
detached from the vehicle, ensure
that the upper hinges are engaged
with the release levers in the
locked position.
Release the lower hinges using the
remote lever located at the rear of the
body. The tailboard is disengaged
and will swing from its upper hinges.
To lock, engage the lower tailboard
hinges and push the remote lever to
the lock position. Check the tailboard
is secure.
Sideboards
9Warning
The sideboards are heavy.
Take care when lowering the
sideboards, do not allow them to
drop down unassisted.
To open, pull up the release levers to
disengage the locks. Lower the
sideboard fully.
To close, raise the sideboard and
push firmly into position. Push down
the release levers ensuring locks
engage fully.
Body conversions 327
Lashing eyes
Secure heavy objects with lashing
straps attached to the lashing eyes.
Caution
The maximum force applied to the
lashing eyes should not exceed
4000 N or 8000 N at 30°.
Refer to the safety warning labels
located on the tipper or dropside
body.
Additional cargo strap retainers are
located under the tipper body floor.
Tipper operation
9Warning
Before operating the tipper, apply
the parking brake and select
neutral gear position.
The operator must remain at the
control to ensure tipping and
lowering are performed correctly.
Keep other people away when
tipping function is in use.
Ensure the vehicle is on solid
ground and that the tipper body
can be raised to the maximum
height without touching overhead
obstructions.
The tipper body has two locking pins
which must be always attached while
operating. The locking pins are used
to obtain any one of the three tipping
positions.
Caution
The tipper must not be operated
with locking pins incorrectly
installed.
Pins installed diagonally opposite
or in both front pivot positions will
result in damage if tipping is
attempted.
328 Body conversions
Tipping to the side
Push lever to access the front pivot.
Insert locking pins into the front and
rear pivots on the same side. Ensure
the handle and locator on both locking
pins are facing up.
Rotate both locking pins away from
the upright position and secure each
locking chain. Lower the sideboard
fully.
Tipping to the rear
9Warning
To prevent the tailboard becoming
detached from the vehicle, ensure
that the upper hinges are engaged
and push the release levers
downwards to engage the locks
fully.
Insert locking pins into the left and
right rear pivots. Ensure the handle
and locator on both locking pins are
facing up. Rotate both locking pins
away from the upright position and
secure each locking chain.
Body conversions 329
Isolation switch
The system must be activated using
the isolation switch located on the left-
hand side of the chassis. Turn the
isolator switch to the ON position.
When the tipper is not in use, turn the
isolation switch to the OFF position.
Raising and lowering the tipper
The tipper is operated using the
remote control located by the front
seats.
The remote control enables the user
to supervise the operation of the
tipper from outside the vehicle.
Press switch:
â: raise
ã: lower
When the tipper is active an acoustic
signal sounds.
The tipper can be stopped at any time
by releasing the switch.
The tipper body will cease moving
automatically when it reaches the
maximum height.
To stop in an emergency, press the
red button.
Store the remote control in the holder
when not in use.
Safety cable
The safety cable attached to the
tipper body prevents the tipper body
being raised too far. Should the safety
cable become damaged it must be
replaced immediately. Seek the
assistance of a workshop.
Safety prop
The safety prop is located under the
left-hand side of the tipper body and
is provided only to assist in supporting
the empty tipper body when tipped to
the rear, for carrying out visual
inspection of the vehicle components.
330 Body conversions
Using the safety prop
1. Prepare the tipper body for tipping
to the rear.
2. Raise the tipper fully.
3. Raise the safety prop to align with
support on the tipper.
4. Lower the tipper body until the
safety prop is in contact with the
tipper.
Stowing the safety prop:
1. Raise the tipper body sufficiently
to release the safety prop from its
support.
2. Lower the safety prop into the
stowed position.
3. Lower the tipper body.
Hydraulic oil level
Caution
Before any inspection work can be
carried out the safety prop must be
in position.
With the tipper fully raised, the
hydraulic oil level must be between
the MIN and MAX marks.
Caution
Only use products that have been
tested and approved. Damage
resulting from the use of
nonapproved materials will not be
covered by the warranty.
The use of additives could cause
damage and invalidate the
warranty.
Check the hydraulic oil level after long
driving on bumpy or steep roads.
Have the cause of the loss of
hydraulic oil remedied by a workshop.
Use only hydraulic oil type SAE 10
(ISO 32), or a type Q8 ELI 1298L
suitable for Class 1 conditions.
Body conversions 331
Toolbox
Unlock using the key provided and
turn latches to open.
Close the door and turn both latches,
then lock with the key.
Caution
Ensure the toolbox door is
properly secure before setting off.
Exterior lighting
Additional exterior lights illuminate in
combination with the side lights.
Have bulbs replaced by a workshop.
Cleaning
Dirt or mud which remains dry on the
body may become abrasive and can
damage paint, seals, locks and
hinges.
Clean the following parts if they
become contaminated with dirt:
Sideboard and tailboard locking
latches and hinges.
Tipper body pivot pins and
locating holes.
Caution
Do not spray high-pressure water
directly at the hydraulic seals,
pump, reservoir, hydraulic ram ball
joints, or guide clamps.
After cleaning, check, and if
necessary lubricate the components
listed in the vehicle checks.
9Warning
Do not venture under the tipper
body when raised.
Vehicle checks
Check regularly the following items:
Visually check the subframe
mountings, the safety cables and
the hydraulic system. If any of the
332 Body conversions
components appear loose,
defective or leaking, seek the
assistance of a workshop to
rectify the cause of the fault.
The tipper has an operating
angle of 45° - 50°. If this limit is
exceeded, seek the assistance of
a workshop to rectify the cause of
the fault.
Do not operate the tipper if the
acoustic signal doesn't sound.
Seek the assistance of a
workshop.
Lubricate every six months the
tipper body pivots with high-
pressure grease.
Check every 50 work hours or 6
months, whichever occurs first,
the hydraulic oil level in the
reservoir.
Technical data
The technical data is determined in
accordance with European
Community standards.
We reserve the right to make
modifications. Specifications in the
vehicle documents always have
priority over those stated here.
Additional information can be found
on the body data plate.
Declaration of conformity
The declaration of conformity which
meets directive 2006/42/CE is
provided with the vehicle.
Body conversions 333
Box body
Keys
The radio remote control only
operates the front door locks.
Additional keys are provided for the
load compartment door locks.
Doors
Side door
Unlock by turning the key under cover
(1) in the side door lock. Press button
(2) and fully extend door handle (3).
Pull the door handle to open door.
When closing, with the door handle
fully extended; push the door shut.
Push the handle back into the recess
and lock with the key to secure.
Rear doors
Opening
Unlock by turning the key under cover
(1) in the rear door lock. Press button
(2) and fully extend door handle (3).
Pull the door handle to open door.
The left-hand rear door is opened by
lifting the interior catch.
334 Body conversions
When opening the doors to 270°, the
doors are retained in the fully open
position by securing the catches on
the body side.
Closing
Release the catches from the body
side and always close the left-hand
rear door first.
When closing, with the door handle
fully extended; push the door shut.
Push the handle back into the recess
and lock with the key to secure.
Roller shutter
Opening
Unlock by turning the key in the rear
door lock (1).
Turn latch (2) to release lever.
Lift lever (3) fully until the safety catch
is engaged.
Closing
Pull the roller shutter down using the
strap. Release catch (2) and lift lever
(1) until it engages. Turn latch to
secure lever and lock using the key.
Step
To lower the step, pull the step out
from beneath the vehicle body and
swing it down.
To stow the step, swing up into the
horizontal position and push into the
recess under the vehicle body.
Body conversions 335
Ladder
To lower the ladder, push down latch
to release and pull the ladder out.
Unfold the ladder and attach the
bottom step into position. Ensure the
latch engages and the steps are
secure before climbing.
9Warning
The ladder must be stowed
securely before driving.
Overcab storage
The total weight in this compartment
must not exceed 80 kg.
Load rails
Load anchorage rails mounted in the
load compartment provide anchorage
points for securing cargo.
The maximum load on each rail is
2500 N.
It is not permitted to transport cargo
on the roof and/or cab.
336 Body conversions
Interior lighting
Press switch: light will operate for
approx. 10 minutes.
Bulb replacement
1. Release screws using a suitable
screwdriver and remove lens.
2. Remove and replace bulb.
3. Refit lens and secure screws.
Crew van
Child restraint systems
9Warning
Child restraint systems must not
be installed to any position on the
rear passenger seat.
Child restraint systems 3 63.
Storage
Storage compartments, pockets and
nets are located in the rear passenger
compartment.
Body conversions 337
Underseat storage
To gain access to the storage
compartment under the seat, pull the
front of the seat cushion up and
forward.
Do not place heavy items in the
storage area.
9Warning
Ensure the seat cushion is
returned to the rest position before
occupying seat.
Storage nets
9Warning
Do not place heavy or pointed
objects in the storage nets.
338 Body conversions
An additional storage net is located
on the seat base.
Load compartment storage
Items can be stowed in the recess
beneath the rear bulkhead.
Tie rods
9Warning
Do not secure cargo using the tie
rods in the load compartment.
Body conversions 339
340
Index A
Absorptive Glass Mat battery..... 271
Accessories and vehicle
modifications .......................... 266
ACC files..................................... 151
Activating Bluetooth function...... 194
Activating the navigation system 164
Activating voice recognition........ 188
Active emergency braking..102, 250
Adaptation volume km/h............. 136
AdBlue........................ 100, 231, 310
AdBlue gauge............................... 91
AdBlue tank................................ 314
Add a favourite destination......... 174
Adding contacts to the
phonebook.............................. 197
Adjustable air vents ................... 218
AF (Alternative Frequency)......... 146
Airbag and belt tensioners ........... 96
Airbag deactivation ................ 62, 97
Airbag label................................... 58
Airbag system .............................. 58
Air conditioning regular
operation ................................ 220
Air conditioning system .............. 206
Air intake .................................... 220
Air suspension ........................... 228
Air suspension system................ 304
Air vents...................................... 218
Antifreeze................................... 270
Antilock brake system ................ 241
Antilock brake system (ABS) ....... 98
Anti-theft alarm system ................ 35
Anti-theft bolts............................. 296
Anti-theft locking system .............. 34
Anti-theft security lock.................. 22
Appearance care........................ 305
Armrest ........................................ 50
Ashtrays ....................................... 89
AST (Autostore list).................... 145
Audio players.............................. 127
Audio settings............................. 134
Automatic call waiting................. 197
Automatic light control ............... 108
Automatic locking................... 23, 28
Automatic phone connection...... 192
Automatic station search............ 143
Automatic station storing............ 145
Automatic switch-off................... 127
Automatic zoom.......................... 164
Autostop....................... 17, 224, 225
Autostore lists............................. 145
Auxiliary heater........................... 213
AUX input................................... 149
AUX input usage........................ 149
Avoid part of route...................... 179
B
Balance....................................... 134
Bass............................................ 134
341
Battery.................... 20, 21, 213, 271
Battery discharge protection ...... 115
Battery, jump starting.................. 301
Battery replacement................... 164
Belts.............................................. 54
Bluetooth.................................... 190
Bluetooth connection.......... 154, 194
Bluetooth device list................... 194
Bluetooth music.......................... 154
Bonnet ....................................... 267
Bottle holders................................ 72
Brake assist ............................... 243
Brake fluid .......................... 271, 310
Brakes ............................... 241, 271
Brake system ............................... 98
Breakdown.................................. 304
Browse map................................ 179
Bulb replacement ....................... 274
Bus
Rear seats................................. 51
C
Cabin bulkhead grille.................... 78
Call lists...................................... 197
Call waiting................................. 197
Capacities .................................. 314
Cargo management system ........ 76
Car Pass ...................................... 20
Catalytic converter ..................... 231
Central locking system ................ 23
Centre high-mounted brake light 279
Change Home location............... 164
Change passkey for Bluetooth
connection............................... 194
Change system language... 127, 136
Changing tyre and wheel size ...292
Charging system .......................... 97
Child locks ................................... 29
Child restraint installation
locations ................................... 66
Child restraints.............................. 63
Child restraint systems ........ 63, 336
Cigarette lighter ........................... 89
Cleaning..................................... 331
Cleaning the vehicle................... 305
Climate control ............................. 15
Climate control systems............. 205
Clock ................... 86, 127, 136, 164
Coat hooks................................... 72
Compass.................................... 164
Connecting an audio device....... 154
Connection................................. 192
Control elements overview......... 120
Control indicators.......................... 93
Control of the vehicle ................. 222
Controls........................................ 83
Convex shape .............................. 38
Coolant....................................... 270
Coolant and antifreeze............... 310
Coolant heater............................ 213
Co-ordinates....................... 164, 174
Country information............ 179, 197
Cruise control .................... 101, 246
Cupholders .................................. 72
D
DAB............................................ 148
Danger, Warnings and Cautions ...4
Dashboard.................................... 11
Data sharing settings.................. 127
Daytime running lights ............... 111
Daytime running lights setting.... 127
Deactivating Bluetooth function..194
Deactivating guidance................ 179
Declaration of conformity.... 316, 332
DEF............................................ 231
Defining the priority phone......... 192
Delete a favourite destination..... 174
Delete device from Bluetooth
device list................................ 194
Demisting and defrosting.............. 15
Destination.................................. 164
Destination input ........................ 174
Dialling a telephone number....... 197
Diesel exhaust fluid.................... 231
Diesel fuel................................... 259
Diesel fuel system bleeding ....... 273
Diesel particle filter .................... 230
Digital audio broadcasting.......... 148
Disconnecting an audio device... 154
342
Disconnecting a phone............... 192
Display........................................ 127
Displaying pictures..................... 159
Display screen operation.... 127, 190
Door locks..................................... 22
Door open .................................. 102
Doors.................................... 29, 333
DPF (diesel particle filter)........... 230
Drink holders................................ 72
Driver assistance systems.......... 246
Driver Information Centre........... 103
Driving characteristics and
towing tips .............................. 262
Driving economically................... 222
Driving hints................................ 222
Driving style indicator
Fuel economy gauge.............. 127
E
Easy access............................... 127
Eco-coaching.............................. 127
Eco Driving................................. 127
ECO mode.................................. 222
Edit Itinerary............................... 179
Electric adjustment ...................... 38
Electrical accessories................... 86
Electrical system......................... 282
Electronic climate control system 207
Electronic driving programmes ..240
Electronic key system................... 21
Electronic Stability Control .. 99,
245, 263
Emergency call........................... 197
Emergency exit....................... 41, 43
Emergency number.................... 197
End-of-life vehicle recovery ....... 267
Engine compartment fuse box ... 284
Engine coolant ........................... 270
Engine coolant temperature ........ 99
Engine coolant temperature
gauge ....................................... 91
Engine drag torque control......... 245
Engine exhaust .......................... 230
Engine identification................... 313
Engine oil ................... 268, 310, 314
Engine oil additives.................... 310
Engine oil pressure .................... 100
Engine oil viscosity grades......... 310
Enhanced traction function 244,
245, 246
Enter an address........................ 174
Entering a number manually...... 197
Event data recorders.................. 320
Exhaust gases............................ 230
Exit lighting ................................ 114
Exterior care .............................. 305
Exterior light ............................... 101
Exterior lighting ............ 13, 108, 331
Exterior mirrors............................. 38
External device authorisation..... 194
F
Fader.......................................... 134
Fault ........................................... 241
Favourite destinations................ 174
Favourites................................... 127
Media...................................... 127
Navigation............................... 127
Phone...................................... 127
Services.................................. 127
Fire extinguisher........................... 79
First aid......................................... 79
First aid kit ................................... 79
Fixed air vents ........................... 219
FM station list............................. 145
Fog lights.................................... 111
Folding mirrors ............................. 38
Folding mirrors setting................ 127
Folding seat.................................. 72
Front airbag system ..................... 61
Front courtesy light..................... 112
Front fog lights ........... 101, 111, 276
Front reading light....................... 114
Front seats.................................... 45
Front storage................................ 72
Front turn lights .......................... 276
Fuel economy gauge
Driving style indicator.............. 127
Fuel for diesel engines .............. 259
Fuel gauge ................................... 91
Fuel tank..................................... 314
343
Functions during a telephone call 197
Fuse box............................. 284, 285
Fuses ......................................... 282
G
Gauges......................................... 89
Gear shifting................................. 98
General information... 116, 149,
151, 154, 161, 187, 190, 262
Glass panel .................................. 43
Glovebox ..................................... 72
Glovebox cooler ......................... 219
GPS (Global Positioning System) 161
Grab handles................................ 74
Ground clearance....................... 228
Guidance ................................... 179
H
Hand brake - see Parking brake. 242
Handsfree phone system........... 197
Hazard warning flashers ............ 111
Headlight flash ........................... 110
Headlight range adjustment ...... 110
Headlights.................. 108, 109, 275
Headlights when driving abroad 110
Head restraint adjustment ............. 8
Head restraints ............................ 44
Heated exterior mirrors................. 15
Heated mirrors ............................. 39
Heated rear window............... 15, 42
Heating ........................................ 51
Heating and ventilation system . 205
Help!................................... 179, 187
High beam ......................... 101, 109
High beam assist................ 101, 109
Hill start assist ........................... 243
Home address............................ 174
Home location............................. 164
Horn ....................................... 14, 83
Hub cap hook............................. 287
Hydraulic oil level........................ 330
I
i-Announcement......................... 146
Identification plate ..................... 313
Idle speed control....................... 225
Ignition switch positions ............. 223
Image settings............................ 127
Image viewer.............................. 164
Immobiliser .................................. 37
Indicators...................................... 89
Inductive charging........................ 88
i-News service............................ 146
Info Display................................. 103
Information displays.................... 103
Information on the display..134, 164
Infotainment controls.................. 127
Infotainment system................... 103
Switching on/off....................... 127
Initial drive information.................... 6
Instrument cluster ........................ 89
Instrument panel controls........... 120
Instrument panel fuse box ......... 284
Instrument panel illumination ..... 282
Instrument panel overview ........... 11
Instrument panel storage.............. 71
Interior care ............................... 307
Interior lighting.................... 112, 336
Interior lights ...................... 112, 281
Interior mirrors.............................. 39
Interruption of power supply ...... 241
Intersection view......................... 164
Introduction .................................... 3
iPod............................................ 151
ISOFIX.......................................... 63
Isolation switch........................... 327
i-Traffic service........................... 146
J
Jack............................................ 287
Jack plug.................................... 149
Journey record............................ 103
Jump starting ............................. 301
K
Keyboards in the display.... 164, 190
Keys ..................................... 19, 333
Keys, locks................................... 19
L
Ladder........................................ 335
Lane departure warning....... 99, 258
344
Lane images............................... 164
Language................................... 127
Lashing eyes ....................... 75, 327
Lashing straps.............................. 75
Latitude, Longitude..................... 174
Laying up the vehicle.................. 271
Light covers, misted.................... 112
Lighting....................................... 108
Lighting features......................... 114
Light switch ................................ 108
Limited-slip rear axle.................. 246
Limited speed............................. 102
Load compartment................. 23, 74
Load compartment fuse box ...... 285
Load compartment grille............... 78
Load compartment lighting......... 113
Loading information ............. 80, 324
Load rails.................................... 335
Local search............................... 174
Loudness.................................... 134
Low beam................................... 101
Low fuel ..................................... 101
Low volume sound enhancement 134
Luggage floor net......................... 75
M
Mailbox....................................... 197
Malfunction indicator light ............ 97
Manual adjustment ...................... 38
Manual anti-dazzle ...................... 39
Manual door locks........................ 23
Manual mode ............................. 240
Manual phone connection.......... 192
Manual station search................ 143
Manual station storing................ 145
Manual transmission............. 16, 238
Manual transmission
automated......................... 16, 238
Manual windows .......................... 41
Maps........................................... 161
Map screen................................. 164
Menu screen....................... 134, 164
Messages................................... 104
Mirror adjustment ........................... 9
Mirrors.................................... 38, 39
Misted light covers ..................... 112
Mobile phones and CB radio
equipment .............................. 203
Modes of operation..................... 127
Motorway view............................ 164
MP3 files..................................... 151
MP3 player................................. 151
MP3 players................................ 151
Multimedia.................................. 159
Multimedia settings..................... 136
Musical atmosphere................... 134
Mute............................................ 127
N
Navigation control....................... 188
Navigation services.................... 127
Navigation system
Creating an account................ 161
GPS (Global Positioning
System)................................... 161
Installing the software............. 161
Maps....................................... 161
Registering the Navigation
system..................................... 161
SD card................................... 161
Software installation................ 161
Traffic info service................... 161
USB memory stick................... 161
Navigation system preferences..164
Navigation volume...................... 164
Navigation warnings................... 164
News........................................... 146
New vehicle running-in .............. 223
Number plate light ..................... 280
O
Object detection systems........... 252
Odometer ..................................... 90
Oil............................................... 268
Oil, engine.......................... 310, 314
Oil pressure................................ 100
Onboard computer...................... 127
Operation............................ 154, 197
345
Outside temperature .................... 85
Overcab storage .................. 74, 335
Overhead console ....................... 73
Overrun cut-off ........................... 225
P
Pairing a mobile phone............... 194
Pairing an audio device.............. 154
Park Assist.................................. 127
Parking ................................ 18, 228
Parking assist ............................ 252
Parking brake....................... 98, 242
Parking distance control............. 252
Parking ticket holder..................... 43
Particulate filter........................... 230
Pedals......................................... 222
Performing work ........................ 267
Phone......................................... 190
Phonebook................................. 197
Phone connection....................... 192
Phone control............................. 189
Phone controls............................ 190
Phone installation instructions.... 203
Phone menu............................... 197
Phone operating guidelines........ 203
Phone projection........................ 160
Phone settings............................ 197
Photos........................................ 159
Pictures....................................... 159
Planning preferences................. 164
Playing movies........................... 159
Playing music via Bluetooth....... 154
Playing saved audio files............ 151
POI categories............................ 174
Points of interest......................... 127
Points of Interest (POI)............... 174
POIs.................................... 127, 174
Portable CD players................... 149
Power door locks.......................... 28
Power outlets ............................... 86
Power side step............................ 29
Power sliding door........................ 29
Power steering fluid.................... 270
Power take-off............................ 263
Power windows ............................ 41
Preheating ......................... 100, 224
Prepare route in advance........... 174
PTY (Program type).................... 146
Puncture............................. 293, 296
Q
Quick menu................................ 164
R
Radio.......................................... 141
DAB......................................... 148
Digital Audio Broadcasting...... 148
Radio controls............................. 141
Radio data system (RDS) .......... 146
Radio Frequency Identification
(RFID)..................................... 323
Radio functions................... 145, 146
Radio reception.......................... 141
Radio remote control ................... 20
Radio station name search......... 143
Radio text................................... 146
Rain sensor.................................. 84
RDS............................................ 146
REACH....................................... 320
Reading lights ............................ 114
Rear air conditioning system ..... 212
Rear bench seat storage.............. 73
Rear camera............................... 127
Rear camera view settings......... 127
Rear courtesy light...................... 112
Rear doors ................................... 33
Rear fog light ............. 101, 112, 277
Rear heating system .................. 210
Rear OFF.................................... 134
Rear reading light....................... 114
Rear reversing lens...................... 41
Rear seats ................................... 51
Bus............................................ 51
Installing.................................... 51
Rear seat access...................... 51
Removing.................................. 51
Rear storage................................. 74
Rear view camera ...................... 256
Rear view display......................... 40
Rear windows .............................. 41
Rear window wiper setting.......... 127
346
Recalling a station...................... 145
Recalling a stored station........... 143
Receiving calls............................ 197
Recent destinations.................... 174
Recommended fluids and
lubricants ........................ 310, 314
Refuelling ................................... 260
Region........................................ 146
Registered trademarks............... 320
Remote control............................. 20
Restore default settings.............. 127
Restore factory settings.............. 136
Retractable parking brake.......... 242
Reversing lights ......................... 112
Ride control systems.......... 244, 246
Ride height................................. 228
Roller shutter.............................. 334
Roof.............................................. 43
Glass panel............................... 43
Roof load...................................... 80
Roof rack ..................................... 80
Route.......................................... 164
Route information....................... 179
Route planning method.............. 164
Route settings............................. 164
S
Safety alerts................................ 164
Safety belts................................... 54
Safety net .................................... 78
Safety prop................................. 329
Save a favourite destination....... 174
Saved locations.......................... 174
SD card............................... 161, 164
Search for Bluetooth device....... 194
Search radio station name......... 143
Seat adjustment ....................... 7, 46
Seat belt ........................................ 8
Seat belt reminder ....................... 96
Seat belts ..................................... 54
Seat heating................................. 51
Seat position ................................ 45
Security code.............................. 118
Select a destination.................... 174
Selecting the waveband............. 141
Selective catalytic reduction....... 231
Selector lever ............................. 239
Service ............................... 220, 309
Service display ...................... 92, 98
Service information .................... 309
Services...................................... 127
Service vehicle soon .................... 98
Settings....................................... 127
Setting the time........................... 127
Setting the volume...................... 127
Setting up the navigation system 164
Side airbag system ...................... 62
Side blind spot alert.................... 254
Sideboards................................. 326
Sidelights.................................... 108
Side turn lights ........................... 279
Side wind assist.......................... 245
Side windows................................ 41
Simulcast.................................... 146
Slideshow................................... 164
Sliding door .................................. 29
Sliding side door........................... 29
Smartphone
Phone projection..................... 160
Software version......................... 197
Sound optimisation..................... 134
Spare wheel ............................... 299
Speed cameras.......................... 164
Speed dependent volume.......... 136
Speed limiter....................... 102, 248
Speedometer ............................... 89
Speed warning........................... 102
Starting and operating................ 223
Starting off ................................... 17
Starting the engine....... 17, 224, 239
Station search............................. 143
Station storing............................. 145
Steering...................................... 222
Steering column controls...... 83, 120
Steering wheel adjustment .... 10, 83
Steering wheel controls ............... 83
Step............................................ 334
Stop engine.................................. 98
Stop-start system.......... 17, 101, 225
Storage................................. 71, 336
347
Storage compartments................. 71
Storage net............................. 72, 73
Stored stations............................ 143
Sun visors .................................... 43
Suspension height...................... 228
Suspension seat........................... 46
Switching on/off.......................... 127
Swivelling shelf............................. 72
Symbols ......................................... 4
Symbols overview ...................... 186
System settings.......................... 136
T
Tachograph........................ 102, 107
Tachometer ................................. 90
Tailboard..................................... 325
Tail lights ................................... 277
Technical data............................ 332
Text information (Radio text)...... 146
Theft-deterrent feature .............. 118
Three-point seat belt .................... 55
Thumbnails................................. 159
Time............................................ 127
Tipper operation......................... 327
Tone settings.............................. 134
Toolbox....................................... 331
Tools .......................................... 287
Top-Tether.................................... 63
Touch operation overview.......... 134
Touchscreen............................... 103
Tow bar....................................... 262
Towing........................................ 262
Towing another vehicle ............. 305
Towing a trailer........................... 262
Towing equipment ..................... 263
Towing eye................................. 304
Towing the vehicle ..................... 304
Traction Control system ............. 244
Traffic announcements (TA)....... 146
Traffic announcement volume.... 136
Traffic information....................... 179
Traffic info service...................... 161
Traffic safety....................... 116, 190
Trailer coupling........................... 262
Trailer stability assist ................. 263
Trailer towing ............................. 262
Transmission ............................... 16
Transmission display ........... 92, 238
Tread depth ............................... 292
Treble......................................... 134
Trip computer .................... 106, 127
Trip odometer .............................. 90
Trip report................................... 127
Turbo engine warm-up............... 224
Turn lights ............................ 95, 111
Tyre chains ................................ 293
Tyre changing............................. 296
Tyre designations ...................... 288
Tyre pressure ............................ 289
Tyre pressure monitoring
system............................. 100, 290
Tyre pressures ........................... 315
Tyre repair kit ............................. 293
Tyres .......................................... 288
Tyres and wheel size, changing. 292
U
Underseat storage ....................... 73
Unpairing a mobile phone.......... 194
Update FM list............................ 145
Updating stations list.................. 145
Upholstery.................................. 307
Usage................. 127, 141, 149, 164
USB drive................................... 151
USB drives.................................. 151
USB memory stick.............. 161, 164
USB port..................................... 151
USB socket........................... 86, 151
Using smartphone applications..160
Using the display screen............ 127
Using the Infotainment system...127
Using this manual .................. 3, 116
V
Variable effort steering................. 99
Vehicle battery ................... 271, 301
Vehicle checks................... 267, 331
Vehicle data................................ 314
Vehicle data recording and
privacy..................................... 320
348
Vehicle identification number ....312
Vehicle information..................... 127
Vehicle jack................................ 287
Vehicle messages ..................... 104
Vehicle security............................ 34
Vehicle specific data ...................... 3
Vehicle storage........................... 266
Vehicle tools............................... 287
Vehicle unlocking ........................... 6
Ventilation................................... 205
Videos......................................... 159
Voice control............................... 188
Voicemail box............................. 197
Voice preferences....................... 164
Voice recognition................ 187, 189
Voice tags................................... 189
Volume............................... 134, 189
Adaptation volume km/h......... 136
Low volume sound
enhancement.......................... 134
Rear OFF................................ 134
Speed dependent volume 127, 136
Traffic announcement volume. 136
Volume distribution................. 134
Volume control............................ 197
Volume settings.......................... 136
W
Warning chimes ......................... 105
Warning lights............................... 89
Warning triangle .......................... 79
Washer and wiper systems ......... 14
Washer fluid ............................... 270
Washing the vehicle................... 305
Waveband selection................... 141
Waypoints........................... 174, 179
Weather...................................... 164
Wheel changing ......................... 296
Wheel covers ............................. 292
Wheels and tyres ....................... 288
Wheel wrench............................. 287
Where am I?....................... 179, 197
Wide view mirror..................... 39, 43
Window guard............................... 78
Windows................................. 40, 41
Windscreen................................... 40
Windscreen wiper and washer .... 84
Winter tyres ............................... 288
Wiper blade replacement .......... 274
WMA files................................... 151
Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd.
The information contained in this publication is effective as of the date indicated below. Vauxhall Motors Ltd. reserves the right to make changes to the technical specifications,
features and design of the vehicles relative to the information contained in this publication, as well as changes to the publication itself.
Edition: June 2021, Vauxhall Motors Ltd.
Printed on chlorine-free bleached paper.
*ID-VMVBORIE2106-EN*
ID-VMVBORIE2106-en
347


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Vauxhall Movano 2021 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Vauxhall Movano 2021 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 24.97 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info